Operations Center - 8777 SW Burnham Street - Specifications „ S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
0 R T H E
C O N S T R U C T I O N O F
N E W O P E R A T I O N S C E N T E R
OFFICE BUILDING - 8,456 SO. FT.
FIELD OPERATIONS BUILDING - 9,496 SO. FT.
jw 8777 S.W. Burnham Street
Tigard, Oregon
LFOR
r
ARC�� TIGARD WATER DISTRICT
8841 S.W. Commercial St.
RUSSELL L. H Tigard, Oregon 97223
gELLEVUE,W H Phone: 1-503-639-1554
Z)
OF OF 0
JUNE 1988
r F 0 R E W A R D
The specifications in their entirety are prepared in
parts, numbered I thru V. Parts I ,II, III are bound to-
gether in a separate folder. Parts IV and V are
bound together herein. All parts are hereby made a part
of the complete documents with the same force and effect
as though all parts and plans referred to therein were
under one binding, together with detailed drawings.
The documents and proposals which appear herein or
for which provisions are made must be used in submitting
proposals for construction of the Operations Center for
Tigard Water District, Washington County, Oregon as
defined by the plans and specifications therefore.
The general classification of each part is as listed
below:
r
PART I. . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTICr, TO CONTRACTORS,
PROPOSAL FORMS, AND
ALLIED DOCUMENTS
PART II . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART III. . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART IV. . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIAL PROVISIONS
PART V. . . . . . . . . . . . . TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
Should addenda to the specifications become necessary,
they shall be deemed a part of the designated section and
shall be issued in numerical order.
SPECIAL NOTE TO ALL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS:
YOU ARE ADVISED TO READ VERY CAREFULLY PAGES SP-16
THROUGH SP-19 OF PART IV WHICH PERTAINS TO WORK AND MATERIALS
TO BE FURNISHED BY OWNER.
PART IV
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page
SP-01 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-01
SP-02 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF OREGON LAW. . . . . . . . SP-01
1. Payment of Liens, Withholding
Taxes, Contribution to Industrial
Accident Fund, Labor & Materials. . SP-01
2 . Payment of Claims by the Owner. . . . SP-02
3. Working Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-02
4. Nondiscrimination of Labor. . . . . . . . SP-02
5. Minimum Wage Rates on Public Works SP-02
6. Forfeiture of Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . SP-03
7. Payment of Medical Care and
Attention to Employees. . . . . . . . . . . . SP-04
S. Any and all other of the laws
of Oregon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-04
SP-03 SPECIFICATION BY STANDARD DESIGNATIONS. . SP-04
SP-04 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. . . . SP-05
SP-05 PATENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-05
SP-06 GENERAL STATEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-06
SP-07 SCOPE OF WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-06
SP-08 PLANS. . SP-06
SP-09 TIME OF COMPLETION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-09
SP-10 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-10
SP-11 SITE INVESTIGATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11
SP-12 COST DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11
SP-13 ACCESS TO WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11
SP-14 INCLUSION IN SUBCONTRACTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-11
SP-15 "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-12
SP-16 SAFETY STANDARDS AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION SP-13
SP-17 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-13
SP-18 RIGHT-OF-WAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-13
SP-19 INTERFERENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . SP-13
' SP-20 PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES. . . . . . . . . . SP-14
SP-21 POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION. . . . . . . . . . SP-14
SP-22 PAYMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-14
SP-23 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS. . . . . SP-15
SP-24 ACCESS TO WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP-16
SP-25 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR. . . SP-16
SP-26 WATER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP-16
SP-27 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE. . . . . . . . . . SP-16
SP-28 WORK AND MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER. . . SP-16
wr
Irr
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SP-01 PREQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
The laws of Oregon require that all prospective bidders
on public works construction must qualify therefor to the
satisfaction of the owner of such works before the forms or
other documents which are essential in the preparation and
filing of a proposal may be issued. Prequalification of
bidders on public contracts must be accomplished on forms
prescribed by the Department of Commerce. It therefore will
be presumed that each bidder will have applied to the owner
for approval of his qualifications and will have received
such approval before requesting that said forms or documents
be issued to him. Prospective bidders who heretofore may
have qualified with the owner and whose evidence of such
qualifications is still acceptable may upon request receive
the necessary approval without filing new proof thereof --
all subject to the discretion of the owner. All prospective
bidders requesting forms or documents for preparation of
proposals shall be prequalified with the owner ten (10) days
prior to proposal submission.
SP-02 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF OREGON LAW
1. Payment of Liens, Withholding Taxes, Contributions
to Industrial Accident Fund, Labor, and Materials. The con-
tractor shall make payment promptly as due to all persons
supplying to the contractor labor or materials for the prose-
cution of the work provided for herein, and shall pay all
contributions or amounts due the State Industrial Accident
Fund (SIAF) from the contractor or subcontractors incurred
in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall
permit no lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against
the owner on account of any labor or material furnished, and
shall pay to the Department of Revenue all sums withheld from
employees pursuant to ORS 315. 575 or ORS 316.711 and ORS
316. 714, as amended, and ORS 316. 167.
rr SP-01
2. Payment of Claims by the Owner. In the event the
contractor shall fail, neglect, or refuse to make prompt
payment of any claim for labor or services furnished to the
contractor or subcontractor by any person in connection with
this contract as such claim becomes due, whether said services
and labor be performed for the contractor or a subcontractor,
then, in such event, the proper officer or officers represent-
ing the owner may pay such claim to the person furnishing the
labor or services and charge the amount of the payment against
funds due or to become due the contractor by reason of his
contract in accordance with the provisions of ORS 279. 314 .
The payment of a claim in the manner authorized herein shall
not relieve the contractor or his surety from his or its
obligation with respect to any unpaid claims.
3. Working Hours. No person shall be employed more than
eight (8) ours in any one day or forty (40) hours in any one
week, except in cases of necessity, emergencies, or where the
public policy absolutely requires. In such cases, the laborer
shall be paid at least time and one-half pay for all overtime
in excess of eight (8) hours a day and for work performed on
Saturdays and on any legal holiday as specified in ORS 279. 334 .
4 . Nondiscrimination of Labor. The attention of the
contractor is directed to the provisions of Chapter 659,
Oregon Revised Statutes, relative to unlawful employment
practices and discrimination by employers against any employee
or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color,
or national origin. Particular reference is made to Section
659. 030 ORS, which states that it is an unlawful employment
practice for an employer, because of the race, religion, color
or national origin of any individual, to refuse to hire or
employ or to bar or discharge from employment such individual
or to discriminate against such individual in compensation or
in terms, conditions or privileges of employment.
5. Minimum Wage Rates on Public Works. The contractor
shall comply fully with ORS 279. 348 through 279. 356, which
provides in part that "the hourly rate of wage to be paid by
any contractor or subcontractor to workman upon all public
works shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wage for
an hour' s work in the same trade or occupation in the locality
where such labor is performed. When a contractor or subcon-
tractor is a party to a state-wide agreement in effect with
SP-02
any labor organization the rate of wages� g as established in
the agreement shall be considered to be the prevailing rate
in the locality. " The provisions of the statute do not apply
to workmen or other persons regularly employed on monthly or
per diem salary. The Commissioner of Oregon Bureau of Labor
is responsible for the determination of prevailing rates of
wages and minimum hourly rates of wages.
The minimum hourly rate of wage, not less than the pre-
vailing rate of wage, which may be paid to workmen in each
trade or occupation required for the work under the contract
employed in the performance of the contract either by the
contractor or subcontractor or by other persons doing or con-
tracting to the whole or part of the work contemplated by the
contract shall be as set forth in the Schedule of Minimum
Hourly Wage Rates bound with the proposed ?agreement and the
workmen employed in the performance of the contract, shall be
paid not less than the applicable specified minimum hourly
rate of wage as such is set forth in said schedule. The con-
tractor shall keep the prevailing wage rates for this project
posted in a conspicuous & accessible place in or about project.
In case of conflict between any of the minimum hourly
wage rates set forth in the schedule above referred to and
other pertinent minimum hourly wage rates, as such other rates
may have been set forth in the contract provisions in accord-
ance with federal regulations, the higher of the conflicting
wage rates shall be applicable under the contract.
There is no representation on the part of the owner that
labor can be obtained at the hourly rates bound with the
special provisions. It is the responsibility of bidders to
inform themselves as to local labor conditions and prospective
changes or adjustments of wage rates. No increase in the con-
tract price shall be allowed or authorized on account of the
payment of wage rates in excess of those listed.
r 6. Forfeiture of Contract. This contract may be can-
celled at the election of t e owner for any willful failure
or refusal to faithfully perform the contract according to its
terms as herein provided.
SP-03
r
�j
7 . Pa ent of Medical Care and Attention toes.
The contractor shall promptly, as due, ma a payment to any
person, co-partnership, association, or corporation furnish-
ing medical, surgical, and hospital care, or other needed
care and attention incident to sickness or injury to the
employees of such contractor, all of sums which the contrac-
tor agrees to pay for such services, and all monies and sums
which the contractor has collected or deducted from wages of
his employees pursuant to any law, contract, or agreement
for the purpose of providing or paying for such service.
8. Any and All Other of the Laws of Oregon, which are
applicable to work ot the nature contemplated shall be ob-
served in all respects.
SP-03 SPECIFICATIONS BY STANDARD DESIGNATIONS
Whenever practicable, specifications ecifications will be made herein
by designating certain public standards of recognized organi-
zations. Abbreviation ASTM will be used to indicate American
Society for Testing Materials and this will be followed by
the official published designation number for the particular
specifications to which the reference applies. Other stan-
dards will be indicated by the full name of the sponsoring
organization or by clearly recognized abbreviations. In all
cases, it shall be understood that such references mean the
designated specifications or the latest revision thereof .
Specifications so defined shall have full force and
effect as though they were repeated in full in these speci-
fications.
All material, equipment and devices not specifically
covered by such standards as indicated above, these specifi-
cations, by the plans or by addenda shall be subject to the
approval of the architect to determine the suitability for the
service intended.
SP-04
SP-04 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
Whether or not there appears here or elsewhere herein
specific reference to guarantees of all items of material,
equipment, and workmanship, they nevertheless shall be so
guaranteed against mechanical, structural, or other defects
for which the contractor is responsible that may develop or
become evident within a period of one (1) year from and
after acceptance of the work by the owner. Such guarantees
shall include care of backfilling of ditches or at struc-
tures should the fill settle to such extent as to require
refilling or resurfacing roadway surfaces to restore the
original or intended condition or grade. This guarantee
shall be understood to imply prompt attention to any remedy
of such defects as those mentioned above if and as they
occur after the contractor shall have written notice of
their existence. If the defect, in 'the opinion of the owner,
if of such nature as to demand immediate repair, the owner
shall have the right to make them, and the cost thereof
shall be borne by the contractor.
To support the above guarantee, the contractor's
per-
formance bond shall remain in full force and effect forone(1) year following the acceptance of the project by the owner.
The bond shall be executed by a surety company authorized to
do business within the State of Oregon, and it shall be sub-
ject to the approval of the attorney for the owner.
SP-05 PATENTS
The contractor' s attention is called to the General
Conditions requirement on patents, and the hold harmless
clauses thereof. In addition to the requirements stated
therein, the contractor shall pay all royalties and assume
all responsibilities for the infringement of any patent
required by any process or items of equipment required for
the project. The costs to the contractor of all royalty pay-
ments for use of patented processes or equipment shall be
absorbed in the prices named for the work in the Proposal
form.
SP-05
SP-06 GENERAL STATEMENT
These Special Provisions supplement and amplify certain
sections of the General Provisions .for the project. The
General Provisions shall apply except as herein modified.
SP-07 SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be performed under these specifications and
plans consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equip-
ment necessary for the construction of a new Operations Center,
except for work to be performed, and materials supplied, by
Tigard Water District as specifically described in specifications.
No attempt has been made in these specifications or
plans to segregate work covered by any trade or subcontract
under one specification. Such segregation and establishment
of subcontract limits will be solely a matter of specific
agreement between the contractor and his subcontractors and
shall not be based upon any inclusion, segregation, or arrange-
ment in or of these specifications. The contractor and sub-
contractor in each case is warned that work included in any
subcontract may be divided between several general specifica-
tions and that each general specification or subhead of the
Technical (Provisions) Specifications may include work covered
by two or more subcontracts in excess of any one subcontract.
The above general outline of principal features of the
work does not in any way limit the responsibility of the con-
tractor to perform all work and furnish all plant, labor, and
materials required by the specifications and the plans and
drawings referred to therein.
SP-08 PLANS
The plans are designated by name, number and title.
Where reference is made to the drawings, the "Drawing Number"
of the sheet will be used. Each drawing bears the general
title:
SP-06
TIGARD WATER DISTRICT
NEW OPERATIONS CENTER
DRAWING
NUMBER CONTENT
- Title Page
Project Information
Index to Drawings
Vicinity Map
A-1 Site Plan
M-1 Site Utilities
Details
A-2 Office Building
1/8" Floor Plan
1/8" Foundation Plan
A-3 Maintenance Building
1/8" Foundation Plan
Foundation Details
A-4 Office Building
1/8" Roof Framing
Truss Diagrams
A-5 Office Building
1/8" Roof Plan
A-6 Maintenance Building
1/8" Floor Plan
� s
1/8" Roof Framing
A-7 Maintenance Building
1/8" Roof Plan
1/4" Building Section
A-8
Office Building
1/4" Elevations
A-9 Office Building
1/4" Elevations
A-10 Maintenance Building
1/4" Elevations
1/4" Building Sections
A-11 Maintenance Building
1/4" Elevations
SP-07
A-12 office Building
1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical
Plan.
A-13 office Building
1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical
Plan.
A-14 Maintenance Building
1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical
Plan.
A-15 Maintenance Building
1/4" Partial Floor Plan and Electrical
Plan.
A-16 office Building
1/4" Partial Reflected Ceiling and
Lighting Plan.
A-17 office Building
1/4" Partial Reflected Ceiling and
Lighting Plan.
A-18 Maintenance Building
1/4" Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan.
A-19 Maintenance Building
1/4" Reflected Ceiling and Lighting Plan.
A-20 Wall Sections and Details 1-4.
A-21 Wall Sections and Details 5-9.
A-22 Wall Sections and Details 10-13 .
A-23 Wall Sections and Details 14-17 .
A-24 Miscellaneous Structural Details and
Connections.
A-25 Interior Elevations and Miscellaneous
Architectural Details.
A-26 Room Finish Schedule.
Door Schedule.
Window Schedule.
Light Fixture Schedule.
M-2 Office Building
1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. Plan.
M-3 Office Building
1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C. Plan.
SP-08
M-4 Maintenance Buildina
1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C.
M-5 Maintenance Buildina
1/4" (partial) H.V.A.C.
L-1 Partial Landscape Plan (by owner)
L-2 Partial Landscape Plan (by owner)
SP-09 TIME OF COMPLETION
After Notice to Proceed has been issued by the owner,
the contractor shall complete all work as specified within
the following time frame:
Project complete and in service, ready for
occupancy, including all utilities installed and
connected: 210 consecutive calendar days.
The work shall be completed within the time period
specified by the contractor in his proposal. Work shall
be started within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of
the "Notice to Proceed. " It is believed that a target date
of not later than July 1, 1988 is realistic for start of
construction.
Should the owner cause delay in completion of the work
by reason of requirements on extra work or otherwise provided
for by the plans or these specifications, the contractor will
be granted an extension of time for completion equal to the
amount of such delay and no charge will be made against him
for the extension of time so granted; provided, however,
that all such extension requested by the contractor shall be
made to the owner in writing on or before the fifth day of
the month following that in which the alleged delay is said
to have occurred and such claim for extension of time shall
state explicitly the reason therefor.
Should the contractor fail to file such written claim
for extension of time within the period provided therefor,
he thereby shall have abandoned any claim therefor. No claim
for delay will be considered by the owner except that alleged
to have been caused by extra work or special order of the
owner acting through the architect.
SP-09
In naming the price for the work and for its
completion within the time quoted in the proposal, it shall
be understood and agreed that the work shall be completed
within that time. If, however, said work is not completed
within the time named in the contract as extended to cover
the total days of delay allowed in the paragraph above, the
owner may deduct and retain out of any sum then due or that
may become due the contractor at the time of such delinquency
or later the sum of $100.00 for each and every calendar day
that the date of final completion of the work is delayed.
In submitting the proposal and signing the contract,
the contractor hereby shall have agreed to these provisions
and furthermore that the sum deducted and retained is not a
penalty but reimbursement to the owner for damages that the
owner will have sustained by reason of such delayed completion.
The damages so liquidated are understood to include the
additional cost to the owner for architectural supervision,
interest charges and overhead, of which damages would be
difficult or impossible to ascertain accurately.
It is further understood that should the contractor not
complete the work within the time specified, the owner may
discontinue any further progress payments until the work is
completed and accepted by the owner.
SP-10 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
The owner reserves the right to require that any bidder
before being awarded a contract shall execute a noncollusion
affidavit in such form as will satisfy the owner that the bid
offered is genuine, is not a sham or collusive, and in no
respect or degree is made in the interest or on behalf of any
person, firm or corporation not named in the proposal contain-
ing such bid.
SP-10
SP-11 SITE INVESTIGATION
The contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied
himself as to the nature and location of the work, the
general and local conditions, including but not restricted
to those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling
and storage of materials, availability of water, roads and
groundwater. Information and data furnished or referred to
herein is furnished for information only. Any failure by
the contractor to acquaint himself with the available infor-
mation will not relieve him from responsibility for estimat-
ing properly the difficulty or cost of successfully perform-
ing the work. The owner assumes no responsibility for any
conclusions or interpretations made by the contractor on the
basis of the information made available.
SP-12 COST DATA
If so requested by the Owner, the contractor shall
furnish full information as to the pay of employees and the
cost of materials or other items which are parts of the
finished work or will become so.
SP-13 ACCESS TO WORK
Access to the work shall be provided as may be required
by the owner or his representatives. Also, the contractor
shall provide access to the work for representatives of the
appropriate local governmental agency, city, county, or
state, as well as the Federal Government for inspection of
the work and the methods of construction or for any other
required inspection.
SP-14 INCLUSION IN SUBCONTRACTS
The contractor shall include all applicable provisions
PP
of this section of the specifications in all subcontracts
for work to be performed under this contract.
SP-11
SP-15 "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE
In order to establish a basis for quality, certain
processes, types of machinery and equipment, or kinds of
material may be specified on the plans or herein by desig-
nating a manufacturer by name and referring to his brand
or product designation. It is not the intent of these
specifications to exclude other processes, equipment or
materials of a type and quality equal to those designated.
Whenever a manufacturer' s name, brand or item designa-
tion is given, it shall be understood that the words "or
approved equal" follow such name or designation whether in
fact they do so or not.
If the contractor desires to furnish items of minor
equipment by manufacturers other than those specified, he
shall secure the approval of the architect prior to placing
a purchase order.
Certain items of major equipment, however, are speci-
fied in the Technical Provisions of these specifications.
The contractor may bid upon the use of approved alternate
equipment. In either case, the contractor shall state in
the proposal and list in the space provided the manufacturer
of the major equipment he proposes to furnish.
No extras will be allowed the contractor for any changes
required to adopt the substitute equipment, therefore, the
contractor's proposal including the approved alternate shall
include all costs for any modifications to the plans, such
as structural and foundation changes, or any other modifica-
tion which may be necessary or required for approval and
adaptation of the proposed alternate equipment. Approval of
alternate and equal major equipment will be only by addenda
issued at least five (5) days prior to bid opening. Requests
for approval of this major equipment must come from the manuMW
-
facturer or his representative at least ten (10) days prior
to bid opening. All such requests must be accompanied by
drawings and specifications in sufficient detail to allow the
owner to determine whether or not the equipment proposed is
equal of that specified. The determination as to whether or
not the proposed substitute equals that specified shall rest
solely with the owner.
Regardless of the major equipment furnished or alternate
equipment thereto, the contractor shall furnish the services
of a manufacturer's representative to place the equipment in
operation and to test the equipment after installation.
No substitutions shall be permitted after a proposal has
been accepted by the owner without written approval by the
architect.
SP-12
r
SP-16 SAFETY STANDARDS AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION
The contractor shall exercise every precaution at all
times for the prevention of accidents and the protection of
persons (including employees) and property, and comply with
applicable safety regulations.
SP-17 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS
Prior to construction the Owner will locate and
stake all points of intersection and angle points. Once
these points are established, it will be the contractor's
responsibility to reference and maintain them. The architect
may at his discretion or at the request of the contractor
re-establish these points but such additional surveys may
be at the contractor's expense.
L
SP-18 RIGHT-OF-WAY
The owner will provide the necessary right-of--way or
easements for the work. Information regarding the width,
status and special conditions attached to right-of-way or
easements can be obtained from the owner in advance of the
date when bids are received; the contractor shall confine
his operations to the designated areas and observe all
restrictions. Special occupancy and use of the streets are
subject to and limited by permit from the proper officials,
which must be obtained before the streets are obstructed in
any way. Reasonable occupancy and use will be supported by
wthe owner's certification if necessary.
SP-19 INTERFERENCES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
At certain places, power, light and telephone roles
may interfere with excavation and the operation of the con-
tractor's equipment. Necessary arrangements shall be made
with utility companies for moving or maintaining such poles.
The utility company effected by any such interferences shall
be notified thereof so that the necessary moving or proper
care of poles and appurtenances may have appropriate attention.
f
All costs resulting from any other interferences and
obstructions, or the replacement of such, whether or not
herein specifically mentioned, shall be included and absorbed
in the contractor ' s bid.
SP-13
SP-20 PROGRESS REPORTS AND SCHEDULES
The contractor shall, within ten (10) days after the
date of commencement of the work, prepare and submit to the
Architect for approval a practicable schedule showing the
order in which the contractor proposes to carry on the work,
the date on which he will start the several salient features
(including the procurement of materials, plant and equipment)
and the contemplated dates for completing the same.
SP-21 POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
The owner shall have the right to take possession of or
use any completed or partially complete part of the work.
Such possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of
any work not completed in accordance with the contract. If
such prior possession or use by the owner delays the progress
of the work or causes additional expense to the contractor,
an equitable adjustment in the contract price, and/or the
time of completion, will be made and the contract shall be
modified in writing accordingly.
SP-22 PAYMENTS
The Tigard water District will make progress payments
and final payment as defined in the General Conditions herein
in cash.
The following with regard to the amounts to be retained
from the contract price modify the General Conditions GC-09
(MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT) , Section 91 Partial Payments.
The amount to be retained from any given partial payment
will be such that when added to the sum of amounts previously
retained will bring the total of amounts retained to an amount
equal to 5% of the value of completed work except that upon
substantial completion of the work under the contract which
will be understood to be not less than 97h% of the work, the
owner may, at his discretion, reduce the retained amount to an
amount equivalent to not less than 200% of the contract value
or estimated cost, whichever is greater, of the work remaining
to be done.
SP-14
The amount to be retained in protection of the owner 's
interest as above set forth will be reduced in conformance
with the following:
A. If the contractor deposits with the owner bonds
and securities of a value equal to at least 5% of the amount
of the contract at the time he signs the contract for the
project, no amount will be retained from partial payments.
B. If the contractor deposits bonds and securities
with the owner during the life of the contract, any retained
amounts will be reduced by an amount equal to the value of
the bonds and securities. This reduction in retainage will
be made in the partial payments made subsequent to the time
the contractor deposits the bonds and securities with the
owner.
C, The value of the bonds and securities will be peri-
odically determined by the owner and amount retained on par-
tial payments will be adjusted accordingly.
D. The bonds and securities deposited by the contractor
shall be of a kind approved by the State Treasurer.
E. At the time the owner determines that all require-
ments for protection of the owner's interest have been ful-
filled, all bonds and securities will be returned to the
contractor.
SP-23 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
The contractor under these specifications shall cooperate
�w fully with all other contractors and carefully fit his own
work to such other work as may be directed by the architect.
The contractor shall not commit or permit any act to be com-
mitted which will interfere with the performance of work by
any other contractor.
SP-15
SP-24 ACCESS TO WORK
SP-25 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials,
and plant necessary to complete the project in accordance with
the plans and specifications . However, note that the owner (TWD)
will furnish, at its expense, some material required for the
project (See paragraph SP-28) .
SP-26 WATER SUPPLY
Potable, fresh water will be available on jobsite at 70 psi
via a 2-inch meter.
SP-27 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE
Contractor will be authorized to store equipment and material
on the construction site. The site is partially enclosed with a
6-foot cyclone fence. Owner will remove and dispose of existing
fence upon completion of project.
SP-28 WORK AND MATERIALS TO BE FURNISHED BY OWNER
Tigard Water District, the Owner, provides as its normal
operations, labor, equipment and supervision of contracts to a
variety of construction projects. Therefore, for several differ-
ent reasons, it is the intent of the district to accomplish cer-
tain improvements with "in-house" labor and equipment and to
contract directly with others for work listed on the next few
pages.
The work provided by the district and by other contractors
will require cooperation and coordination with the general con-
tractor. It is believed that any conflicts will be minimal .
SP-16
r
List of material, work and equipment to be furnished by Owner
(or to be contracted separately with others)
A. Fees and permits to City of Tigard
1. Building permit
2. Plan check fee
3. Fire safety plan check
4 . SDC parking
5. Sewer fees
6 . Sewer inspections
B. Site work
w
1. Gravel fill material. Because of the demands on ensuring
an adequate soils base it is impossible in advance to specify the
exact amount of gravel fill necessary for the job. (See para. D
on page SP-19) . TWD will provide on job site all gravel deemed
necessary by the contractor at district' s expense. This applies
to all gravel backfill necessary for refilling ditches, sub-
concrete base for sidewalks, curbs, etc. Contractor need merely
advise inspector on jobsite of his requirements and it will be
delivered to him.
Contractor shall provide all grading and compaction.
Contractor shall also provide the following, but not limited to,
all standing concrete curbs, concrete walks, concrete aprons at
driveways, underground utilities (except as noted in next para-
graph) , brick wall, trenching and backfill, underground power
conduits to designated locations, concrete pads for condensers,
patios, mailbox, sign, etc.
2. Fresh water pipelines. TWD will perform all tasks re-
lated to furnishing and installation of ductile iron (fresh)
water pipelines including fire hydrants and appurtenances to
within five' (5) of buildings. TWD will also install, at its
expense, copper service lines and three (3) meters to serve this
project.
3. Asphalt paving. Any and all asphalt paving will not
be a part of this contract. TWD will request competitive bids
by separate contract for this work later in the construction
phase of this project.
SP-17
4 Landscaping,Landsca in , to soil, irrigation system, etc.
TWD will request competitive bids by separate contract for this
work. Contractor shall provide water and power stubs to selected
locations, outside of buildings, as specified on drawings.
5. Remote fuel station in service yard. Time is of the
essence in preparing these specifications and new very stringent
regulations on installation of fuel tanks make it impossible to
prepare such detailed plans and acquire approval for same on
short notice. Therefore, TWD will prepare plans and request
competitive bids for this work by separate contract at a later
date. Contractor shall provide power stubs as designated on
the drawings.
6. Cyclone fencing. A minimum of additional 6-foot cyclone
fencing with redwood slats will be required for this job. TWD
will contract separately for this work. This includes the cyclone
gate at the vehicular entrance via the brick wall.
7. Lettering for sign. The brick sign structure with lights
shall be installed by contractor. Bronze lettering for same will
be purchased and installed by TWD.
8. Flag poles . Contractor shall provide concrete curbs as
noted in paragraph-2 above and appropriate power thereto, but
the two flag poles will be installed by separate contract with
others.
C. Building equipment and fixtures
1. Smoke detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed
ME
by contractor throughout the buildings as designated on the
drawings and any additional per NFAP STD. 72A & E.
2. Emergency generator and telemetry equipment. TWD will
purchase these items at some distant future date.
3. Free-standing appliances. TWD will purchase and install
two refrigerators, one dryer and one washing machine.
4. Built-in appliances. TWD will purchase two electric
cook top ranges, two microwave ovens with exhaust fan combina-
tions. Contractor shall provide one dishwasher and two garbage
disposal units, color to be determined later for the former.
Contractor will provide and allow spacing for same. (See Division
11 - Equipment) .
5. Window coverings, including curtains for stage. TWD
will purchase the items by separate contract at later date.
MO
SP-18
D. Pre-construction work and soils testing
A soils investigation was conducted at the site by Carlson
Testing, Inc. , as evidenced by the attached letters dated April
5 and 6, 1988.
During the month of May, Tigard Water District personnel
and equipment, along with rented heavy equipment and operator (s) ,
performed the recommended corrections to soil conditions as
described below:
i
LO
"That all structural loads be placed on the medium
stiff brown clayey silts underlying the soft, saturated
clays. Structural fill placed to correct for over-
excavation shall be 3/4" - 1h" minus crushed rock placed
in 8 inch lifts with fills over 18" in depth compacted to
92% density per AASHTO T-180. rills placed under foot-
ings shall have a width equal to twice their depth plus
the width of the footing. "
As this work progressed, frequent additional testing was
conducted by Carlson Testing, Inc. A final satisfactory
report must be received prior to beginning construction of the
Operations Center.
Upon completion of this preliminary work, gravel fill will
be close to the finished grade below the proposed concrete slab.
It is proposed that the finished grade on top of the concrete
slab will be at elevation 161 feet above sea level.
Note that all gravel will be provided and paid for by
Tigard Water District for the entire project, however, final
grading and compaction shall be the responsibility of the con-
tractor.
L
r
L
w
SP-19
Cawtrucoiott Inspeeoion dr Related Tests
Carlson Testing, Inc.
P.O.Box 23814
Ap r i 1 5, 1988 Tigard,Oregon 97223
#CP-3808 Phone(503)684-3460
Tigard Water District
8841 S.W. Commercial St.
Tigard, Oregon 97223
Attn: Mr. John Miller
Re: New Tigard Water District Facility
S.W. Hall Blvd. 8 S.W. Burnham St.
Gentlemen:
At your request, a soils investigation was conducted for two proposed
structures to be located on a vacant parcel of land at the northwest corner of
S.W. Hall Blvd. and S.W. Burnham Street in the City of Tigard, Oregon. The
investigation was conducted at about 10:00 a.m. on April 1 , 1988.
Using a backhoe, five (5) test pits were dug to the medium stiff brown
clayey silts underlying the area at about 5 feet below the surface. The
results of the test pits are shown on the attached soils logs.
The building area is covered with +/- one foot of crushed rock followed
by a +/- 4 foot layer of soft black to blue black saturated silty clay. The
test pit at the west end of the proposed field office was the exception with a
four foot layer of hard, dry blue silty clay. A water table is presently
located at about four feet below the surface.
�r It is recommended that all structural loads be placed on the medium stiff
brown clayey silts underlying the soft, saturated clays. Structural fill
placed to correct for over-excavation shall be 3/4" - 1 1/2" minus crushed
rock placed in 8 inch lifts with fills over 18" in depth compacted to 926
density per AASHTO T-180. Fills placed under footings shall have a width
equal to twice their depth plus the width of the footing.
Footings placed as indicated above may be designed for a soil bearing
pressure of 2000 pounds per square foot.
Engineering or consolidation testing were neither requested nor
performed.
If there are any further questions on this matter, please do not hesitate
to contact our office.
Very Y tru) yours,
Ci� TING, INC.
CJIS�
0985 �
DOZ: llo
Attachment o;tr
D.
T4A2� G(/AT E,4e (�Si RrtT
SOIL LOGS Ti�,o,eo,
rr E•Q S� ,Gs,Np
of fLD O'CF SavTN 4-vo
NO 1 o f�oP.vs o� fin afF
.4 �4 _ NZ NO 3
GrZUSNtD �k � � t i 'a A GNvsN6D /Pcc�c
GR�sp�n 2ouc,
�rw 3 R�5 aF J' ,Q/„�uc, 2
o ,4"IC- \ SBFT 91..aci� Z \ H140120OrtY
3 E
f p S'Lus,c.TY
t \ \
5— I \ S(�Tp «a- 4
f3/Law ti. S. 7 CLAY
S
M *'01u'- s T/r-)= 11 I
II BR�owN
y�y s r`--J 1 M f O/lJM S III Fr=
G"YiY f rc 1 s
10
to to
1
3
CT r2 o i=
NO fF L T2 OFr�goNS
4 NO 5
� NO
qJ11
SoFi gLv£ t2oc-kY z
tFA RL0r_ of=i t3l.uE� 2
3 SF� l�"'" 13lLo�•uiv �£o,u.,.� _, f3Rown,� M�sV�uM
S rr F,= CLh`14.t( S ri F,= cr.. v
I
!s J
Carlson Testing,
Inc . �
P.O. Box 23814 . Tioard Oromm 07)'w i 4"•S'a 8
Carlson Testing, Inc. �cOuede-Itt on&Related Tests
P.O.Box 23814
April 6. 1988 Tigard,Oregon 97223
#CP-3808 Phone(so3)684-3460
Tigard Water District
8841 S.W. Commercial Street
Tigard, Oregon 97223
Re: Tigard Water District Future Facility
California Bearing Ratio (CBR Testing)
Gentlemen:
As requested, we have performed two (2) in-place CBR (California Bearing
Ratio) tests sampled on April 1 , 1988 at the above referenced project at
locations as indicated by our representative. Following are the test results:
CBR No. 1 (ASTM D1883) - South Parking Area @ -8" Below Rock Elevation
Sample Condition: Soaked
Dry Density Before Soak: 102.2 lbs./cu. ft.
Moisture Content Before Soak: 17.66
Moisture Content After Soak: 21 .8%
Bearing Ratio of Sample @ 0. 1" Pen. 10.0
Swell (Percentage of Initial Height) : 0.20%
Surcharge: 15 lbs.
Sample Type: Organic Black Stiff Clay
rr CBR No. 2 (ASTM D1883) - North Parking Area @ -1 ' Below Rock Elevation
Sample Condition: Soaked
Dry Density Before Soak: 100.3 lbs./cu. ft.
Moisture Content Before Soak: 21 .4%
Moisture Content After Soak: 26.4%
Bearing Ratio of Sample @ 0. 1" Pen. 13.0
Swell (Pecentage of Initial Height) : 0.506
Surcharge: 15 lbs.
Sample Type: Black Stiff Clay
The stiff black clay soils described in this report are a suitable
material for pavement subgrade. Care should be taken not to pump or otherwise
disturb soils during construction operations. If, during actual pavement
construction, subgrade soils other than stiff black clays are encountered,
then additional CBR testing should be done and pavement section design should
be re-evaluated.
If there are any further questions on this matter, please do not hesitate
to contact our office.
Very truly yours,
CfLSON ESTJNG, INC
Douglas W. Leach
President
+Yw
rrr
PART V
TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
�Yr
fir
1r
rr
rr
PART v
TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
TE... -
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01511 Temporary 01512 Temporary LightinglecElectricity
01011 Work Covered by
17
Contract Documents 01513 Temporary Heat &
01013 Owner Furnished Ventilation
{
Items & Services 01514 Temporary Telephone
01014 Future Work Service
01016 Contractor's Use of Premises 01515 Temporary Water
01090 Abbreviations 01516 Temporary Sanitary
01210 Preconstruction Conference Facilities
01310 Construction Schedule 01562 Dust Control
01340 Shop Drawings & Samples 01563 Water Control
01341 Manufacturer's Instructions 01580 Project Identification
01342 Material Orders 01590 Temporary Field Offices
01343 Evidence of Subcontracts 01700 Project Closeout
& Other Contracts 01710 Cleaning Up &
01400 Quality Control Custodial Services
01720 Project Record Document
01725 Operating & Maintenance
Data
IVISION 2 - SITE WO K
02200 General Earthwork Requirements DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
02210 Site Grading
02220 Excavating & Backfilling 04001 General Masonry
02230 Soil Compaction Control 04100 Mortar & Grout
02510 Catch Basins 04220 Structural Clay Unit
I 02520 Culverts (None) Masonry
INI� 02612 Asphalt Concrete
Paving (Owner)
s 02620 Curbs & Pads pIVISION 5 - METALS
Er : 02630 Walk & Exterior Slabs 05120 Structural Steel Framing
02635 Pavement Marking (Owner) 05500 Metal Fabrication
02710 Fences & Gates (Owner)
02750 Irrigation System (Owner) VISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
02810 Soil Preparation (Owner) -;
06110 Framing & Sheathing
06181 Glue-Laminated Structural
Units
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 06190 Roof Trusses
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 06200 Finish Carpentry
03310 Standardweight Concrete 06201 Wood Trim
03356 Floor Slab Compound Curing, 06220 Millwork
Cleaning & Surface Hardner
03370 Drypack & Grout
t
r
r. DIVISIOq 7 -
�RECT7AN - ECTAT
OT
07171 Colorless Dam roofin CONSTRUCTION
+ 07210 Flexible Blanket Insulation None this Specification
07400 Metal Roofing Structural
Clay DIVISION 14 - CO vnu
07500 Metal Soffit System SYSTEMS
07600 Sheet Metal Work None this Specification
07900 Sealants
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS See Division 15 for Index
08100 Hollow Metal Doors &
Hollow Metal Frames DIVISION - 16 - ELECTRICAL
08120 Aluminum Doors & Aluminum
Frames See Division 16 for Index
08150 Wood Doors
08330 Coiling Doors
08520 Aluminum Windows
08710 Finish Hardware
08800 Glass & Glazing
++�+ DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09250 Gypsum Drywall
09270 Gypsum Drywall Finishing
09280 Gypsum Plaster
09310 Ceramic Tile
09500 Acoustical Treatment
„ 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring
09680 Carpeting
09900 Painting
rr
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10110 Fire Extinguishers
10120 Folding Stairway
10130 Entrance Mats
10162 Metal Toilet Partitions
10441 Plastic Relief Signs
10810 Toilet Room Accessories
rr,
DIVISION 11 - EOUIPMENT
11000 Appliances
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12310 Prefabricated Plastic
Laminate Casework
12510 Drapery Track
w
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 01011
The work to be performed under these Contract Documents constitutes the
whole of The Project except those excluded portions of the work of The
Project specifically noted in the Contract Documents to be by Owner.
OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS & SERVICES SECTION 01013
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Owner will do following work of Project:
' a. Provide items indicated by Symbols "BO" and "NIC" and items
indicated as "By Owner". Items thus indicated may or may not
be purchased or installed before time of completion of
Contract.
b. Employ and pay for services for independent testing labora-
tory to make compressive strength tests of concrete
cylinders, per ASTM, of jobsite cast concrete work and
precast structural concrete cast at jobsite or plant cast
thus:
(1) Each test will consist of 4 standard cylinders. In
general, one test per 100 cubic yards of concrete and
minimum of one test per days pour for each class of con-
crete will be made.
(2) For each test, 2 cylinders will be loaded to failure at
7 days and 2 cylinders loaded to failure at 28 days.
(3) Furnish cylinder molds, shipping boxes and pay all
shipping costs.
(4) Compute compressive strength per ASTM.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing additional quality control by Contractor per
Section 01400, Quality Control.
b. Providing assistance to testing laboratory personnel for
compressive strength tests per Section 03310, Standardweight
Concrete.
B. INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS:
1. Testing laboratory will mail 4 copies of compressive strength
test results of cylinder failure tests described per 01013-A.
One of these copies to go to Contractor and 3 copies Architect.
2 . Conformance with or deviation from specified requirements will
• be indicated in each laboratory and Inspector's report.
3 . Testing agency and Inspector will report to Architect deviations
or conditions which may lead to deviations as soon as possible
by telephone and Architect will take such timely action as he
may deem appropriate.
FUTURE WORK SECTION 01014
Owner requires the cooperation and coordination with Owner provided
contract work at the site which will run concurrently with the work of
r. the Contract.
l-!
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES SECTION 01016
A. The term "site", as used in Paragraph 4 . 14, Use of Site, of General
Conditions, means the area bounded by Work Limits shown.
B. The term "premises" means the entire area within the fenced pro-
perty lines shown bounding the Tigard Water District Operations
Center.
C. Drawings show the site to be an area smaller than the premises.
D. Confine operations and storage of materials on the premises to area
of site except as otherwise noted below.
E. Protect premises beyond site areas and other adjacent property as
required by Article 10 of General Conditions and as follows:
1. Carry out pumping, draining and control of surface and ground
water so as to avoid endangering any adjacent portion of
premises, facility or property or interrupting, restricting or
otherwise infringing or interfering with the use thereof.
2. Notwithstanding the designation of work limits or the indication
of temporary fences or barricades, provisions of Contract
Documents governing certain portions of phases of work require
that certain operations be carried out beyond such designated
limits. Schedule trenching, utility work and all other work
required beyond such designated limits in such a manner as to
cause or occasion a minimum of inconvenience or disturbance to
or interference with the normal operations of Owner, abutters
and the public. Prosecute such operations expeditiously and
restore affected area to original condition immediately upon
completion of such operations.
r
ABBREVIATIONS SECTION01090
Reference to technical institutions, associations and similar organi-
zations is made in the specifications in accordance with the following
abbreviations:
AA. . . . . Aluminum Associations
AAMA. . . . Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association
I ON AASHO . . . American Association of State Highway Officials
ACI . . . . American Concrete Institute
AGC . . . . The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.
AIA . . . . American Institute of Architects.
++ AIA . . . . American Insurance Association (Formerly National Board of
Fire Underwriters)
AIEE. . . . American Institute of Electrical Engineers
AIMA. . . . Accoustical and Insulating Materials Association
AISC. . . . American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC. . . . American Institute of Timber Construction
ANSI. . . . American National Standards Institute (Formerly USASI)
APA . . . . American Plywood Association
ASHRAE. . . American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Condition-
ing Engineers
rw ASME. . . . American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM. . . . American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI . . . . Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA. . . . American Wood Preservers Association
AWS . . . . American Welding Society
BHMA. . . . Builders Hardward Manufacturer's Association
CBM . . . . Certified Ballast Manufacturers
CS. . . . . Commercial Standard of U.S. Dept. of Commerce
CSI . . . . Construction Specifications Institute
ETL . . . . Electrical Testing Laboratories
Fed. Spec . Federal Specifications
FGMA. . . . Flat Glass Marketing Association
ICBG. . . . International Conference of Building Officials
IES . . . . Illuminating Engineering Society
MLA . . . . Metal Lath Association
MS. . . . . Military Specification
NEMA. . . . National Electrical Manufacturers Assocations
NFPA. . . . National Fire Protection Association
NSF . . . . National Sanitation Foundation
NWMA. . . . National Woodworking Manufacturers Association
PS. . . . . Product Standard of National Bureau of Standards
SCR . . . . Structural Clay Research
SDI . . . . Steel Deck Institute
SJI . . . . Steel Joist Institute
SSPC. . . . Steel Structures Painting Council
TECO. . . . Timber Engineering Company
UBC . . . . Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of
Building Officials
UL. . . . . Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WCLB. . . . West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WWPA. . . . Western Wood Products Association
�-3
�a
ALTERNATES OF PROJECT SECTION 01100
DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES - None Proposed 01100-01
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SECTION 01210
Preconstruction conference will be arranged as to exact time by
Architect and shall be held within 7 days after award of Contract, or
shortly thereafter.
x
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SECTION 01310
A. Within 30 days following award of Contract, provide Architect with
a Time and Sequence Schedule outlining each phase of work. Make
provisions in schedule for proper installation work of sub-
contracts; indicate dates shop drawings and lists required per
Section 01340 are to be submitted for Architect's review; and
indicate dates and areas where permanent electrical subdistribution
system and permanent heating and ventilating systems will be
operative. JA
B. If during construction it becomes evident that actual construction
is not meeting construction schedule, Contractor shall, when
directed by Architect in writing, furnish additional workmen and/or
materials in order that construction schedule will be met.
SHOP DRAWINGS & SAMPLES SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01340-01
A. Submit shop drawings, equipment lists and materials lists, in
accordance with Subparagraphs 4.13.3 and 4. 13.4 of General
Conditions, for checking by Architect. Submit four (4) copies
containing all pertinent data and indicating name of project,
supplier and manufacturer. Drawings to specifically relate to this
project and show all pertinent relationships of items to place in
which each is to be installed. Reference details to detail re-
ference system on contract drawings. Drawings for any one
classification of work, for example prefabricated casework or
millwork, to be on one size sheet. Bind and index all submittals
for equipment, materials and hardware items into brochure form.
Submittals which Architect finds illegible or in poor order will be
returned prior to Architect's checking.
Drawings & Lists Required
Metal Fabrications Finish Hardware
Wood Trusses Toilet Compartments
Glue Laminated Members Toilet Room Accessories
Millwork & Custom Woodwork Prefabricated Casework
Sheet Metal Work Automotive Lift
1-4 �,
�r
01340-01
Aluminum Doors & Frames Electrical Distribution Plan
Coiling Doors
Metal Soffit Layout
In addition to drawings and items listed above, see sections in
Divisions 2 thru 14, Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16,
„ Electrical, for additional drawings and lists required for
Architect's "shop drawing" approval.
B. Satisfactory shop drawings and equipment brochures will be so
identified by Architect and returned to Contractor.
C. One copy of unsatisfactory submittals will be so identified and
returned to Contractor. Required corrections shall be made and
four (4) corrected copies resubmitted until Architect's approval is
obtained. Only corrected and Architect approved copies shall be on
project site.
D. Approval of shop drawings and equipment brochures by Architect is
general and does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
accuracy, dimensions, proper fitting of work, furnishing of
materials or labor required by Contract and not shown on shop
drawings or in brochures. Such approval shall not be construed
as approval to depart from Contract requirements.
SAMPLES 01340-02
A. Provide samples as indicated below and as required by other
sections.
B. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS: Size, shape and detailed instructions
for production of samples are noted in sections relating to
materials listed below.
C. PLACE OF SUBMITTAL AND QUANTITY:
Section Place of
Material Number Submittal Number of Samples
Machine staining of wood 06202 Owner's Office 3
Hardware 08710 Owner's Office 1 of each item
requested by
Architect
Acoustical tile & board 09500 Owner's Office 1 of each type
Carpeting 09680 Owner's Office 1 of each color
Paint, stain & varnish 09900 Owner's Office 3 sets of each
material on each
substrate
i;
ka
I-5
y
01340-02
jA
D. SEQUENCE FOR SUBMITTAL: Samples of materials which are not factory
finished are subject to adjustment in appearance by Architect.
Submit such samples (or sample sets) in sequence of one at a time $
to permit Architect to state adjustments before submittal of
additional samples. Allow minimum of one week for Architect's
review of each sample from time of Architect's receipt of notifi-
cation of readiness for examination of jobsite sample.
E. CORRECTION OF WORK: Architect will compare work with approved
samples and if, in Architect's opinion, product is not as good as
sample, corrections shall be made per General Conditions, Article
13.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 01341
Where job specifications require products to be stored, mixed, handled,
conditioned, applied, installed or cleaned in accordance with t,.
manufacturer's instructions when job specifications do not cover all
recommendations and instructions covered by manufacturer's printed
product instructions or are contrary to them, submit four (4) copies of
these product instructions and recommendations to Architect minimum of
21 days prior to product use. Indicate name of project and specifica-
tion section number to which product relates.
MATERIAL ORDERS SECTION 01342
A. Place orders for all materials not available from dealers stock and
those which cannot be delivered to jobsite within 14 days of place-
ment of order. Require subcontractors to do same.
B. If requested by Architect, furnish evidence of above satisfactory
to Architect.
EVIDENCE OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS SECTION 01343
A. Furnish evidence satisfactory to Architect that Contractor has made
direct contracts with Owner-Architect approved persons or organi-
zation subcontracting, supplying materials and manufacturing items
listed on proposal form.
B. Present above required evidence, as nearly as possible, all at one
time and promptly following award of Contract.
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01400
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide quality control, in addition to obligations relative to
quality control per General Condition Subparagraph 4.7 .2
(regarding laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of
public authority bearing on performance of work) , as follows:
I- (o
Wr
01400
rr a. If laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any
public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be
inspected, tested or approved, Contractor shall give
Architect timely notice of date arranged so Architect may
observe such inspection or testing. Contractor shall bear
all costs of inspections, tests and approvals required by
public authority.
b. If Architect deems any work in progress or complete work to
require unspecified inspection of testing, Architect will,
upon authorization from Owner, instruct recognized testing
laboratory to conduct such special inspection or testing.
If same reveals a failure by Contractor to comply with
requirements of Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all
costs thereof, including Architect's additional services made
necessary by such failure, and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued, otherwise Owner shall bear costs of such
unspecified inspection and testing.
c. Neither observations of Architect in his administration of
the Contract, nor inspections, test or approvals by persons
other than Contractor shall relieve Contractor from his
obligations to perform work in accordance with Contract
Documents.
d. Tests to determine fulfillment of specified soil, gravel,
crushed rock fill and subgrade compaction and tests for
'I" compressive strength of concrete cylinders per Section
01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services, will be made by
recognized testing laboratory selected by Architect as
w Architect deems necessary.
e. Cost of tests ordered by Architect for determination of ful-
fillment of soil, gravel, crushed rock fill and subgrade
compaction requirements will be paid by Owner for tests
meeting specified compaction requirements and shall be paid
by Contractor for each test which does not meet compaction
specifications.
f. When initial inspection or test data for tests ordered by
Architect on work other than per "d" above indicate work does
not meet specified requirements, subsequent reinspection,
retesting and additional inspecting and testing as may be
occasioned by indicated non-compliance, including inspection
and testing of any replacement work, shall be performed by
same testing agency which produced original data. Cost of
all subsequent inspections and tests of work shall be borne
by Contractor.
g. Inspection or testing performed exclusively for Contractor's
convenience is responsibility of Contractor.
h. Secure and deliver quality verification certificates required
for work of other divisions along with other record documents
per Section 01700, Project Closeout.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing certain Owner procure compressive strength tests of
concrete in Section 01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services.
1-7
iir
il
01400
b. Providing field quality control of soil, gravel and/or
crushed rock fills compaction in Section 02230, Soil Compac-
tion Control.
c. Providing certain required assistance and furnishing certain
items of equipment for testing laboratories.
B. INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS:
1. Architect ordered inspections and tests: One copy of inspection
report and test results made by testing laboratory will be made
available to Contractor upon request when results of inspection
or test indicate work meets specified requirements. One copy of
results indicating work does not meet specified requirements
will be presented to Contractor. Testing agency will be re-
quested to report to Architect deviations or conditions which
may lead to deviations as soon as possible by telephone and
Architect will take such timely action as he may deem
appropriate.
2. Inspections, tests and approvals required of Contractor by
public authority: Furnish one copy of all written results to
Architect.
3. Inspections, tests and approvals required of Contractor by other
sections: Furnish original and copies per Section 01700,
Project Closeout.
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY SECTION 01511
Provide and maintain temporary electrical services for all building
operations and make all arrangements with serving utility organization.
Meet requirements of Subpart K, Electrical, of Federal Register,
Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and keep copy of these
requirements on the job and available to all associated with the work.
Permanent electrical power system may be used for building operations
after it has been inspected by appropriate governmental authority and
made ready for use. Pay cost of all electric energy and for temporary
electrical equipment for building operations. When temporary installa-
tion is performed by subcontractors or others at General Contractor's
request, General Contractor shall reimburse them for this work.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING SECTION 01512
A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting for all building opera-
tions.
B. Materials used for temporary lighting to meet OSHA requirements of
Section 01511, Temporary Electricity.
C. Permanent lighting system may be used for lighting of building
operations.
I-8
01512
D. Pay cost of temporary lighting equipment used for building opera-
tions. When temporary lighting installation is performed by
subcontractor or others at General Contractor's request, General
Contractor shall reimburse them for this work.
TEMPORARY HEAT & VENTILATION SECTION 01513
A. Provide and maintain temporary p y e quipment, devices, piping, wiring,
(including temporary wiring to new permanent heating and ventilating
equipment) if used for temporary heat and/or ventilation and
r enclosures for temperature and humidity control required by
building operations where and when required until time stated in
Certificate of Substantial Completion for Work in area covered by
the certificate, except permanent heating and/or ventilating
systems may be used to supplement temporary per paragraph B.
B. New permanent heating and ventilation systems, or portions of these
systems, may be used before time state in Certificate of Substan-
tial Completion for temporary heat and ventilation, when judged
operable by Architect, provided:
1. All operation and maintenance of new permanent equipment is
accomplished by Mechanical Subcontractor only.
2 . All return openings are protected by temporary filter media.
3. Permanent filters in air handling units and unit ventilators
used for heat and/or ventilation are replaced with temporary
throw-away filters of equal filtration characteristics as
permanent filters.
4 . Units are controlled manually and/or automatically to prevent
excessive temperatures.
5. At time for air balancing work, permanent heating system used
by Contractor for temporary heat and/or ventilation, including
permanent filters, oiling reservoirs, etc. are in a clean, full
and ready-to-operate condition.
C. General Contractor shall pay mechanical subcontractor for operating
and maintaining items fcr new permanent heating and ventilating
systems for entire time these items are required for heat or
ventilation; for furnishing all temporary materials and services as
outlined in paragraph B above; and for rehabilitation of system
components. Cost of fuel for firing new permanent and Contractor's
temporary heating equipment shall be paid by General Contractor.
D. Provide heat and ventilation in interior space prior to, during and
after work is performed as follows:
1. Temperatures indicated are Fahrenheit degrees. Temperatures in
table indicate minimum and maximum day and night ambient air
temperatures anywhere in space, unless temperature is noted as
slab temperature.
1-9
01513
Environmental Conditions Environmental
Prior, During and After Conditions to l
Installation Substantial
Section Title Prior & Durina After (Days) Completion
Days Min- Max Min. Min.
Prior Temp Temp Temp.
Gypsum Drywall
Finishing 2 55-85 55 55
Ceramic
Tile 2 50-80 50 50
Acoustical
Treatment 1 60-90 60 55 4
Resilient Tile
Flooring 2 70-85 70 55
Carpeting 1 70+ ** 70+ 55 4F
Casework 1 70-85 70 55
** 70 degree floor slab temperature, minimum.
2. Minimum temperatures of spaces in which above materials are to
be stored: 40 degrees F. , except Resilient Tile Flooring to be
70 degrees F. and Casework 55 degrees F.
3 . Ventilation: Meet requirements Vol. 36, No. 75, Part II, and
latest revisions.
4 . See specific sections for additional requirements for above and
other materials. Other sections govern when more restrictive.
TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE SECTION 01514
Provide and maintain one general job telephone for duration of work.
Telephone accessible to all connected with work with toll charges paid
by those responsible for same.
TEMPORARY WATER SECTION 01515
Coordinate with Owner to provide and maintain temporary water service
for all operations. Permanent water system may be used after it has
been inspected and made ready for use. Cost of all paid for by Owner.
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES SECTION 01516
Provide temporary toilets for use of all persons associated with the
work. When water and sewer become available, provide temporary water
closets. Facilities shall conform to regulations of State and Local
Boards of Health. Before building completion, remove all traces of
temporary toilet facilities. Owner's plumbing fixtures in Service
Building, may be used under General Contractor's responsibility for
maintenance and janitorial services.
1-10
DUST CONTROL SECTION 01562
lire
01562-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION: For duration of Contract, protect persons and pro-
perty, both on and off site, from injury and discomfort caused by
dust produced as a result of the Work.
B. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: Meet requirements
fety
and Health Regulations for Construction per Federal Registerawith
regard to employees working environment.
01562-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: Use industry-accepted materials such as water, chemical
treatment, light bituminous treatment or similar materials suitable
for area involved which produce no detrimental effects on completed
work.
01562-03 EXECUTION
APPLICATION: Use industry-accepted methods appropriate to material
Aw selected for each work area requiring dust control.
WATER CONTROL
SECTION 01563
01563-01 GENERAL
irr A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide surface drainage within "Work Limits" during construc-
tion in manner to avoid erosion and creating nuisance to
adjacent site areas and neighboring g g property. If, at time of
footing, foundation and catch basin construction or time of
culvert and subdrain installation work, water table is high or
bottoms of excavations have standing water or are too wet forproper soil compaction, lower water table by means of pumping,
trenching below water table, or other means to insure proper
soil compaction and placing of materials.
2. Related work in other section includes:
a. Grading, excavating and trenching work per sections in
Division 2.
b. Trenching for mechanical and electrical work in Division 15
and 16.
B. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Protection: Protect filter materials in subdrainage systems
from mud flows and muddy water by positive means to prevent
silting of filters.
frr 2. Sequencing: Construct storm drainage systems at earliest
practical time so as to receive surface drainage water.
!Yr
Yr
01563-02 PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment for water control are Contractor's
achoice,
ping but
materials used shall have no detrimental effects
other work. J17
01563-03 EXECUTION
A. PERFORMANCE:
1. Where practical, direct surface drainage into natural existing
water courses and away from excavations until storm drains are
installed. Control flow rate onto property of others within
seasonal normal rate existing prior to work. After storm drains
are installed, direct runoff into drainage system. Do not use
foundation excavations or utility trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
2. Remove all traces of temporary water control facility at earli-
est practical date.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SECTION 01580
A. REQUIRED PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN: Furnish and install as and
when directed by Architect a professionally made and lettered job
sign as follows:
1. Size: 6' x 121 .
2 . Material: Waterproof 3/4" plywood and painted Fir framework and
supports.
3. Text: Name of project, Owner, Major Contractors, Architect, ti
Structural and Mechanical Engineers.
B. No additional signs or advertisements may be place on building or
grounds without specific permission from Architect and/or Owner,
except safety signs required by regulatory agencies.
TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES SECTION 01590
A. GENERAL: Provide temporary offices, storage sheds, plan sheds and
other structures as required. Orient plan tables so plans conform
to actual directions.
B. FIELD OFFICE: None for Architect's personnel.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 01700
01700-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish Owner all materials listed in 01700-02, executed per J1.
01700-03, and furnish all project record drawings.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Collection, maintenance, identification and recording of
changes on project record documents at jobsite in Section
01720, Project Record Documents.
I-t2
01700-01
b. Assembly, binding and indexing of operating and maintenance
data and air balancing log in Section 01725, Operating and
Maintenance Data, and in Division 15, Mechanical, and
Division 16, Electrical.
B. SUBMITTAL:
1. Submit all required materials to Owner's office at one time,
accompanied by Contractor signed letter of transmittal. Make
submittal with or before final Application For Payment.
2. Submit operating and maintenance data and marked set of record
tY drawings and modified "Ozalids" to Architect for review and
approval, allowing time for revisions which Architect may
require.
3. Submit three (3) bound sets of materials required per
01700-02-A.
i„ 01700-02 PRODUCTS
A. AFFIDAVITS, GUARANTEES, CERTIFICATES & RECEIPTS: Verify additional
requirements as to type, quantity, guarantees foreriod greater
than one year after date of Substantial Completion, etc. , with
other portions of Contract Documents.
I. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens and Payments of Debts
and Claims.
2. Guarantees:
a. Roofing Guarantees per Division 7, Thermal & Moisture
Protection; twenty year guarantee for metal roof.
b. General Sheet Metal Guarantee per Division 7; two year
guarantee. Prepainted, galvanized sheet metal with
"Duranar 200" finish; 20 year guarantee.
3. Certificates:
a. Certificate of Occupancy per UBC.
b. State Plumbing Certificate of Approval.
c. Sanitary Authority Approval.
d. Pressure Vessel Certificates.
e. State Electrical Certificate of Approval.
f. Glue Laminated Structural Members Certificates & Attachments
iW per Section 06181.
4. Receipts: All receipts signed by Owner's authorized represen-
tative.
a. Master Key signed delivery receipts, when required per
Section 08710.
b. Copies of receipts for maintenance materials (extra stock)
required to be turned over to Owner by Contractor.
B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: Materials from jobsite per Section
01720, Project Record Documents.
6W
C. REPRODUCIBLE RECORD DRAWINGS: Provide one complete set of "Ozalid"
transparency drawings revised to show mechanical and electrical
work as actually installed and with indications of all deviations,
additions and omissions from Contract drawings. Provide record
drawings thus:
01700-02
1. Upon Contractor's request, Architect will make original,
mechanical and electrical tracings available to any printing
firm local to Owner's office.
2. Cost of printing "Ozalids" paid by Contractor.
3 . Have "Ozalids" made to original scale and be reverse readable
erasable "Ozalid" transparencies having minimum background.
4 . Modify "Ozalids" by erasing and redrawing, employing same
quality of draftsmanship as Architect's original drawings,
using project record documents per Section 01720 as information
source. Transfer all information from marked prints to
"Ozalids". Reference dimensions and depths of buried items
same as specified per 01720.
01700-03 EXECUTION
A. Execute guarantees in writing and in favor of Owner.
B. Bind affidavits, guarantees, certificates and receipts in order
presented per 01700-02-A.
C. Install each affidavit, guarantee, certificate, receipt and front
index page in separate sheet protector, except more than one
receipt may be included in one protector if not obscured by
another.
D. Index each binder by providing typed index page indicating every
classification of items and tab each item within classification
with typed insert at tab.
E. LABELING:
1. Label both ends of drawing storage tubes and label front cover
and back edge of binders with typed labels thus:
a. Front cover: Name of project, Owner's name, Architect's
name, Contractor's name and year of completion.
b. Back edge: Name of project, name of Owner and year of
completion. "
c. Drawing tube: Name of project, year of completion.
2. Mark each sheet in lower right corner of margin Project Record
Copy" .
CLEANING UP & CUSTODIAL SERVICES SECTION 01710
01710-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Keep premises and other areas of Project free from unnecessary ,
accumulations of soil, waste materials and rubbish produced by
construction.
2. Supervise, direct and accomplish cleaning and custodial services
as specified below. Give general supervision to cleaning and
1- 14
01710-01
waste disposal of other sections. Leave Work "broom clean" or
it equivalent, except as otherwise specified in this and other
sections.
3. At completion of Work, leave adjoining properties as clean as
would prevail in the absence of Work and remove tools, equip-
ment, machinery and surplus materials.
4. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Cleaning up wastes and tool removal in Execution part of
other sections under "Cleaning" or "Adjust & Clean" articles.
Verify with other sections.
,. b. Cleaning of mechanical equipment used for temporary heating
and ventilation in Section 01513.
c. Dust control in Section 01562.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications of cleaning personnel: Utilize only trained
personnel, properly equipped or professional building cleaners
experience in cleaning new construction.
2. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Meet housekeeping standards of AGC's "Manual of Accident
w Prevention".
b. Meet requirements of Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor
Standards, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
c. Fire protection: Store volatile waste in covered metal
containers, and remove daily or as required by governmental
agency.
d. Pollution control: Conduct clean-up and disposal operations
to comply with local anti-pollution ordinances and laws.
(1) Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on
project site is not permitted.
(2) Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral
spirits, oil, or paint thinner) is not permitted in storm
or sanitary sewer systems or into streams or waterways.
C. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Protect surfaces from oil droppings.
2. Scheduling:
w• a. Unless otherwise specified, "broom clean" work of an area
immediately prior to more exacting cleaning operations
specified for that area in other sections.
b. Establish regular schedules for removal of garbage and oily,
flammable or hazardous wastes.
wrn 01710-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Clean with products recommended by manufacturer of material
r. requiring cleaning.
2. When no product is recommended by manufacturer for material to
be cleaned, use product recommended by cleaning product manu-
facturer and use only on surfaces so recommended.
it
01710-02
B. MIXES:
Mix dilute or blend cleaning materials in strict accor-
,
dance with label instructions. t
01710-03 EXECUTION
A. DURING CONSTRUCTION:
1. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are main-
tained free of accumulations of waste materials.
2 . Provide adequate number of suitable type containers at conven-
ient locations for collection of waste materials, rubbish and
debris.
3 . Appropriately label containers for garbage and hazardous wastes.
4. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from Owner's
property. Legally dispose of such unwanted materials.
5. Vacuum clean interior building areas when area is ready to
receive finish painting and continue vacuum cleaning painted
areas on an as-needed basis until building area is ready for
final cleaning.
B. CLEANING FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION:
Immediately prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial
Completion, clean work to be inspected in following manner:
1. Vacuum all interior surfaces except glass. Vacuum interior
ducts from grille or register to first obstruction in duct.
Vacuum mechanical lofts.
2. Wash mirrors and all glass, interior and exterior. .,
3 . Wash hardware, plumbing fixtures, plastic laminate surfaces and
painted woodwork. Remove merchandising labels.
4. Remove, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer
of surface requiring cleaning, stains, spots, marks, tarnish,
fingerprints and matter of nature foreign to surface on which it
occurs.
5. Hose down exterior slabs and paving and rake clean grounds.
C. FINAL CLEAN-UP: After correction and completion of items found
deficient from Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion,
promptly clean up to bring work to specified cleaning requirements.
D. REMOVAL OF TOOLS, TEMPORARY FACILITIES, SURPLUS MATERIALS &
TEMPORARY CONTROLS:
1. At completion of construction work, remove all tools, machinery,
construction equipment and surplus materials belonging to
Contractor and Subcontractors.
2 . When approved by Owner, remove following temporary facilities
and controls: Field offices, telephones, project identification
sign, dust control barriers, water system, sanitary facilities,
heating and ventilating equipment.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01720
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Maintain project record documents at jobsite throughout con-
struction period. Project record documents, called record
I-16
�w
01720
y documents, project record documents or (where referring to
architectural, mechanical or electrical drawings only) record
drawings elsewhere in specifications, are produced by Contractor
from Architect furnished items listed in B1 below.
b" 2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Production of reproducible record drawings and submittal
procedures for project record documents in Section 01700,
w Project Closeout.
b. Additional requirements for recording of changes made during
construction in sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and
�Yr
Division 16, Electrical.
B. MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS:
1. Keep one copy of all following contract documents in one secure
place:
a. Drawings
b. Specifications
c. Addenda
d. Written amendments to Contract
e. Change Orders
f. Architect written field orders, interpretations of drawings
and specifications.
2. Identification marking of record documents: Clearly mark front
cover and first page of specifications, first page of every
Itr addendum and sheet of drawings thus: "Project Record Copy,,.
3. Condition and use of record documents: Maintain all project
record documents in good, clean, neat condition, with binding
intact. Do not use for construction.
4. Make project record documents available for Architect's obser-
vations of general condition of maintenance, currency of marked
changes and other requirements of this section.
;rw
C. RECORDING OF CHANGES:
1. Mark architectural sheets to indicate:
a. Significant changes made during construction process.
b. Significant details not shown in original drawings.
c. References to addendum items requiring changes in original
drawings by showing addendum and item number on drawing at
location indicated.
2. Mark mechanical and electrical sheets thus:
a. Locations of internal utilities systems and appurtenances
concealed in buildings, underground and underfloor work.
Show sufficient information regarding piping, electrical
raceways, cable runs, valves, vaults, pull boxes, clean-outs,
`im stub-outs, roughing for future connection, wyes, tees,
easements, connections to buildings, etc. , for future main-
tenance and repair of systems by Owner.
b. Reference dimension lines of utility systems and appur-
tenances to adjacent tangible, accessible features of build-
ing and site improvements, not to coordinates on original
drawings. Indicate depth of buried utility systems and
;w associated buried appurtenance below floor, street, walk or
finish grade.
■ 1- 17
01720
c. Reference all addendum items regarding drawings by indicating
addendum and item number on drawings at references noted.
3. Record addendum items in record set of specifications and
record drawings. Cement each addendum item to opposing page
(back of preceding page) adjacent to original item in specifi-
cation. Mark each addendum item with appropriate addendum
number.
4. Mark up the most appropriate record document to show significant
field order changes and all change order cheanently conceal
5. Keep records of changes currents. Do not p
any work until required information has been recorded.
OPERATING & MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 01725
A. GENERAL: og
and catalog 1. Deliver to Owner required operating, maintenance aliccatal for
data with letter of transmittal upon or before app f
final payment.
2. See Division 15 and 16 for additional requirements regarding
operating and maintenance data.
B. SUBMITTAL: Submit per Section 01700, Project Closeout.
C. MATERIALS: List of required data: 09680, Carpeting.
1. Carpet Maintenance Manual per Section
2. Automotive Hoist: Include manufacturer's instructionsfor
operation and maintenance. List each item requiring periodic
inspection, lubrication and service and describe performance of
such maintenance. Suggest schedule for maintenance and indi-
cate type of lubricant required and frequency. Include catalog
data and parts lists with specific model identified; list of
any parts as published by manufacturer showing part, part
number, ordering information and nearest parts stock.
3. Heating and Ventilating Operating and Maintenance Instructions,
Equipment Data and Wiring Diagrams per Division ler Division 15.
4. Air Balancing Log, when balancing is specified, p
5. Electrical Equipment Operating and Maintenance Instructions and
Wiring Diagrams per Division 16.
D. QUANTITY: Provide three (3) bound sets of data.
E. FORM FOR SUBMITTAL:
leaf hard cover binders.
1. Bind all data in new loose
2. Index each binder by providing index page indicating every
classification of items and tab at each item within classi-
f ication.
3 . Bind each of following groups of items into separate looseleaf
binders: 4W
a. Architectural items: Bind in same numerical order as
specification sections.
b. Mechanical items: Bind in same numerical order as
specification sections.
c. Electrical items: Bindin same numerical order as
specification sections.
I- IB �
rr
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
wrr
SECTION 02200 - DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
GENERAL EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS
02200 - 01 GENERAL
a. Description:
1 . This section specifies requirements common to work of
all sections numbered between 02200 and 02501 , each of which'
presents more specific earthwork requirements. These common
requirements regard:
a. Staking out building and site work.
b. Protection of existing utilities and property
surrounding and adjacent to earthwork operations.
C. Work at uncompactable soil .
d. Quality assurance and product storage and
handling.
w.
2 . This section includes work to be provided by the owner:
+pw a. Prior to the start of construction (by the
contractor) :
aw 1 . The existing subsurface soils have been
determined (by Carlson Testing Laboratories) to
have insufficient bearing capacity for building
foundations and floor slabs . The owner will
' provide excavation , fill and compaction in
accordance with Carlson Testing Lab ' s
recommendations to obtain a minimum soil bearing
,.. of 2000 PSF . This work is anticipated to be
performed in May, 1988.
b. During construction; requiring the cooperation
" of, and coordination with the General Contractor:
1 . Site Grading, Section 02210 . Owner will
6' provide placing and compaction of imported
granular fills throughout site outside of building
foundations as required for site drainage and
paving. Contractor will provide all trenching
and compaction for underground utilities,
catchbasins : concrete curbs , walks , driveway
aprons, screenwall foundation, a/c and transformer
pads, etc. This list may not be all-inclusive of
requirements shown elsewhere in drawings and specs.
2-I
Page 2
Section 02200
2 , Asphalt Paving:
Section 02612 : Owner will '
provide aggregate base, asphalt concrete topping
- Section 02635. Contractor
and pavement marking
will coordinate
curb and
pidconcretes f latwork as
required.
3 . Owner will provide : irrigation system-
Section 02750 , topsoil - fill , g fl
preparation - Section 02810 and trees, shrubs and
ill
groundcovers - Section tubs830.for watertservicewill
and
provide and coordinate roved
power at locations shown on the plans and app
by the owner.
3 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Contractor' s use of premises in Section 01016.
b. Temporary facilities and controls , such as
temporary dust and water control in 01500 sections.
C. Earthwork of Division 15 , Mechanical, and Division
16, Electrical .
b, Quality Assurance:
1 . Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Work in public right-of-way: Provide earthwork
required in public right-of-way per requirements of
governmental body having jurisdiction, but requirements
per sections in Division 2 are minimum, if not
prohibited, where governmental body' s requirements are
lower .
b. Safety : Meet current governmental requirements
for safety of persons and property and earthwork p
current Chapter for "Excavation Work" of Oregon Safety
Code for Places of Employment .
2-2 �
rr
it
yr
Page 3
Section 02200
2 . Design, engineering and construction methods, temporary
bracing , shoring , underpinning , sheeting , etc . , are
responsibility of Contractor . If Contractor deems any work
beyond own capability, Contractor shall retain, at own expense,
services of qualified soils consultant on all construction
techniques involved, including design, checking and approval of
temporary bracing , shoring , underpinning and other items
pertinent to work, and on construction methods for solution of
problems that may be encountered. Soils consultant to advise on
construction methods to prevent settlement and/or damage to
surrounding structures , roads , utilities and embankments on
Owner ' s property and adjoining property.
C. Product Delivery, Storage & Handling:
1 . Keep graded-to-size fill and backfill materials from
w+
becoming intermixed and mixed with soil .
2 . Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
d. Job Conditions:
1 . Existing grades : Existing grades indicated at
iW unimproved site areas where earthwork is required are believed
reasonably correct; i .e. correct enough to cause no extra expense
to Contractor . If existing grades significantly deviate from
grades shown as existing, notify Owner before proceeding.
2 . Excavating, trenching and water control : Coordinate
control of subsurface and surface run-off water, specified in
6W Section 01563 , to minimize wetting of excavation bottoms. If a
spring or running subsurface water is found, notify Owner before
proceeding.
3 . Protection of utilities :
a. Known utilities : Utilities such as conduits,
kw powerpoles, light poles and piping on and in immediate
vicinity of site are shown. Keep active and inactive
utilities intact . If active utility is damaged by
Contractor, immediately deactivate utility and repair
damage and reactivate. If utility shown to remain is
damaged by Contractor, Contractor shall restore damaged
utility to condition acceptable to utility Owner
without compensation.
2-3
4
v
Page 4
Section 02200
b. Unknown utilities: Any active utilities found and
not shown are to remain as active utilities . If
unknown utility is damaged by Contractor, Contractor ,
shall notify Owner immediately , then repair as
directed. Compensation for repair will be made at
rates approved by Owner. Compensation will be made for
extra expense incurred in protecting and maintaining
utility not shown on drawings.
C . Keep subcontractors and other contractors
operating on and adjacent to Project informed of exact
locations of buried utilities which may be damaged by
their operations. Determine from other contractors on
and adjacent to Project locations of buried utilites
and services which may be damaged by your operations.
Note and date this information on Record Drawings.
02200 - 02 PRODUCTS
a. Materials: i1
1 . Stakes and batter boards : As Contractor selects to
produce rigid installations.
2 . For use in public right-of-way : As required by
governmental body having jurisdiction when superior to material
specified in Division 2 .
02200 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Performance :
1 . Layout and staking:
a. Locate and stake out corners and lines of new
building, structures, curbs and other site improvements
to guide all trades.
b. Locate and mark elevations from permanent ;
reference marking.
2 . Batter boards: Provide and maintain batter boards at
principal corners of structures.
2-4 �
aw
iW
Page 5
Section 02200
3 . Records:
pr
a. Record on "Record Drawings" locations of existing
utilities encountered which were not shown or not
r. correctly shown on drawings.
b. Indicate all significant changes in lines, levels
and locations of improvements on Record Drawings and
inform subcontractors of such changes as they occur.
Indicate extent and type of substitute granular fills
when soils too moist for compaction are found.
b. Remove batter boards , layout stakes and other temporary
guide markings before Substantial Completion.
!.n
�Irn
WW
yrr
Orr
6W
2.5
YA
SECTION 02210 - SITE GRADING
02210 - 01 GENERAL
a. Description:
1 . Work of section requires placing and compaction of
soil ; placing and compaction of imported granular fills within
building areas if moisture content of on-site subsoil cannot be
properly controlled; and rough grading of areas to receive slabs,
walks, curbs, all within "Grading
Limits" shown.
No grading per this section to occur more than
2 ' into planting areas.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing dust control in Section 01562 ; and water
control in Section 01563 .
b. General earthwork requirements in Section 02200.
C. Providing soil compaction control to requirements
of this section in Section 02230.
d. Providing excavation and backfill for mechanical
and electrical work in Division 15 and 16. (Gravel by owner) .
3. Definitions:
a. Finished grade : Term "finished grade" means
required elevation on top surface of soil , pavement or
other surfacing material at completion of work. Terms
"finish grade" , "finished grade" and "new grade" are
synonymous. To "finish grade" means to bring required
materials to such elevations. „a
b. Subgrade: Term "subgrade" means that surface of
sod or cut-to-grade earth in its original undisturbed
condition or surface compacted condition on which sub-
base, base, underslab fill, topsoil, disturbed subsoil
or a course of other material is to be placed; the
lowest grade reached during stripping and cutting
operations and grade on surface of compacted cuts.
2-`
Page 7
Section 02210
rr+
C. Planned subgrade: Term means that grade elevation
on earth , sod or granular fill replacement for
uncompactable soil which drawings and/or specifications
require at indicated distance below finished grade
elevation.
d. Planting area : Term ' "Planting area" means all
io areas within "Grading Limits" not occupied by building,
graveled yard, pavement, walk, slab or curbs.
b. Allowable Tolerances:
1 . Planned subgrade level tolerances:
a. Inside building areas: + 0. 10 of one foot .
b. Outside building areas: + 0. 15 of one foot .
1�r
2 . Spot elevations take precedence over contours.
02210 - 02 PRODUCTS
rr
a. Materials:
1 . Imported Granular Fill : 3/4"-1k minus well graded
washed or unwashed gravel or well graded pit run gravel .
WW Granular fill to contain not more than 5% minus. (owner provides)
b. Mixes: Mix subsoils of differing natures for use in fills
inside building areas to give uniform composition to fill in any
one area, but do not use rock-like subsoil containing pieces over
3" in any dimension.
02210 - 03 EXECUTION
r. a. Performance:
1 . Rough grading: (By Owner)
a. Rough grading inside building areas :
(By owner)
r.
�"'
2-7
Page 8
Section 02210
( 1 ) Areas requiring cut : After cutting, compact
top 6" of soil to 98%.
( 2 ) Areas requiring fill : Compact subgrade to
98% and place on-site subsoil fill, when suitable
for compaction to 98%, in 6" (max. ) deep loose
lifts and compact each lift to 98%.
b. Rough grading outside building areas which are not
planting areas (by Owner ) : Bring grade to planned
subgrade levels per (3) below, thus:
( 1 ) Areas requiring fill :
(a) Place subsoil fill material in lifts not
to exceed 6" in uncompacted depth and compact
each lift to 95% under areas to receive
concrete walks, slabs, gravel and bituminous
pavement .
(b) Planting areas: Do no grading at these
areas under work of this section. See
Section 02810, Soil Preparation.
( 2) Area requiring cut : Grade to planned
subgrade levels except in landscape planting
areas.
(3) Planned subgrade levels:
(a) 8 " below pavement top at areas to
receive passenger vehicle asphalt concrete
paving; 10" below pavement top at areas to
receive truck pavement ; and 6" below pavement
top at sidewalk paths.
(b) 4 " below concrete top at areas to
receive concrete paving.
(c) No grading work per this section at
planting areas shown on Landscape Planting
Plan.
b. Field Quality Control : Meet soil compaction requirements in
Section 02230.
2.0
w.
1rr
SECTION 02220 - EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
022201 - 01 GENERAL
a. Description:
1 . Excavate and trench for footings , piers , walls ,
and for catch basins. Trench for culverts.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Site grading in Section 02210. See 02210-01-a2
for other related work in other sections.
*W b. Excavation , trenching and backfill for work
relative to mechanical or electrical trades:
yw ( 1 ) By Mechanical Subcontractor: All required
for own work and as specified in Division 15 .
( 2 ) By Electrical Subcontractor : All required
aw for own work and as specified in Division 16 .
C. Soil compaction control requirements in Section
02230 .
d. Providing backfill for catch basins in Section
02510. (By owner) .
e. Providing bedding and backfill for culverts in
Section 02520. (By owner) .
f . Providing rock or gravel base for asphalt concrete
paving and gravel work for graveled storage yard in
Ii4v Section 02612 . (By owner) .
3 . Definitions:
a. Gravel : Crushed or uncrushed material from water
or glacial deposited accumulations of mineral matter
having rounded or subrounded surfaces.
for
b. Rock: Crushed or uncrushed material from
natural deposits of solid mineral matter or from
natural deposits of weathered mineral matter having
angular surfaces.
C . See 02210-01-a3 for additional definitions.
ow
6 2-9
Page 10
Section 02220
b. Quality Assurance:
1 . Allowable tolerances:
a. For subgrade under underfooting crushed rock:
+0. 10' from elevation shown.
b. For footing level planned subgrade: +0. 10 ' from
elevation shown.
C. For curb bottom planned subgrade: +0. 10 ' from
required level .
d. For underslab fills : +0 . 00 to -0 . 05 ' from
required elevation at top of crushed rock fill .
2 . Source quality control :
a. Fill materials are subject to quality control
testing by qualified laboratory selected by Owner and
paid for by Owner . Test results and laboratory
recommendations available to Contractor.
C. Job Conditions:
1 . Protection:
a. Permit no mixing of gravel and rock materials with
soil .
b. Have trenching and backfilling for utilities and
other services below planned subgrade level completed
before placing underslab fill . Where necessary to
excavate below planned subgrade after underslab fill is
placed, place excavated soil in container , not on
underslab fill.
C. Allow concrete to age sufficiently to resist fill
pressures without damage. Brace concrete where fill is
required on only one side. Place and compact fills
simultaneously where both sides of concrete require
backfill . '
2-10
frr
Page 11
w► Section 02220
2 . Immediately notify Owner of rock conditions not shown
+rr on drawings and soft spots at footing depth.
3 . Judge unnoted footing depths to be same as depth noted
for nearest footing with same function.
4 . Supervise and coordinate work of backfilling and
compaction of trenches made by mechanical subcontractor and by
electrical subcontractor.
�ibw 02220 - 02 PRODUCTS
a. Materials: (Owner provides all gravel and crushed rock) .
iW
1 . Underslab fill :
a. Interior slabs: Clean, washed, crushed rock (not
° " gravel) , graded 3/4" minus having maximum of 5% (by dry
weight) passing No. 200 sieve.
Mir b. Exterior slabs and walks: Subsoil or same crushed
rock as for interior underslab fill . When subsoil will
not suitably compact : Imported granular fill
w replacement material for uncompactable soil per 02210-
01-a4 .
C . Transformer pads: Coarse concrete aggregate of
i+ crushed gravel per ASTM.
2 . Foundation backfill : Subsoil from on-site excavations
suitable for required compaction, free of debris, combustibles,
wood , sod , roots , cellulose and rock-like material . If such
subsoil is not available, substitute interior underslab fill on
interior face of foundation walls and imported granular fill
material per 02210-02-a4 at exterior.
3 . Engineered backfill under and beside footings : Crushed
wr rock ( not gravel ) meeting requirements of " Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction" , Oregon latest edition
and Carlson Testing Lab recommendations.
w
4 . Trench backfill : Same material as required immediately
adjacent to trench excavation at same stratum, except :
a. Engineered backfill
per 113" above at culverts.
taw,
Page 12 l-
Section 02220
02220 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Performance :
1 . Excavation:
a. Excavate for poured-in-place concrete in contact
with ground; underslab fills at transformer pad and
catch basins; engineered granular fills under footings.
b. Excavate to lines and levels shown.
C . Excavate sufficient distance from formed concrete
to allow for placement and removal of forms.
d. Hand clean footing excavations made by machine or
hand to remove all loose or disturbed material from „$
sides and bottom of excavation . Make bottoms for
footings level .
2 . Trenching:
a. Allow minimum of 3" over excavation depth for
bedding of lines.
3 . Backfill and compaction:
a. Over-excavated footings:
( 1 ) Accidental and necessary for removal of large
rocks removed by "ordinary methods" : Backfill
with 2500 psi concrete or increase depth of
footing or height of foundation wall without
additional expense to Owner.
(2) Engineered underfooting backfill : If soil is
not too damp, compact top 6" of footing excavation
bottom to 98%. Backfill with specified imported
material to level of bottom of footing. Place
backfill in lifts not exceeding 3" in depth and
compact each lift with minimum of 4 passes of hand
operated vibratory plate compactor providing
minimum of 10 psi of force at 4500 VPM.
2-12
err
'Aw
Page 13
NoSection 02220
""' b. Foundations : After final inspection of all
specified subgrade work remove all debris, forms and
perceptible organic matter , then backfill with
specified backfill material in lifts not exceeding 6"
in uncompacted depth. Compact each lift with minimum
of 4 passes of hand operated vibratory plate compactor
providing minimum of 10 psi of force at 4500 VPM.
C. Interior underslab fill : Fill , over previously
compacted planned subgrade , to level required for
bottom of concrete on-grade slabs with specified
crushed rock. Compact with minimum of 4 passes of
vibratory roller type compactor to impose impact force
of at least 400 pounds per inch of drum width.
MW
d. Exterior underslab fill :
( 1 ) Concrete walk and slab underslab fill : Where
required by lowness of prepared subgrade, fill
with subsoil when not too damp to compact to 95%.
Compact subsoil to 95% when possible or substitute
underfooting backfill material thoroughly
compacted in separate lifts not exceeding 6" in
compacted depth.
(2 ) Transformer pad underslab fill : Fill , over
compacted planned subgrade, with 6" of specified
gravel . Compact same as for interior underslab
fill and air-conditioning pad.
b. Field Quality Control : Per requirements for soil compaction
rrr specified in Section 02230.
to
1Yr
2- 13
x
SECTION 02230 - SOIL COMPACTION CONTROL
02230 - 01 GENERAL
a. Description:
1 . Provide soil compaction control v l earthwork
operations to assure compaction of soil , gravel ,
the
granular tions
fills to specified densities. WhereeY°centa ecmeans
require compaction to a stated percentage , p g
percent of maximum density obtainable
int Quality Assurance optimum moisture content
determined by standards noted
Supervise compaction
ofsurgranular
rofills
ugh not
tspec
onified compacted to
stated percentage
2 . Related work in other sections includes: F;
a. General requirements for quality control in
Section 01400 , Quality Control .
b. General earthwork requirements in Section 02200 ,
including detection of uncompactable soil .
C. Performance of certain earthwork compaction in
other earthwork sections of Division 2 .
d. Performance of earthwork compaction for mechanical
and electrical work installations specified in
Divisions 15 and 16.
b. Quality Assurance:
1 . Soil compaction test : Standard Proctor Test , AASHO.
2 . Allowable tolerances:
a. From optimum moisture content : + 3%.
b. From specified percent compaction: 5915 greater and
2% less.
C . Job Conditions:
1 . when soil specified compacted to stated percentage
as
e
too high a moisture content to compact to p percentage
and drying is practical , dry such soil by discing, scarifying or
other appropriate means.
2 . When soil specified compacted to a stated percentage
has too low a moisture content, wet soil during placement .
3 . Do no filling or compacting during freezing weather or
with material containing frost or ice.
2-14
w
Wer
Page 15
Section 02230
02230 - 02 PRODUCTS
bw
a. Materials :
wr 1 . Materials requiring controlled compaction are specified
in other earthwork sections.
a" 2 . Water for addition to too dry soil is specified in
Section 01515 , Temporary Water .
b. Mixes: Procedures for adjusting water content in soils are
.. Contractor ' s responsibility.
r 02230 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Preparation:
60 1 . Methods for control of soil compaction to produce
specified soil densities are Contractor 's responsibility. If
Contractor deems work beyond own capability, retain services of
+wr qualified soils consultant to advise on solutions to anticipated
problems.
2 . Remove noticeable quantities of organic matter from on-
site backfill material required for use under structure, slabs
and paving.
b. Field Quality Control :
1 . Make tests or otherwise determine that soil and
granular fill compaction work meets specified requirements.
2 . Tests will be made by recognized testing laboratory to
!r
determine fulfillment of soil compaction requirements.
3 . See Section 01400 for responsibilities for costs of
field quality control tests.
Oirr
r
2-15
it
SECTION 02510 - CATCH BASINS
02510 - 01 GENERAL
a. Description:
1 . Provide catch basins shown on architectural drawings.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Excavation for catch basins in Section 02220 ,
Excavating & Backfilling.
b. Providing piping shown only on mechanical drawings
from catch basins is in Division 15, including long
sweep cast iron pipe entering catch basins connected
to other piping shown on mechanical .
b. Quality Assurance : Qualified manufacturers: ` Lynch Co. ,
Inc . or equal , prefabricated catch basin of 1/4" stee ate in
same size as shown or next larger Lynch size , with Lynch' s
Portland City Code grates, may be substituted for units shown '
when modified to include grate hold down features and 3/4" side
inlet holes per details.
02510 - 02 PRODUCTS
a. Materials:
1 . Catch basins : Size 24" x 24" x 36" deep , unless
otherwise noted on drawings. Provide all sides of catch basins
with 3/4" holes at 6" o. c. located 7" down from top of grating.
. 2 .
Concrete for hold down pad: Any grade of standard-
weight aggregate concrete called for on project , with or without
admix, per Section 03310 , Standardweight Concrete .
3 . Asphalt Coating: Meet requirements of Fed. Spec . SS-
5-701 . Flintkote "Asphalt Primer" or approved equal .
4 . Backfill : Imported granular fill , same as per 02210-
02 .
b. Fabrication:
1 . Weld tank to provide watertight construction.
2 . Apply 1 one 10 mil or heavier coat of asphalt , inside and
out , to tank body after fabrication.
Z-1h �w
air
Wr
No Page 17
Section 02510
r 02510 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Preparation:
1 . Compact subgrade with minimum of 4
operated vibratory plate compactor passes of hand
force at 4500 VPM. P Providing minimum of 10 psi
it
2 . Place granular fill in approximately 6" lifts and
compact each lift same as for subgrade. Bring granular fill to
�r
level shown.
b. Installation:
i. 1 . Install catch basins on concrete support
concrete has reached initial set, correct to leve of pad before
grate shown
grades shown
or required by paved surface .
6W
2 . Backfill around catch basins with same material as
adjacent material at same level . Place all backfill in 6" lifts
and compact same as specified for subgrade. After backfilling to
tow level of bottom of mechanical work drain line trench at catch
basins, permit installation of section of drain lines entering
catch basin, then complete backfill work.
iW
4W
f
L.
�r
' 2-17
SECTION 02620 - CURBS AND PADS
02620 - 01 GENERAL
a, Description:
1 , Provide poureair-conditioning andttransformermasonry
screen-wall footings and
(including pads for mailbox and sign) .
2 , Related work in other sections includes:
a. Excavation for poured-in-place curbs in Section
02220, Excavating & Backfilling.
b. Furnishing of reinforcing steel in Section 03200 ,
Concrete Reinforcement .
3 . Quality assurance:
a. Requirements of regulatory agencies :
ct Per
requirements of governmental agency having j
where curbs are in public right-of-way.
b. Allowable tolerances: Same requirements as for
walks and exterior slabs per Section 02630.
4 . Job conditions: Curing and weather protection same as
Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete.
02620 - 02 PRODUCTS
a. Materials:
1 . For poured-in-place concrete curbs, masonry screen-wall
footings and air-conditioning and transformer pads. (including
pads for mailbox and sign) .
or higher grade , standardweight
a, 3 , 000 psi ,
concrete with admix and curing compound per Section
03310.
b, Reinforcing steel : Grade 40 steel .
C . Control Joints : 1 / 4 " thick , preformed ,
nonextruding , resilient type meeting requirements of
ASTM.
4i(
/yy
� iV
tow
Yr
tier
Page 19
�"" Section 02620
02620 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Installation:
l�rr 1 . Poured-in-place curbs, masonry screen-wall footings and
air-conditioning and transformer pads, incl. mailbox and sign.
a. Construct curbs abutting areas shown to receive
asphalt concrete paving and pads per details.
" b. Form cast-in-place concrete per requirements of
Section 03100 and place reinforcingsteel
per 03200-03 .
C. Install control joint material full width and from
W bottom of curb section to 3/8" from top of section.
Control joints to occur at intervals of approximately
1 .
it
d. Extend continuous rebar 6" through control joints.
Cap projections with dowel tubes or install 2 - #5 x
12 " long rebar dowels placed top and bottom between
6' curb rebars, within 1" of curb rebar, 5 1/2" embedded
directly into concrete at one side of control joint and
1 6W 6" encased in dowel bar tube at other side.
e. Float finish curbs and padg.
f. Coordinate with heating contractor to determine
where holes for refrigerant lines are to be
located on air-conditioning pad.
iW g. 4" curbs in shower room (part of Room 205) and
hose-off booth (part of Room 207) shall be poured
at same time as floor slab.
h. Depressions in concrete for entrance mats shall
be provided at Doors 1, 2, 27 and 31.
itrr
ir.
21- 19
SECTION 02630 - WALKS & EXTERIOR SLABS
02630 - 01 GENERAL
A. Description:
1 . Provide exterior walks, slabs, curbs at walk edges and
foundations.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Preparation of earth sub-grade to
.receivePreparation
and slabs in Section 02210, Site Grading.
of un Pstn02at areas noted n 0 _ l
b&c is inar22003, Execution, oExcavating &
Backfilling.
b. Providing curbs and pads
in Section
02620.
C. Furnishing reinforcing bars and mesh in Section
03200 , Concrete Reinforcement .
b, Quality Assurance:
1 . Requirements of regulatory agency: Same as per 02200-
01-b.
2 . Allowable tolerances: From design plane: Within 1/16"
+ in 6 ' radius . Departure of edges , permanent screeds and
control joints mand not more than 1/8' in any
sore design . o 3; ed 1 .
1/4" in any
run of 10 ' o
C. Job Conditions: Protect from weather same as for interior
slabs per 03310-03 .
,a
t
2-20
Ww
rr
Page 21
Section 02630
02630 - 02 PRODUCTS
a. Materials:
1 . Concrete : 3 , 000 psi standardweight concrete with air-
entrainment, admix and curing same as per Section 03310.
i. 2 . Control joint :
a. Preformed non-metallic material , keyed type .
Plastic Products Co . 3 1/2 " x 1 1/2" , black color,
joint if left in place.
3 . Reinforcing steel :
ikw
a. Bars: Grade 40.
rr b. Mesh: 6 x 6 10/10 W.W.M. Furnished per Section
03200.
4 . Cleaner for broom finished concrete to receive surface
" hardener: Process Solvents Co. , or equal.
b. Mixes: 2" - 4" slump.
rr
02630 - 03 EXECUTION
a. Preparation : Immediately before placing concrete ,
thoroughly dampen soil subgrade to approximately 1" depth, but do
not wet to point where water stands on subgrade .
tir
b. Installation:
ft 1 . Walk and slab thickness: Minimum 411 , unless otherwise
shown, except 5 1/2" thick at edges abutting yards , 6" at
transformer and a/c pads and driveway aprons, incl. mailbox
and sign.
2 . Slope : Slope to side for drainage minimum 1/4" per
foot , unless otherwise shown. Make drainage slopes, where not
indicated, away from structure where paving abuts structure.
rr
yr
�r
2-2►
�a
Page 22
Section 02630
3 . Control joints : Provide full width of concrete
section and with permanent portion of plastic joint , if used,
from bottom of section to 1/2" - 3/4" below top of concrete. If
slab areas between control joints are poured and finished
alternately, control joint material may be removed before pouring
intervening slabs.
4 . Reinforcing:
a. Mesh: Install at 1" down from top of slab.
b. Bars: Install at 18" o.c.e.w. , unless otherwise
shown, where shown.
5 . Concrete placing:
a. Same as for interior floor slabs on grade per
03310-03-b1 . Vibrate per 03310-03-b2 . Do not
"jitterbug" .
b. Depositing concrete : Deposit on previously
prepared subgrade which is free of standing water and
rhandling , disturbing
frozen
material
• Minimizeand permanente Re
foreign screeds.
No
subgrade ,
foreign matter permitted in concrete.
C . Screeding: Strike off areas of pavement as many
times and at intervals necessary to give thorough
compaction and to leave surface of uniform texture,
true to grade. Throughout the first pass of striking
of
bar , maintain a uniform ridge of concrete aermittedbar
for its entire length. No "wet screeding p
d. Vibration and hand tamping: Vibrate at faces of
forms and screeds , without contacting either with
vibrator , and without disturbing reinforcing bars
and/or subgrade . Do hand spading with shovels, not
rakes.
ilk
6 . Concrete finishing:
a, Broom finishing (after steel troweling) : Broom
perpendicular to main direction of pedestrian travel .
Broom with plastic bristle broom to fine-textured
finish.
b. Float finishing: Float finish vertical and near
vertical surfaces.
2-22 1
IYr
lir
Page 23
low Section 02630
C. After concrete has set enough to hold impression,
r.. tool outside slab edges and scored joints.
8 . Trowel finishing: Steel trowel finish transformer pad
same as interior floor slabs per 03310-03-b4 .
9. Concrete curing: Same as per 03310-03-c1 .
C . Patch and Correct Defects:
1 . Saw or grind to acceptable alignment edges of walks and
slabs which exceed specified tolerances.
2 . Replace slabs and walks which do not meet drainage
slope requirements ; or have defective broom finish or trowel
finish which cannot be corrected or which Contractor elects not
to correct ; or have permanent screed, control joints, and/or
edges which cannot be brought within specified alignment; or have
it excessive craze or plastic shrinkage cracks or discoloration due
to improper curing procedures.
d. Cleaning: Same as per 03310-03-f2 where surface hardener is
required at broom finished concrete. Clean before application.
ir
w
fir
6
2-2 5
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100
03100-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide temporary formwork, form coatings, release agents, ties
and accessories, unless otherwise specified in this or other
sections.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing concrete curbs and concrete pads in Section
02620.
b. Providing walks and exterior slabs, including control joints
in exterior walks and slabs in Section 02630.
c. Furnishing structural steel columns with shop attached bases
for embedding in concrete in Section 05120.
d. Furnishing bent-to-angle shape anchor bolts for securing wood
framing to concrete in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications.
e. Providing hangers, inserts, sleeves and similar accessories
for mechanical and electrical work; coring of concrete for
work of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical;
and providing concrete formwork for mechanical and electrical
items shown only on mechanical and electrical drawings.
3 . Definitions:
a. Exposed concrete: Concrete surfaces painted, color coated,
colorless dampproofed or exposed-to-view of persons other
than maintenance personnel.
b. Concealed concrete: Concrete surfaces concealed to extent
greater than "a" above.
iw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Design standards: Engineering and construction methods are
Contractor's responsibility, but ACI, "Recommended Practice for
r. Concrete Formwork", Chapter 1 - Design, are minimum require-
ments.
2 . Allowable tolerances: Per ACI, "Suggested Tolerances" except
modify tolerances as indicated below:
a. Dimensions shown below followed by +/- sign indicate toler-
ance to both sides of design surface.
b. Set and maintain screeds and forms to insure complete work
aw within tolerance limits.
c. Variations from plumb:
(1) In lines and surfaces of piers and walls: 1/4" per 101 ,
but not more that 3/8" in any 201 , and not more than
5/8" in 40' or more.
(2) For exposed control joint grooves and other conspicuous
lines: 1/4" in any bay or 20' and 3/8" in 40' or more.
d. Top surface of floors: No deviation form design surface more
that 1/8" +/- in any 101 . 1/4 +/- in any bay or 201 ; 7/16"
6"" +/- in any 40' or greater distance.
C. SUBMITTALS: Formwork drawings are not required for Architect's
approval.
3-1
03100-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: i
1. Temporary forms: To provide concrete surfaces, including surface
at joints in form face material, per following performance
requirements:
a. Exposed concrete: As smooth and free of surface irregulari-
ties as veneer of sanded "Plyform" with B veneer face grade
per APA Product Standards.
b. Concealed concrete: Surface irregularities not exceeding
1/8" in 12" .
2 . Ties and accessories: Drawings govern where shown.
a. Ties: Contractor's option as to type for all concrete.
b. Accessories:
(1) Form panel joint tape: Moka "Polysealing" cloth tape or
Burke "Vinyl Foam Tape for Architecturally Finished
Concrete" .
(2) Slab control joints:
(a) Interior covered on-grade slabs: 24 gage x 5 1/211 :
Burke "Keyed Kold Joint", Jahn Forming System,
"Vulco" , or wood formed to same profile as prefabri-
cated brands if slabs are poured in alternating
panels and wood is removed before abutting pour is
placed.
(b) Interior uncovered slabs: Plastic Products Co.
3 1/2" x 1 1/2" plastic joint, black or gray. Dis-
tributed by Madden Construction Supply.
(3) Slab isolation joints: 90 lb./square roofing cap sheet.
(4) Pads between top of foundation walls and floor slabs:
1 1/2" thick "Styrofoam" .
3 . Form coatings and release agents:
a. Contractor's choice except where paint, color or colorless
coating, dampproofing, sealant, waterproofing or adhesive is JAl
required use non-staining, non-corrosive materials having no
detrimental effect.
b. Release agents: Concrete deadener type, such as Burke's
"Burke Release" .
B. FABRICATION: Meet construction requirements, precautions and
recommendations of ACI, including applicable portions of "Formwork
for Special Methods of Construction" . See 03100-01-B for addi-
tional requirements.
03100-03 EXECUTION J,
A. PREPARATION:
1. Provide runways for use in placing concrete per ACI recommenJ,
-
dations.
2 . Apply form coating and release agents only to surfaces of forms,
making certain no such agents contact reinforcing steel,
previously place concrete, or other surface where bond will be
detrimentally affected. J,
�-Z
03100-03
B. INSTALLATION:
1. Install formwork per recommendations and requirements of ACI,
unless otherwise shown, plus additional requirements thus:
a. Pour joints in walls: Place form ties near limit of pour and
provide form structure sufficiently rigid to eliminate
misalignment or "over-hangs".
(1) Horizontal pour joints: Not permitted.
(2) Vertical pour joints poured to vertical bulkhead secured
in form prior to pouring concrete. Bulkhead to have
reinforcing pass thru for continuation.
(3) Permit no form spreaders of any material to remain after
placing concrete.
(4) Make tight joints between form units at concrete surface
using panel joint tape or other approved seal.
b. Inserts: Installed per ACI, and thus:
(1) Install sleeves, anchors, ties, dowels, metal fabrica-
tions, miscellaneous metal, etc. , as shown embedded in
jobsite cast concrete for thresholds, grating frames,
securing framing, tying masonry, connecting concrete,
i1w etc. Place bolts at exterior walls and other locations
as shown for plates and sills. Place bolts 7" into
concrete. Place at 6'-0" o.c. (maximum) . Place
additional bolts at plates and sills to provide minimum
of two bolts per plate and sill piece with one bolt
located within 12" of each end of each piece.
(2) Provide wood nailing strips and blocks for securing items
trw shown so secured. Bevel or groove strips and blocks of
pressure treated Fir to prevent loosening.
(3) Allow other trades time and facilities to install neces-
sary embedded items. Mechanical and electrical sub-
contractors provide embedded items for their work.
(4) Provide "Styrofoam" pad at top of foundation wall per
structural drawings.
c. Slab joints:
(1) Control joints: Install at locations shown.
(2) Isolation joints: Install to full thickness of slab
between slab edges and abutting wall.
2. Adjust formwork per ACI recommendations and requirements.
C. FORM REMOVAL:
1. Meet recommendations, precautions and requirements of ACI,
Chapter 6, except do not remove any forms before expiration of
following times from time of placing concrete:
a. Footings: 24 hours.
b. Side forms on non-retaining type concealed walls (lifts of
15' and under) : 36 hours.
„ c. Maintain sufficient bracing, shoring and other supports in
positions for additional 7 days to support dead loads plus
construction and other loads on beams, girders, slabs and
retaining type walls.
` d. Minimum time for removal of forms for structural parts not
noted above: Reduce required removal times by 50% for
Type III or IIIA cement concrete.
irr 2 . Permit no tools marks on "exposed concrete” when removing forms.
3 . Upon completion, remove runways and all temporary forms,
including those concealed or buried.
4. To facilitate float finishing of formed surfaces, remove forms
at earliest time possible without possibility of injury to
concrete per ACI Standard.
3-3
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200
03200-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION: .:
1. Furnish and install reinforcement bars and mesh for all jobsite
poured reinforced concrete except furnish but do not install
concrete reinforcement for installation in reinforced concrete
work of Division 2, Site Work. Where conflict occurs between
structural drawings and Section 03200, General Notes and details id
on structural drawings take precedence.
2 . Related work in other sections included:
a. Installation of concrete reinforcement in poured-in-place
concrete work of Division 2 .
b. Providing reinforcement for work of Division 4 , Masonry,
except reinforcement dowel bars extending from cast-in-place
concrete for embedment into masonry. Shop drawings for
locating dowel bars in concrete for masonry reinforcement in
Section 04001, General Masonry Requirements.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Acceptable manufacturers: Regularly engage in manufacture of
steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing.
2 . Installer qualifications: 3 years experience in installation of
steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing.
3 . Allowance tolerances: Permissible deviation from shown and
specified requirements.
a. Fabrication:
(1) Sheared length:
(2) Stirrups, ties and spirals: +/- 1/2" in linear dimen-
sions.
(3) All other bends:
b. Placement:
(1) Concrete cover to form surfaces: +/- 1/411 .
(2) Minimum spacing between bars: 1/41' .
(3) Crosswire of members: Spaced evenly within 2" of stated
separation.
(4) Lengthwise of members: +/-211 .
c. Maximum bar movement to avoid interference with other
reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items: 1 bar
diameter.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1. Deliver reinforcement to site in bundles marked with metal tags
indicating bar size and length.
2 . Handle and store materials to prevent contamination.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Protection:
a. Support no concrete conveying equipment, runways, etc. , on
rebar or rebar supporting accessories.
b. Straightening, heating, cutting or rebending in field not
permitted without Architect's consent.
r
xr•
�-4
03200-01
6 c. Clean and maintain rebar free from dirt
grease, oil exces-
sive rust, loose mill scale or other material that will
destroy or reduce bond.
2. Sequencing: Place rebar only after form coating and release
agent work is completed.
03200-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Bars: Deformed bars per ASTM. Grades, unless shown otherwise:
" All bars Grade 60, except ties, stirrups, curb reinforcement and
dowels for masonry on concrete foundations Grade 40.
2. Mesh: Welded wire fabric of cold drawn steel wire, fs =
.r 30, 000 psi. Sizes: Per drawings.
3. Accessories: Zinc-coated steel, unless otherwise noted.
a. Conform to ACI Standard "Manual of Standard Practice for
Reinforced Concrete Construction". Include all devices
necessary for proper placing, spacing, supporting and
fastening steel reinforcement.
b. Reber supports:
(1) For typical concealed locations: Metal wire-bar type,
zinc-coated, stock design for purpose intended, complying
with CRSI Standards.
lrr (2) For slabs-on-grade: Wire supports with sand plates or
horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not
support chair legs.
4. Tie wire: Annealed steel, black, 16 gage minimum.
B. FABRICATION: Meet requirements of ACI. Cold bend only.
03200-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION:
1. Placement:
a. Bar supports and accessories: CRSI.
(1) Sufficient in number and strength to accurately locate
and support rebar.
(2) Plastic coating against form wherever rust stain could
occur at "exposed concrete" of any type, including ex-
posed aggregate, revealed aggregate and textured
concrete.
b. Reinforcing bars: Per ACI and allow no tie wire within 1/2"
of face of "exposed concrete".
2. Steel adjustment: See "Quality Assurance" .
a. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with
other reinforcing steel, conduits or embedded items.
b. Do not move bars beyond allowable tolerances without
approval.
3. Splices:
a. Lap splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement
Of splices during placement of concrete.
b. Splice devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
4. Wire fabric: Place at 1" from top of slab, unless otherwise
shown.
a. Install in longest practicable length.
b. Lap adjoining pieces one full mesh, minimum, and tie splices
with 16 gage wire.
c. Offset end laps in adjacent fabric widths to prevent contin-
uous laps.
"'
3-5
STANDARDWEIGHT CONCRETE SECTION 03310
03310-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide standardweight concrete for all jobsite placed concrete
work. Certain concrete requirements which appear in this
section apply only to concrete provided per Division 2, Site
Work. Division 2 standardweight concrete requirements are
specified in part by reference in Section 03310.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing certain limited extend of quality control of
concrete in Section 01013, Owner Furnished Items & Services,
and certain additional quality control by Contractor per
Section 01400, Quality Control.
b. Furnishing and installing standardweight concrete for work
of Division 2 , Site Work.
c. Providing certain floor slab curing and cleaning work and all
surface hardening work in Section 03356, Floor Slab Compound
Curing, Cleaning & Surface Hardening.
d. Providing grout for all grouting work except grouted masonry
and concrete bond grouting work in Section 03370, Drypack &
Grout.
e. Providing grout for reinforced grouted masonry in Section
04100, Mortar & Grout.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Allowable tolerances:
a. Dimensional tolerance same as 03100-01-B3 except per :-
03310-03-B4 for flatwork finisher's tolerances.
b. Slump: Per ASTM Standards.
c. Strength: Per ACI, Chapter 4 .
2 . Source quality control: Design and test, at Owner selected
laboratory and at Contractor's expense, proposed mix for each
class of concrete per Standards.
3 . Concrete quality standards: ACI Standards, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. If concrete supplier has current testing laboratory report on
proposed mix for a required slump, strength and aggregate
grading of concrete, submit per report.
2 . Manufacturer's instructions: Per 01341.
3 . Notification of time for casting concrete: Per 01400, Quality
Control.
4 . Test reports on aggregates: On request by Architect.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1. Cement: Deliver, for job mixed concrete work, in containers
bearing brand name of manufacturer. Protect from dampness while
stored and remove from premises cement showing lumpiness or
other evidence of damage.
p`f
3-/0
03310-01
2 . Graded aggregates storage: Keep aggregates for job mixed con-
crete from becoming intermixed and mixed with soil.
3 . Mix and discharge times for ready-mixed concrete:
a. Minimum of 10 minutes.
b. Maximum time between adding water to mix and completion of
discharge from trucker mixer: 1 1/2 hours.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Protect from stains by positive means "exposed concrete" to
receive surface hardener and "exposed concrete" to receive no
I, applied finish or coating.
2 . Coordination:
a. Sack cement for jobsite work and cement in ready-mixed
concrete: Same brand, color and type.
b. Curing work of Section 03310 with curing work of Section
03356.
3 . Product and mix proportions changes: When choice of product is
60 indicated and mix proportions are established, do not change
product or mix without Architect's approval.
4 . Job control test of concrete: In addition to quality control
required of Contractor per Section 01400, Quality Control,
provide following services relative to Owner provided quality
control work:
a. Compressive strength tests:
(1) Provide storage for test specimen shipping
cylinder molds and assistance in storing and oshipping of
cylinders.
(2) Take samples of fresh concrete, per ASTM Standards.
03310-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Cement: ASTM Standards. Cement for all locations of Type I,
II or III; air-entraining type at work of Division 2; air-
1W entraining Contractor's option elsewhere; light color.
2. Aggregates for stone and gravel concrete: Natural, clean,
uncoated sand and gravel meeting requirements of ASTM Standards,
within grading limits for coarse aggregate, and additional
requirements thus:
a. Typical: 1 1/2" minus, unless otherwise noted.
1 60 3 . Water: Clean and fit to drink.
4 . Concrete treatments:
a. Admix: ASTM Standards, Type A, B, C, D & E.
b. Curing compound for other than slabs to receive surface
hardener ASTM Standards, Type 1 (clear or translucent, )
Class B, by All-Crete Seal Co. of Oregon's "A-C Curing
Compound", West Chemical Products "Filpor", Burke "Res-X",
:its Hillyard "Chem-Seal", Edoco #1003 "Resin Base Architectural" ,
Madden "Macryseal", National "Techkote No. gill .
5. Bonding agent: Larsen Products "Weldcrete", Masons Supply Co.
"Masco Concrete Bonding Agent", Madden Construction Supply
"Unicon 240 PVA", Standard Drywall "Thoro System - Acryl 60" .
3-7
03310-02
6. Patch
a. Slabs:
(1) With floor covering;
(a) Cracks to 1/8" wide and chips to 1/4" deep:
Armstrong Cork Co. "S-18011 , Dowman's Products
"Fixall" mixed with latex emulsion, such as Custom
Building Products "Custom-Crete" , in lieu of water.
(b) Cracks and chips greater than per (a) : Adhesive
Engineering's "Concresive #1" expoxy concrete as
installed by Structural Concrete Bonding of Oregon.
(2) With CSH surface hardener: "Concresive #1" per (b)
above.
b. Other locations: ASTM Standards, Type Fine Grout, with Size
No. 2 aggregate, admix (when not incompatible with required
bonding agent" and aggregate for appearance match at "exposed
concrete" .
7 . Concrete cleaner: Process Solvents Co. "S-C 88" concentrated
masonry cleaner or equal.
B. MIXES:
1. Concrete: Per ACI Standards and thus:
a. Proportions:
(1) Meet indicated slump and strength requirements; produce
workable mix; adequate handling and finishing time
(either with or without Type B or C admixture) without
excessive segregation or bleeding after placement; and
have minimum water content (either with or without water
reducing admix) consistent with these requirements.
(2) Cement per cubic yard of concrete: 520 pounds, minimum.
(3) Calcuium chloride (CA CL2) by weight of cement, regard- Y+
less of chloride source: 2%, maximum.
b. Mixing:
(1) Ready-mixed: ASTM Standards. Transit and mixing time
limits per 03310-01-D.
(2) Job-mixed: Standards per ACI.
c. Slump: Minimum-Maximum
(1) Foundation walls, footings, piers, pilasters and walls:
1"-5" .
(2) Slabs on grade: 211-4"
d. Strength: Determined per ACI Standards, Chapter 4 , unless
otherwise indicated.
(1) Compressive strength (f'c) for each part of structure
is shown.
(2) If standard deviation strength test record in not avail-
able: Meet requirements per ACI Standards.
(3) Strength for concrete not shown or specified otherwise:
f'c = 3,000 psi.
3-6 Y
i
03310-02
e. Admix:
(1) Provide same quantity and type as indicated in testing
laboratory report for proposed mix. When proposed mix
has been accepted for a particular slump and strength
concrete and admix per ASTM Standards were used in
proposed mix.
(2) Use: Per manufacturer's printed recommendations and to
permit no reduction in concrete strength.
2 . Patch mix:
" a. Slab patch: Per manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations, except "Fixall" mixed with latex emulsion
in lieu of water in same amount as recommended for water.
b. Other than slab patch: Measure and mix per ASTM Standards,
except substitute diluted bonding agent (diluted per label
instructions) for water (adhering to manufacturer's prohibi-
tions regarding admixes and curing compounds) , plus aggregate
as necessary to match abutting "exposed concrete". Mix to
drypack consistency.
3. Bonding agent mix: Per manufacturer's printed directions for
applicable usage.
4 . Grouts:
a. Bond grout for under 24 hour old concrete: 1 part cement
to 3 parts sand. Add bonding agent, diluted with water per
label instructions. Mix to workable, pastelike consistency.
b. Bond grout for bottom of first wall lifts: 1 part cement to
3 parts fine concrete aggregate. Mix with water to thick
paste.
5. Curing compound: Agitate per label directions.
6. Concrete cleaner: 1 part cleaner to 6 parts water in prelimi-
nary test and then adjusted to effective ratio.
03310-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION:
1. General: Per ACI Standards, "Preparation of equipment and place
of deposit".
a. Bonding:
ii (1) At concrete 24 hours old: Remove loosed material,
roughen smooth surfaces, clean thoroughly. Shortly
before placing concrete, coat joint surface with undi-
luted bonding agent. Allow agent to dry when instruc-
tions so indicate.
(2) At concrete under 24 hours old: Remove loose material,
laitance and other unsound material, then coat with grout just prior to placing concrete.
(3) At bottoms of wall, column and pilaster lifts: Place 3"
layer of grout on footings immediately before concreting.
b. Bond prevention: Prevent bond of slabs not doweled to
preceding work by positive means, such as bond breaker or
building felt, where isolation or control joints are not
shown.
"' 3-9
03310-03
C. If forms are over 80 degrees F. , dampen with water mist just
prior to concreting.
d. On-grade concrete: Thoroughly dampen, not just sprinkle,
prepared subgrade immediately ahead of placing concrete.
2 . Construction joints:
a. Install only where indicated or specifically permitted. If
wood form is used to produce required shape of construction
joint, concrete must be placed in "checkerboard" or "skip"
pattern allowing 48 hours of curing before removing form and
concreting adjoining units.
b. Provide keyway 1 5/8" deep cover 1/3 area of joint, with
rebar passing thru joint. Locate subject to Architect'
approval.
3 . Temporary screeds:
a. Install to lines and grades by instrument.
b. No "wet screeding" permitted.
c. Submit proposed details for approval of installation differ-
ing from specifications.
d. Screed installation: Set round steel groundpost pins at
approximately 10' o.c. Set pin hooks to level required by
screed bar height. Set screed on centerline of folding
partition where no control joint is shown. Use Burke or
similar adjustable screed support system with rigid flatbar
screed.
B. INSTALLATION:
1. Conveying and placing concrete: Per ACI Standards and thus:
a. First wall lifts: Vibrate previously placed layer of grout
and first layer of concrete simultaneously.
b. Prevent segregation during placing. Do not drop concrete ,
more than 51 .
c. Place in layers approximately 18" deep.
d. Place concrete continuously in each section until completed.
Permit not more than 30 minutes between depositing adjacent
layers within each section, unless Architect has approved
set retarder and such is used.
e. Maintain concrete temperature between 50 and 80 degrees F.
while placing.
f. Place sections of concrete in sequence which eliminates
shrinkage effects to greatest extent practicable.
2 . Compaction: supplemented b
a. Compact by mechanical vibrating equipment, y
hand-spading and tamping as required. Vibrators operated by
qualified workmen. Vibrating equipment of internal type,
where size of section and steel placement permits, otherwise
external type and adequate in number of units and power of
each unit to properly consolidate concrete. Match vibration
equipment and techniques to mix. Do not cause mix segrega-
tion or displacement of other items in forms and flatwork.
7:
z
3-10
03310-03
a. Place concrete only when reinforcing, forms, control joints,
ground, existing concrete, etc. , are not frozen and are frost
free.
b. Use no frozen materials or matter containing ice in concrete
mix.
c. Add neither salt nor chemical admixtures to concrete to
prevent freezing.
2. During construction operations:
a. Use clean, dry, non-staining plans or dry plywood on slabs at
Points of heavy traffic where surfaces remain permanently
exposed.
b. Protect concrete surfaces to remain exposed from other con-
crete, mortar, cleaning of other construction, application of
bituminous materials and from scarring, stains or other
damage.
c. Do not at any time permit rain water or water used in curing
#A to wash down over faces of "exposed concrete". Do not permit
extraneous moisture to come into contact with flatwork until
flatwork finishing is completed and, when rainfall or other
precipitate is measurable in quantity or forceful, cured for
12 hours, minimum.
E. PATCHING: Defects will be inspected by Architect and determination
made as to repair. In general, repair thus:
1. Exposed concrete: Before concrete is thoroughly dry, fill all
gravel pockets, cracks and broken places, etc. , and form tie
j holes. Chip concrete back minimum of 1/2" below finished
surface level around tie wires and other ferrous metal extending
to finish surface and cut metal off close to new point of
projection. Apply concrete bonding agent, then drypack with
required material. Make trial patches on "concealed concrete"
and secure Architect's approval before continuing. Compact
drypack material into place and screed off slightly high; leave
ir. long enough to permit initial set; then finish to match adjoin-
ing surface texture and level.
2. Concealed concrete: Same as exposed concrete, but appearance of
patch need not be same as adjoining surface. Patch slab cracks
not over 1/8" wide and pocks not over 1/4" deep with slab patch
mix, placed per manufacturer's printed instructions, ready to*
receive covering.
3 . Floor slabs to receive hardener and slabs with damage
than permitted for latex underla ent g greater
Pressure grout with epoxy concrete to minimizes pe above:
repair. appearance of
F. CLEANING:
1. Concrete to receive covering:
a. Covering materials includes paints, carpeting, resilient
floor coverings, etc.
'"
b. Clean to condition free of oil, wax, slick spots, deadened
concrete, dust and other deleterious conditions and
materials. Immediately prior to application of a covering
material, make concrete ready to receive covering without
further cleaning by covering subcontractor. Verify require-
ments with other sections.
2. Exposed concrete: Clean with specified cleaner per label
directions. Bristle brush with non-metallic or stainless steel
bristle brushes.
03310-03
(3) Trowel finish:
(a) Steel trowel twice to produce dense, slick surface,
free of defects. Exposed edges, except at abutting
vertical surfaces, burnished with edger.
(b) Locations: All slabs, and equipment bases
b. Formed surfaces:
(1) Remove fins, projections, loose material and form coating
residue.
(2) Float finish:
(a) Remove forms as soon after concre27
ting as safety to
structure permits. Repair defects and fill form tie
holes per E below. Wet surface with water if
concrete has set less than 24 hours, otherwise apply
bonding agent. Rub on bond grout mix, using sponge
float to give uniform sand finish, free of objec-
tionable blemishes.
(b) Locations: Where shown.
C. CURING: Use any of following three methods except where specifi-
cally prohibited. Prevent concrete surfaces from drying out for
7 days, minimum, after placing concrete, except 3 days for con-
crete with Type III cement. Begin curing flatwork immediately
after finisher has completed not over 300 sq. ft. of work and each
section of formed work as soon as practical after placing concrete.
1. Liquid membrane-forming compound: NOTE: Do not use where
surface hardener is required. See Section 03356.
a. Apply per manufacturer's printed directions. Use preferred
technique where directions give choice. Meet direction
requirements for preparation, timing of applications, rate
of coverage and protection from traffic.
b. Apply on formed surfaces, on float finished formed surfaces
and on float and broom finished flatwork. May also be used
under work of this section on trowel finished slabs where no
surface hardener is required per Section 03356.
2 . Plastic film curing:
a. Polyethylene or similar approved performed film, white,
non-staining, minimum 4 mils thick.
b. Dampen concrete, then lay film with approximately 6" laps;
tape or weld laps air-tight; hold in place for minimum of 7
days in manner to minimize moisture loss.
3 . Water curing: Use only clean, fit to drink water.
a. Keep concrete and concrete forms continuously wet for 7 days
after concrete placement.
b. Clean burlap may be used to assist water curing.
c. Use only on "concealed concrete" and/or on concrete to
receive separate wearing course.
D. PROTECTION:
1. Weather during concreting: Per ACI Standards, Recommended Prac-
or for eather Concreting,Concreting, unlessand ACI,otherwiseeamendedebelowctice
for Hot Weather
3-
12
ANN
03310-03
b. Do not vibrate after latest time a running vibrator will
sink of its own weight into concrete and again make it
plastic. Prevent vibrator from penetrating through fresh
concrete into partially set concrete.
c. Do not use vibrator to transport concrete laterally. Insert
and remove vibrator in slabs over 12" deep and in walls with
vertical movements only, without lateral movement while
immersed. Adjust spacing of insertions to concrete mix to
provide compaction without segregation.
3 . Rodding and tamping flatwork:
w, a. Rake with straightedge slightly higher than desired level,
then strike off top surface to required grade.
b. Remove temporary screeds and screed pins, the fill pin holes
with concrete. Where removable top bar and/or screed cap for
screeding occurs on control joints, remove top bar or cap,
fill recess.
c. Rod areas to receive ceramic tile mounted to concrete with
setting bed to within 1/411 above and 1/4" below required
concrete plane in any undivided space and hold to within
1/1611 of required plane within any running foot.
d. Hand tamping: "Jitterbug" only concrete with less than
2 1/2" slump and only enough to just displace coarse
aggregate below surface.
4 . Finishing:
a. Flatwork:
(1) Tolerances: Not greater than per 03100-01-B and
following:
(a) Floors and locker room locker bases: Within 1/8"
Of 10' straight edge place parallel with design
surface and anywhere on surface; within . 025" of a
1' straight edge placed parallel with plane of
surface where troweled finish is required.
(b) Edges of slab joints: Within 1/8" of a 10' straight
iW edge paralleling design line; and free of objection-
able blemishes.
(c) Test floors for level and sloped floors for drainage
by flooding after surface has attained final set.
Design slope of slabs requiring drainage: 1/8" per
foot, minimum, unless otherwise shown. Tolerances
for smooth troweled slabs requiring drainage: 1/2
that specified for level slabs. Where slabs are not
per specification, grind, refinish or replace as
directed.
(2) Floating, edging and coving:
(a) "Bullfloat" entire surface parallel to and then 90
degrees to screeds. Complete floating before free
water collects on surface. Float to true plane.
(b) After surface water, if any, has evaporated, do
initial edging, jointing and coving.
(c) Do no dusting of surface with dry cement or sand
during finishing.
FLOOR SLAB COMPOUND CURING, CLEANING SECTION 03356
& SURFACE HARDENING
03356-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide compound curing, cleaning and surface hardener for floor
slabs and indicated exterior slabs to receive hardener.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Cleaning of exterior and covered broom finished slabs in
Section 02630, Walks & Exterior Slabs.
b. Finishing of floor slabs; curing of floor slabs by means in
i
addition to curing compound; curing rodded slabs to receve
no flatwork finishing; and curing concrete other than
concrete to receive hardener in Section 03310, Standardweight
Concrete.
c. Patching of concrete floor slabs, in Section 03310.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualification of applicators: Supervised by and/or employed by
local representative of surface hardener manufacturer.
2 . Requirements of regulatory agency: Per U.S. Department of
Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards and Occupational Safety and
Health Administration.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGS ori final containers,
1. Delivery: Deliver in manufac g
plainly labeled and unopened.
2 . Storage: Store hardener not in immediate use in suitable
storage room and do all mixing and opening there.
3 . Fire prevention: Use proper precautions against fire and daily
remove soiled rags, etc. from premises.
4 . Meet product manufacturer's requirements for protection from
skin contact, breathing of vapor, spray and mist and other
recommendations for safety to personnel.
5. Protect from damage per label recommendations.
D. JOB CONDITIONS: A
1. Protection of Work:
a. Protect work from traffic.
b. Protect work of others not to receive curing compound or
hardener. Use positive means, such as masking, to prevent
curing compound and hardener from producing deleterious
effects.
2 . Coordination: Complete work before installation of room base.
3 . Sequencing:
a. Curing compound application: Apply curing compound to each
area of 300 sq. ft. or less immediately after final trowel-
ing is complete, but not before wet sheen of surface water
which may appear from troweling has disappeared.
b. Time for preparation for surface hardener: Shortly before
completion of area.
3- 14 �
03356-01
c. Surface hardener application on broom finished slabs: As
soon as practical after concrete has cured and cleaning of
iw finish is completed and has thoroughly dried.
03356-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Curing compound: West Chemical Products "Filpor" or All-Crete
Seal Co. of Oregon's "A-C Curing Compound".
2. Surface hardener" West Chemical Products "Filpor" or All-Crete
r Seal Co. of Oregon's "All-Crete Clear Seal".
B. MIXES: Per label instructions regarding agitation, dilution, etc.
03356-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION: Prior to preparation for application of hardener,
ascertain that materials in storage, tools, etc. have been removed
from space, floor is broom clean, and oil droppings, if any, have
been removed.
B. PREPARATION: Clean trowel finished concrete by dry sanding, using
machine equipped with integral vacuum cleaner, with 3 1/2 grit
open coat paper to remove oxidation, salts, grease, paint drops,
drywall compounds, etc. , and to expose voids and hairline capil-
laries. Thoroughly vacuum to remove all traces of debris and dust
from floor, steps and risers to receive hardener, then notify
General Contractor that cracks and other damage, if any exist, are
ready for repair.
C. APPLICATION:
1. Curing compound: Apply by power hydro-spary, using wand long
enough to be within accurate range for observation of uniform
rate of coverage. Use same means of traversing newly troweled
work as cement finisher's use to prevent tracking to extent
greater than by finishers. Apply evenly and uniformly at rate
of 350sq.
puddles. ft. per gallon (+/- 10%) , without skips, runs or
2 . Surface hardener: Immediately following preparation per "B"
above and cleaning noted per 03356-01-D3-c, apply by hydro-
spray uniformly at 350 sq. ft. per gallon (+/- 15%) .
Yr+
}
it
r:
DRYPACK & GROUT SECTION 03370 .0
03370-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide drypack and grout where shown or called for in other
,
sections, except sections in Division 4, Masonry, and concrete
bond grouting work in Section 03310.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Bond grouts for standardweight concrete in Section 03310,
Standardweight Concrete.
b. Grout for masonry in Division 4. k
c. Furnishings of wood framing bearing on drypack in Section
06110, Framing & Sheathing.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Set bedded and embedded items to within
allowable tolerances for line, level and plumb required for work
of section in which item is provided.
C. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements: Prevent drypack and grout from
freezing. Apply on frost-free surfaces. No ice crystals in
water and no salt or chemicals added to mix to prevent freezing.
2 . Minimum handling time: From time of adding water.
a. ASTM Standard mixes: 2 1/2 hours.
b. Proprietary products: Before initial set, but not later than
15 minutes after mixing to drypack consistency and 30 minutes
after mixing to grout consistency.
03370-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Non-shrink type drypack-grout:
a. For all exterior locations and at other locations where
moisture is expected to occur: "Rocklite" by Hartline
Products Co. , Inc. , 133 S.E. Madison St. , Portland, Oregon,
or Standard Dry Wall Products "Thoroset Non-Metallic Grout" ,
jo
or "Five Star Grout" by Madden Construction Supply.
b. For locations other than those per "a" above where non-shrink
grout is shown: Master Builders "Embeco" mortar, Madden
Construction Supply's MCS Circle" , "Por-Rok" by Hallemite,
or any material in "a" above.
2 . Portland cement type drypack-grout: Meet requirements of ASTM
Standards, Type Fine Grout, Size No. 2 aggregate per ASTM, and
with water repellent admix - Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or
Master Builders "Omicron Mortarproofing" . Add accelerator or
retardant to grout when required by weather conditions. Accep-
table accelerators and retarders: Sika Chemical Co.
"Admixtures" and Master Builders ,pozzolith".
3 . Bonding agent: Larsen Products "Weldcrete" , or Masons Supply
Co. "Masco Concrete Bonding Agent" , or Madden Construction
Supply "Unicon 240 PVA" , or approved.
3•��
j6.
03370-02
B. MIXES:
1. Mix and place proprietary products per manufacturer's printed
directions for intended use.
2. Measure and mix Portland cement type dr
requirements of ASTM Standards. Add yP drypack-grout to meet
label directions on container to improveucure.ted Donng notgent use aper
ir-
entraining admix, air-entrained cement, or curing compound
containing solvents where bonding agent manufacturer so directs
Add 1 lb. of water repellent admix per sack of cement plus 1 lb.
per cu. ft. of lime.
3 . Use minimum amount of water consistent with handling require-
ments.
g quire-
03370-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION:
1. Clean off surface to receive drypack or grout and dampen sur-
face unless otherwise noted per manufacturer's printed direc-
tions.
2. Coat surface with bonding agent per container directions where
drypack and grout of ASTM mix are used, otherwise use water.
3 . Allow no bonding agent to occur on surfaces which are not to
receive drypack or grout.
B. INSTALLATION:
I. Bed item to be installed on drypack-grout material in full bed,
free of voids. Force item to final position without lifting,
rr then clean off excess material.
2. Trowel joint to smooth face, flush with edges of bedded item or
flush with face of grout pocket.
3 . If necessary to lift bedded item after setting, remove item
entirely and build bed back to full bed depth before re-setting.
C. CURING:
1. Proprietary products: Per manufacturer's printed recommen-
dations.
2. ASTM Standards material: Same as concrete per 03310-03-C.
rr
r
r
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
GENERAL MASONRY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 04001
04001-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION
►' 1. Requirements of this section supplement other sections in
Division 4.
r; 2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing reinforcement steel dowel bars embedded in concrete
to splice to masonry reinforcement in Section 03200, Concrete
Reinforcement.
b. Furnishing to mason rolled steel shape frames for openings,
anchorage devices for masonry supported structural members
and other metal fabrications embedded into masonry in Section
05500, Metal Fabrications.
1W c. Providing dampproofing on masonry in Section 07171, Colorless
Dampproofing.
d. Sealant work abutting masonry in Section 07900, Sealants.
e. Furnishing jamb anchors for hollow metal frames in Section
08100, Hollow Metal Doors & Hollow Metal Frames.
3 . Definitions: All per UBC-1985, Chapter 24, unless otherwise
noted.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
r a. Safety and health: Meet scaffolding, ladder and working-
walking surface requirements per Oregon Safety Code.
2 . Allowable tolerances: For laid masonry.
a. Maximum variation from plumb:
(1) In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and corners:
(a) 1/4" in 10' .
(b) 3/8" in any story, maximum.
iW (2) For conspicuous lines:
(a) 1/4" in any story, maximum.
(b) 1/2" in 40'
b. Maximum variation from level and design grades for exposed
lintels, sills, horizontal joints and grooves and other con-
spicuous lines:
(1) 1/4" in any bay or 201 .
(2) 1/2" in 401 .
c. Maximum variation of linear building line, column, wall and
partition from design locations in plan:
+ (1) 1/4" in any bay or 201 , maximum.
(2) 3/8" in 401 .
r d. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns
and in thickness of walls from design dimension: Not more
than 1/4" smaller and 1/2" larger.
C. SUBMITTALS:
' 1. Test reports: Independent laboratory reports for each type of
masonry unit indicating initial rate of absorption (suction) if
laying such units is proposed in air temperatures below 40
degrees F.
4-I
04001-01
2 . Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit certificates attesting
compliance with specifications for concrete masonry units.
3 . Manufacturer's instructions: Per Section 01341.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: '
1. Deliver cement, lime and other packaged materials in manufac-
turer's original, unopened containers bearing brand name or
manufacturer.
2 . Storage:
a. Store packaged materials in dry. Protect from dampness while
stored and remove materials from premises showing lumpiness
or other evidence of damage.
b. Keep graded aggregates from becoming intermixed and mixed
with soil.
c. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which
allow air circulation under stacked units and in manner to
prevent contamination by materials likely to cause staining
or other defects.
d. Covering: Use in manner to prevent condensation within
envelope formed by cover.
(1) Cover masonry units as necessary to protect from ele-
ments. See cold weather protection.
(2) Protect concrete and clay tile against wetting prior to
use.
e. Protect anchors, ties and reinforcement from elements.
3 . Handling:
a. Handle masonry units on pallets or flat bed barrows.
b. Do not permit free discharge of masonry units from conveyor "y
or transporting in mortar trays.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements:
a. Cold weather protection:
(1) Unless otherwise noted, protect per "Recommended
Practice for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council. All
recommendations, preferred form of materials, and prohi-
bitions throughout are mandatory for temperatures stated
therein.
(2) Calcium chloride or other form of anti-freeze not permit-
ted in masonry work.
(3) No masonry work permitted when mean daily air temperature
is 25 degrees F. or lower.
(4) Remove ice and frost on masonry bed by carefully applying
heat until surface is dry to touch.
(5) Remove freeze damaged masonry.
(6) Lay only dry, unfrozen masonry units.
(7) Maintain masonry above freezing for 16 hours afterx
laying.
(8) Completely cover masonry less than 72 hours old for 48
hours (24 hours if Type III cement was used) from time
mean daily air temperature falls below 32 degrees F.
4-2
�r
04001-01
b. Hot weather protection: Protect masonry under construction from
direct exposure to wind and sun when ambient air temperature is
over 99 degrees F. in the shade with relative humidity less than
50%.
iw 2 . Protection, general:
a. Covering masonry:
(1) Cover top of incomplete work subject to falling moisture
with coverings extending 2' or more down all sides of
work at end of day. Leave cover in place until resuming
work. If work is cavity wall, bring both faces to same
level before covering.
(2) In wet weather, work under cover and keep work out of wet
for 5 days from day of installation.
b. Loading:
(1) Minimum of 12 hours from time of completion of load
bearing masonry to time of application of any dead or
uniform loads.
w► (2) Minimum of 3 days from time of completion of masonry to
application of concentrated load.
c. Use no muriatic acid for any purpose on masonry. Only acids
contained in specified cleaning agent are permitted.
3 . Scaffolding: Provide, maintain and remove all scaffolding and
temporary floors necessary for work.
4 . Sequencing: Coordinate timing of work with sill flashing in-
stallation at masonry sills and with other masonry related work.
04001-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Water: Clean, fit to drink.
2 . Temporary coverings for masonry units and masonry in place:
*W Nonstaining, preformed membrane material with moisture perms-
bility not greater than 6 mil polyethylene plastic film.
3 . Other materials: Specified in other sections of Division 4 .
iw
B. MIXES: Specified in other sections of Division 4 .
04001-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Condition of surfaces: Inspect to assure surfaces to support
masonry are:
a. To proper grades and elevations.
b. Free of all dirt and other deleterious material.
c. Surfaces not properly prepared have been satisfactorily
corrected.
2 . Verify initial absorption rate of masonry unit to assure within
acceptable limits.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Anchors, ties and reinforcement: Remove all dirt, ice, loose
rust and scale prior to installation.
4W
4'3
04001-03
2 . Otherre aration: Specified in other sections of Division 4 .
P P
C. INSTALLATION:
1. Install no cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding
ASTM allowances.
2 . Use masonry saw to cut exposed units and to provide true, even
edged cuts.
3 . Lay units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately
space within allowable tolerances.
4 . Do not furrow bed joints.
5. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toot
hing
not permitted.
6. Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.
7. If units are displace after mortar has stiffened, remove, clean
joint and units of mortar and relay with fresh mortar.
8. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry:
a. Remove loose unit and mortar. °
b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to
laying fresh masonry.
9. Protection during construction:
a. Protect sills, ledges, cavities and offsets from mortar
drippings or other damage.
b. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately.
c. Protect face materials against staining.
d. Protect door jambs and corners from damage.
10. Mortar beds:
a. Lay solid units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical joints in all courses.
b. Lay hollow units with full face shell mortar beds and with
head and end joints solidly filled with mortar for distance
in from face of unit not less than thickness of longitudinal r
face shells.
c. Provide sufficient mortar on ends of solid units to fill head
joints.
d. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two
adjacent units in place.
e. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after
setting in place.
f. Where adjustment to corners or jambs must be made after
mortar has started to set, remove mortar and replace with
fresh mortar.
11. Joints:
a. Construct each joint type uniformly.
b. Shove vertical joints to specified joint width so joint is
full and exudes surplus mortar.
c. Tool joints in exposed surfaces when thumb-print hard, using
jointing tool. See other sections for shape, size, etc.
d. Flush cut all joints on external portions of units not
specified tooled except joints in cavity.
4-4
04001-03
e. Movement and sealant joints: Keep movement joints clean of
all mortar and debris. Fill hollow metal frames with mortar
as masonry is laid, but do not fill mullions. Unless other-
wise shown, leave sealant space around perimeters of hollow
metal frames 1" deep x 1/2" wide at each face of masonry.
12 . Built-in work:
a. Consult other trades to minimize cutting and patching.
mow b. Install bolts, anchors, conduits and other built-in items as
masonry progresses. Install jamb anchors for hollow metal
work frames with adjustable anchors at approximately 16" o.c.
Place bolts at exterior walls and other locations as shown
for plates, ledgers and sills. Place bolts 7" into grouted
reinforced masonry.
`
C. Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar, unless other-
wise shown.
13 . Where rubber room base occurs on masonry walls, fill all joints
flush behind base and slightly slope exposed top of vertical
joints from top of base back and up to line of normal concave
joint face.
14. Other installation requirements: Specified in other sections of
Division 4 . Where conflict between this section and other
Division 4 sections occur, other sections take precedence.
D. POINTING & PATCHING:
iW I. Cut out defective joints and damaged work, repoint, retool or
replace as necessary to produce masonry free of objectionable
blemishes.
2 . Dry brush after final pointing.
E. CLEANING:
1. Leave masonry and surrounding surfaces clean, free from mortar
stains, efflorescence, other stains and masonry work debris.
2. Final cleaning of masonry at times which will usually be as soon
as an area of masonry is otherwise completed.
3. Preliminary cleaning:
a. Not more than 4 hours after mortar takes preliminary set,
clean face of work with water and damp sponge or burlap
cloth, then restrike joints.
b. Dry brush masonry surface at end of each days work.
4. Final cleaning:
a. Hollow clay unit masonry: Use stiff bristle brushes having
non-metallic bristles and rinse with water. No metal
scrapers permitted.
too
�r
�r
4-5
MORTAR & GROUT SECTION 04100
04100-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish mortar and grout for work of Division 4 .
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing drypack and grout for work of sections in divisions
other than Division 4.
b. Work noted as related work per Section 04001, General Masonry
Requirements.
B. SUBMITTALS: See Section 04001.
C. PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: See Section 04001.
D.
JOB CONDITIONS•
1. Cold weather protection:
a. Mortar:
(1) Produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F.
by heating thus:
Air Temperature Construction Requirements
40 to 32 degrees F Heat sand or mixing water
32 to 25 degrees F Heat sand and mixing water
(2) Minimum temperatures of mortar on mortar boards: 40
degrees F.
b. Grout: Same as cold weather concreting per Section 03310,
Standardweight Aggregate Concrete.
2 . Other job-conditions: Per Section 04001.
04100-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Mortars:
a. Concrete unit masonry mortar: ASTM C270-73, Type S, with
material colors thus:
(1) All mortar for exposed-to-view 8" x 12" x 4" Hollow Clay
masonry units.
(2) Submit color samples for architects selection.*
2 . Grouts: ASTM C476 Types, thus:
a. Coarse: For grout spaces in masonry 2" or more in horizontal
dimension and in grout spaces in filled-cell construction 4"
or more in both horizontal dimensions.
b. Fine: For all locations, including locations per "a" above,
at Contractor's option.
3 . Admixtures:
a. Water repellent: Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or Master
Builders "Omicron Mortarproofing" .
b. Air-entraining: As permitted by ASTM C150.
c. Other admixtures: Not permitted.
D. Other mortar and grout materials: Per Section 04001-02.
* Probably a natural (gray) color mortar will be selected. However,
the owner reserves the right to have a color mix.
4-6
04100-02
B. MIXES:
1. Mortars: Hollow Clay unit masonry mortar: Per ASTM C270, Type
S, with 1 lb. water repellent admix per 94 lbs. of cement plus
1 lb. per cubic foot of hydrated lime or lime putty in mortar at
all masonry and, at CSB masonry only, with coloring quantity per
approved sample.
'3 2 . Grouts: Measuring and proportions per ASTM C476 for type grout
specified.
04100-03 EXECUTION
A. PERFORMANCE:
1. Mixing:
a. Machine mix: Mix ASTM C270 mortar for at least 3 minutes and
6W ASTM 476 grout for at least 5 minutes with maximum amount of
water required to produce workable consistency in batch mixer
and still obtain required compressive strengths. In mortar
requiring water repellent admix, add required dry quantity of
admix to dry mortar materials before adding water, then mix
for 5 minutes, add water and mix at least 3 more minutes.
b. Hand mix: When less than 4 cu. ft./hour of mortar is
required, hand mixing may be permitted on Architect's written
approval of proposed equipment and procedure. Hand mixing
grout not permitted.
2. Retempering: Retemper mortar stiffened because of evaporation
of water by adding water as frequently as necessary to restore
required consistency. Do not retemper grout.
3 . Placement time: To final position from time of adding first
water.
a. ASTM C270 mortar: 2 1/2 hours, maximum.
b. Grout: 1 hour for machine mix in normal ambient tempera-
tures.
HOLLOW CLAY UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04220
04220-01 GENERAL
iW A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide reinforced and partially reinforced 8" x 12" x 4" nom.
hollow clay unit masonry. Requirements of this section take
precedence over Section 04001 where conflicting statements
" occur.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Work noted as related work in Section 04001, General Masonry
wr.
Requirements.
b. Furnishing mortar and grout in Section 04100, Mortar & Grout.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Per Section 04001.
C. SUBMITTALS: Per Section 04001.
w
y.r 4-7
04220-01
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: Per Section 04001.
E. JOB CONDITIONS: Per Section 04001.
04220-02 PRODUCTS
r
A. MATERIALS:
1. Kla-all hollow masonry units by Mutual Materials (or approved
equal) in accordance with ASTM C652-HBS-SW.
a. 8" x 12" x 4" units at all building walls.
b. 6" x 12" x 4" units at 18" sq. columns and 6'-6" high screen
walls.
c. Color selected - Carib. (Show sample to owner prior to purchase) .
2. Reinforcement:
a. Vertical and horizontal reinforcing steel bars per ASTM A615.
Bars Grade 40.
3 . Anchors and ties:
a. Strap ties for anchoring block to steel: Provided by steel
fabricator. Rs
4 . Other materials: Per Sections 04001 and 04100.
04220-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION: Per Section 04001.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Lay only dry units.
2 . Remove extraneous portions of block material from imperfectly
formed cells at cells to receive bar type reinforcing.
3 . Other preparation: Per Section 04001.
C. INSTALLATION:
1. Bond, running: Vertical joints at center of masonry units in
alternate course below. Use running bond, unless otherwise
shown.
2 . Joints:
a. Nominal thickness: 3/811 .
b. Types: All joints in exposed-to-view masonry tooled with
jointing tool.
(1) Exterior: Struck concave.
(2) Interior: Struck concave.
(3) Concealed inside cells to receive bar reinforcement:
Struck flush.
(4) Concealed by room base: Flush where base contacts
masonry.
c. Other joint requirements: Per Section 04001.
3 . Alignment: Where both faces of units are exposed to view, lay
units to design centerline of wall, averaging to each side
variations in unit widths. Where only one face of unit is
exposed-to-view, lay exposed face true to design plane.
4 . Mortar beds:
a. Hollow units:
NOTE: Because of grade differential, a stepped-down brick wall must
be installed. Submit shop drawings on how this will be accom-
plished.
4-8
` 04220-03
(1) Lay with full mortar coverage on all face shells and webs
in all following courses:
(a) Piers, columns and pilasters.
(b) Starting course on footings, solid foundation walls
and slabs.
(c) Where adjacent to cells or cavities to be grout
filled.
5. Protection during construction: Per Section 04001.
6. Reinforced hollow unit masonry: All walls 611, nominal, and
wider detailed on structural drawings are reinforced hollow unit
masonry work.
a. Reinforcement: Per Chapter 24 - UBC.
(1) Hold vertical reinforcement firmly in place by means of
specified positioning devices at top, bottom and at
intervals not exceeding 192 diameters of reinforcement.
(2) Place horizontal reinforcement as work progresses in
longest practical lengths. 6' minimum bar length for
vertical bars.
(3) Minimum clear distance between longitudinal bars:
Nominal diameter of bar.
(4) Minimum thickness of mortar or grout between masonry unit
and bar type reinforcement: 1/411.
(5) Tie or weld lap splices securely to prevent displacement.
Locate horizontal bar lap splices other than at laps in
vertical bars.
(6) Cold bend all bars.
(7) Do not straighten or otherwise repair damaged reinforce-
went.
ow (8) Do not install kinked or damaged reinforcement.
b. Forms and shores: Per Chapter 24 - UBC.
(1) Provide substantial and tight forms.
(2) Leakage of mortar or grout not permitted.
(3) Brace or shore forms and heads of hollow metal frames to
maintain position and shape. Shore under lintels at
openings.
(4) Do not remove forms or shoring until masonry beams have
hardened sufficiently to carry own weight and other
temporary loads during construction: Minimum 10 days
_.iW before shore removal.
c. Grouting: Per Chapter 24 - UBC.
(1) Assure that grout core is clean of mortar and drippings
r` and other deleterious materials.
(2) Grout spaces containing reinforcing at intervals along
wall of not more than 24" in lifts of 4801, maximum, as
wall is built.
(3) Agitate, vibrate or puddle grout during and after place-
ment to insure complete filling. Agitate each lift at
least twice. Second time between 15-30 minutes after
initial agitation.
(4) Stop grout 1 1/2" below top of masonry when grouting is
to be stopped for 1 hour or more.
(5) Continue grouting to top of finished wall. Fully grout
iw bond beam and lintel block.
(6) Provide grout barriers at convenient intervals.
,,, D. POINTING & PATCHING: Per Section 04001.
E. CLEANING: Per Section 04001.
4.9
.err
DIVISION 5 - METALS
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05120
it
05120-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide structural steel work consisting of structural steel
parts as defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges", 7th Edition. Furnish, but do not
install, steel parts indicated in 05120-01-A2 as furnished per
this section and installed under other sections.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing temporary light and electricity in Sections 01511
and 01512.
b. Installation of connection elements and anchor bolts for
structural steel work in poured-in-place concrete in Section
03100, Concrete Framework. Connections and bolts for
structural steel furnished per 05120.
C. Providing drypack supporting structural steel members and
assemblies in Section 03370, including grouting under bearing
plates.
d. Work in other sections of Division 5 and work noted in other
sections of Division 5 as related work in divisions other
than Division 5.
e. Providing finish coats of paint in Section 09900, Painting.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Requirements of regulatory agencies and precedence of require-
ments:
a. Building code: Uniform Building Code (UBC) , 1985 Edition.
b. Contrary to requirements of Supplementary Conditions,
t structural drawings take precedence over specifications.
c. In absence of specific requirements and unless otherwise
specified, provisions of following standard specifications
govern work:
(1) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication & Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings" adopted by AISC.
(2) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" adopted by AISC.
(3) American Welding Society's "Code for Welding in Building
Construction", AWS.
(4) Steel Structures Painting Council's "Steel Structures
Painting Manual".
2 . Qualifications for Welding:
a. Welding procedures and operations: Qualified per AWS "Code
for Welding in Building Construction".
lrr. b. Welders and tackers: Currently certified welders with cer-
tificates for arc welding. Certification by AWS for type of
work welder and tacker performs.
C. SUBMITTALS: Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing and Submittal
Procedures.
` 1. Shop drawings:
05120-01
a. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts,
copes, connections, splices, holes, threaded fastners, welds,
member sizes, areas to receive shop primer, fabrication
tolerances and member alignment.
b. Indicate welding electrode for each weld.
2. Erection. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions
for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices at
time of delivery of bolts and devices.
D. PRODUCT HANDLING:
1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be installed
under work of other sections before start of cast-in-place
concrete work.
2 . Storage at site: Store structural steel above ground in plat-
forms, skids or similar supports in undistorted position, braced
so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or overturning.
Store package materials in original, unbroken containers in dry,
weathertight, place until ready for use. Position steel
assemblies to minimize water-holding pockets and protect from
soiling, contamination and deterioration of shop prime coat.
05120-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Structural steel: New and meet requirements of ASTM Standard
for rolled shapes and for shaped tubular sections.
2 . Bolts & nuts: ASTM Standards.
3 . Primer: Rodda Paint Co. 's "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal
Primer - Oxide Red" or Interim Fed Spec. TT-P-0086F, "Paint,
Red-Lead-Base, Ready Mixed", Type II, "Red Lead Mixed Pigment-
Alkyd Varnish-Linseed Oil Paint" .
4 . Filler metal for welding: Electrodes for shielded metal-arc
welding per AWS.
5. Anchor bolts, standard threaded fastners and anchor studs:
a. Anchor bolts: Per ASTM.
b. Standard threaded fastners:
(1) Standard bolts and nuts: ASTM, Grade A.
(2) Plain washers: ANSI.
c. Studs: As shown.
6. Masonry ties to steel 22 gage galvanized steel x 1" wide x
length required to extend to 1/2" from face of finished masonry
joint.
7 . Corrosion protection tape: 3M "Scotchwrap" No. 50 or 51.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Fabrication requirements of standards noted per "Quality
Assurance" are minimum requirements for all work. Meet addi-
tional requirements below.
2 . Clean steel at fabricating plant per Steel Structures Painting
Council's specifications.
3
s-z
05120-02
3 . Tolerances:
a. Compression members: Straight to within 1/1000 of axial
length between laterally supported points.
b. Completed members: Free from twists, bends, open joints and
without sharp kinks or bends.
c. Length variation: Per AISC "Specification for the Design,
Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings".
4 . Connections:
a. Shop: Welded types as shown. Plug weld masonry ties to
columns so tie, when twisted, tears before weld fails.
,. b. Field: Use threaded fastners for connection to concrete
shown bolted.
c. Welding: By manual shielded-arc only. Meet requirements of
AW AWS.
5. Shop painting: Shop paint per SSPC-PS, one coat of specified
primer all structural steel work except steel encased in con-
crete or masonry.
05120-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Prior to erection work, examine anchor bolt and anchorage
assembly for plumb, level and correctness of elevation, con-
dition of bolt threads, and completeness of installation.
2. Notify Contractor of all remedial work required for erection.
Make arrangements for proper coordination of structural steel
erection with drypack and grout work required per Section
03370.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Clean surfaces which will be in permanent contact with concrete
immediately ahead of erection.
2. Clean per requirements of SSPC-PS.
o" C. ERECTION: Meet requirements of AISC "Specifications for the
Design, Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings",
plus following modifications and additional requirements:
iiW 1. Erect columns to within 1/1000 of plumb.
2 . Support attached columns bases with wedges or shims of type and
in manner to permit installation of grout work per Section
03370 without undue interference or necessity for removal of
wedges or shims.
3 . Wrap portions of tube columns abutting concrete slabs with tape
in triple thickness wrap where on-grade exterior slab surrounds
column.
C. CLEANING UP:
1. Upon completion of work of this section, clean up rubbish and
remove from site.
2. Remove tools, equipment and surplus materials from each area as
erection work is completed.
r
w. 5.3
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500
05500-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish, for installation under this section and other sections
in Division 2 thru 14, metal items 10 gage or more in thickness
required to complete work and items less than 10 gage specifi-
cally noted in General Contractor's Check List, unless otherwise
specified. Items consist of fabrications per check list and all
channels, angles, plates, anchors, bolts, clips, etc. , shown on
drawings and not specified as either provided or furnished in
other sections.
2 . Related work in other sections included, but is not limited to:
a. Work in other sections of Division 5, Metals.
b. Providing catch basins and catch basin gratings in Section
02510.
c. Installation of metal fabrications in poured-in-place con-
crete in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
d. Installation of metal fabrications by mechanical fastners
(not welding) used for wood framing and sheathing and other
fabrications not specified to be installed in other sections k
are installed in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing.
e. Providing gate hardware indicated by manufacturer and catalog
number in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
f. Providing finish painting in Section 0990, Painting.
3. General Contractor's Check List: Following metal fabrications
are listed as check list for Contractor's aid. List is by no
means represented as complete. Final responsibility for
supplying all required items rests with General Contractor.
a. Angle thresholds, galvanized. Provide with stud anchors for
securing in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Gate anchors and fabricated of rolled plate, shapes and
tubes.
c. Tube posts and steel brackets with fastenings for supporting
carved wood signs. Galvanized.
d. Channel frames of rolled steel at exterior coiling service
doors. Galvanized.
e. Connection steel of 10 gage or more in thickness for wood to
wood framing, including wood beam hangers and wood post caps
fabricated to details on drawings. See builders hardware in
06110-02 for exclusions.
f. Rolled steel shapes and plates, not specified in Section
05120, Structural Steel Framing.
g. Fastenings for assembly and for installation of metal fabri-
cations and anchor bolts for wood plates on concrete and
masonry, including nuts and washers.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Requirements of regulatory agencies and precedence of require- !1
ments:
a. Building code: Uniform Building Code (UBC) , 1985 Edition.
b. Contrary to requirements of Supplementary Conditions,
structural drawings take precedence over specifications.
5-4
i
05500-01
wr c. In absence of specific requirements and unless otherwise
specified, provisions of following standard specifications
govern work:
(1) American Welding Society's "Code for Welding in Building
Construction", (AWS) .
(2) Steel Structures Painting Council's "Steel Structures
Painting Manual".
2 . Qualifications for welding:
a. Welding procedures and operations• Qualified per AWS "Code
for Welding in Building Construction" .
b. Welders and tackers: Currently certified welders with
certificates for arc welding. Certification by AWS for type
of work welder and tacker performs.
C. SUBMITTALS: Submit per 01340, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures.
1. Shop drawings:
a. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts,
copes, connections, splices, holes, threaded fasteners,
welds, member sizes, items to receive shop primer or
galvanizing (indicate which) and fabrication tolerances.
b. Indicate welds by AWS "Welding Symbols" .
c. Indicate welding electrode for each weld.
d. Where possible, use same detail reference numbers as on
Architect's drawings. Note location of items detailed on
shop drawings which do not have Architect's reference
numbers.
2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installa-
i,., tion of anchor bolts and other anchorage devices at time of
delivery.
D. PRODUCT HANDLING:
1. Deliver built-in metal fabrications, anchor bolts and other
anchorage devices to be installed under work of other sections
before start of cast-in-place concrete work for anchors in
concrete and before start of masonry work for anchors in
masonry. Deliver loose connection materials not installed under
work of this section prior to erection work of other section to
assure adequate time for installation of these materials,
without causing delay or interference with installation.
2 . Storage at site: Store metal fabrications above ground on
platforms, skids or similar supports in undistorted position,
braced so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or over-
turning. Store packaged materials in original, unbroken
containers in dry, weathertight, place until ready for use.
+r Position steel assemblies to minimize water-holding pockets and
protect from soiling, contamination and deterioration of shop
prime coat.
3 . Welding rods: Handling per AWS Standards.
w 5-5
05500-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Steel: New and meet requirements of ASTM A36-70a for rolled
shapes and plates; ASTM A500, Grade B, for shaped tubular
square and rectangular sections; ASTM A120, Schedule 40 for
round sections; ASTM A36-70a, Table 1, for other sections and
materials.
2 . Bolts and nuts:
a. For casting into concrete or setting into masonry grout:
Steel per ASTM Standards 1/2" diameter, unless otherwise
shown, with shank bent to right angle and extending 2" to
side of shank. 10" long where in concrete and 12" long for
plates and sills on masonry, unless otherwise shown.
b. For other locations: ASTM. Plain washers: ANSI.
3 . Finishes:
a. Galvanizing (Symbol GALV) : Hot-dip method, per ASTM
Standards on rolled steel with minimum of 1.2 oz. slab zinc
per square foot of actual surface wire materials. Touch-up
for galvanized metal: "Gale-Weld" or "Galvicon" .
b. Primer: Rodda Paint Co. 's "Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal
Primer - Oxide Red" No. 2447 or Interim Fed. Spec.
TT-P-0086F, "Paint, Red-Lead-Base, Ready-Mixed" , Type II,
"Red Lead Mixed Pigment-Alkyd Varnish-Linseed Oil Paint" .
4 . Filler metal for welding: Electrodes for shielded metal-arc
welding per AWS 5.5 (ASTM A316) for ASTM 500 steel (Electrode:
E70XX) and per AWS 5. 1 (ASTM A233) for ASTM A36 steel
(Electrode: E60XX) .
5. Anchors: As shown for anchorage to concrete masonry. Gal-
vanized at exterior. Where type not shown: Phillips "Red-Head"
5-34 anchor or "Wej-it" standard 3/4" type.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Fabrication requirements of standards noter per "Quality
Assurance" are minimum for work. Meet additional requirements
below.
2 . Clean steel at fabricating plant per Steel Structures Painting
Council's specifications, "Hand Tool Cleaning: .
3 . Tolerances:
a. Compression members: Straight to within 1/500 of axial
length between laterally supported points.
b. Completed members: Free from twists, bends, open joints and
without sharp kinks or bends.
c. Length variation: Per AISC "Specification for the Design,
Fabrication & Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" .
4 . Connections: Bolted and welded types as shown.
a. Bolting: Make holes where required for bolted installation.
b. Welding: By manual shielded-arc only. Meet requirements of
AWS. Grind and buff all welds smooth on work exposed-to-view
of building users, not including maintenance personnel.
5. Fabricate steel to accurate sizes and shapes. Punch and shear
to leave clean surfaces. h
w
/ r;
05500-02
6. Finishes:
a. Shop painting: Shop paint per SSPC-PS and one coat of
specified primer on all metal fabrication items except:
(1) Steel encased in concrete.
(2) Surfaces within 2" of field welds.
(3) Galvanized metal fabrication.
b. Galvanizing: Galvanize all exterior steel items. Galvanize
•► interior steel items where either specifications or drawings
indicate galvanizing. Clean and chemically degrease steel
to be galvanized immediately before hot-dipping. See
"Contractor's Check List" for items specified galvanized.
All galvanizing after fabrication. See 05500-02-A3 for
required quality of galvanizing work.
err
05500-03 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION: Specified in other sections.
k>
`r
�r
Yrwr
i
rr
1
it
w 5-Z
.9frr
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
FRAMING & SHEATHING SECTION 06110
�w
06110-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide wood framing of lumber, plates, ledgers, backing, cross
bracing of wood trusses, plywood sheathing, plywood floors,
preservative treatments, builders hardware, and provide fire-
stopping, miscellaneous wood blocking and nailers specified in
this section.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing work in other sections in Division 6, except
installation of glue laminated structural wood members
furnished per Section 06181 and installation of wood trusses
furnished per Section 06190.
ikw b. Installation of hollow metal frame anchors and anchor bolts
for wood framing embedded in masonry and installation of
hollow metal relite frames surrounded by masonry in Division
4, Masonry.
c. Furnishing nuts, washers and steel angle struts for anchoring
wood framing to bolts in concrete and masonry in Section
05500, Metal Fabrication.
d. Providing firestopping, and attic area separations with
gypsum board at certain locations per 09250, Gypsum Drywall.
e. Providing wood blocking and backing required for mechanical
rw and electrical work, except as specified in this section for
mechanical and electrical work, is in Divisions 15 and 16.
3 . Install items furnished under following sections:
a. Metal fabrications specified in Section 05500, except angle
thresholds, anchor bolts and items with stud anchors embedded
into concrete.
b. Glued laminated structural units: Section 06181.
c. Composite wood roof trusses: Section 06191.
d. Hollow metal frames: Section 08100, except relite frames in
masonry.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications of wood products grading agencies:
a. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB) .
b. Plywood: American Plywood Association (APA)
2 . Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Lumber grading rules: Meet requirements of "Standard Grading
Rules for Western Lumber" of WWPA.
b. Plywood grading rules: National Bureau of Standards.
c. Pressure preservative treated material: Quality marked by
American Wood Preservers Bureau.
` 06110-02 PRODUCTS
k,
A. MATERIALS:
1. Lumber:
a. Species: Douglas Fir & Larch.
rr b. Moisture content at time of surfacing: 19% maximum, "S-Dry" .
rr
c. Surfacing: S4S. 06110-02
d. 2" nom. studs, joists and rafters to be kiln dried (K.D) .
e. Grades:
ITEM WCLIB GRADE
(1) Studs 2" & 3" thick,
3" & 4" wide. . . . . . . . . "STANDARD" - LIGHT FRAMING
(2) Studs 2" & 3" thick,
6" and wider. . . . . . . . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS
& PLANKS
(3) Joists, plates, furring
and miscellaneous framing
members
2" & 3" thick, 4" wide . . . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL LIGHT
FRAMING
(4) Joists, plates and blocking
2" & 3" thick, 6" & wider. . . "NO. 2" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS r
& PLANKS
(5) Joists and beams 4" thck
6 & wider . . . . . . . . . . "NO. 1" - STRUCTURAL JOISTS
"
& PLANKS
2 . Plywood:
a. Roof sheathing:
(1) Grade:
(a) Roof: Unsanded, (CDX) , EXT type.
(2) Size:
(a) 4' x 81 . No remnants or small pieces permitted.
(b) Thickness: 5/8" at roof; 5/8" at walls; 1/2" at
interior partition.
b. Floors:
(1) Grade: B-D, G-I or G-2, INT type.
(2) Size: Unless otherwise shown.
(a) Thickness: 3/411 . T & G.
(b) 4' x 81 . No remnants or small pieces permitted.
c. Backing for telephone equipment.
(1) Grade: Group I - EXT B-B, HDO, overlaid both faces.
(2) Size: 3/4" thick at telephone
equipment x largest standard size necessary to minimize
number of joints. 3
3 . Building paper: Unperforated and per requirements of ASTM
D226-68. Weight: 30 lb. under Metal Roof Application.
4 . Miscellaneous materials:
a. Stripping, blocking and backing for mounting fixtures and
fittings: Douglas Fir of any grade of 2X material specified
for framing.
F,
f
�'2
06110-02
aw
b. Insulation stops at roof decks: Douglas Fir of any grade
of 2X material specified for framing.
C. Firestopping:
(1) Gypsum board: 5/8" Type "X"
(2) Mineral wool: 2" thick blanket material per Fed.
Spec. HH-I-521D, Type I, without moisture barrier
IW covering.
5. Pressure preservative treatment:
a. Treat all framing lumber, stripping and permanent nailing
blocks in contact with concrete or masonry by empty cell
or full cell pressure impregnation process meeting
current requirements of American Wood Preservers
Association specifications.
rr
Preservative treated lumber to have incised marks to
facilitate absorption of salts and identification.
b. Treat wood noted on drawings and/or in other paragraphs
of this section as "Treated" .
6. Rough hardware:
a. General:
irr ( 1 ) Includes all nails, bolts, washers, nuts, screws,
framing, anchors, hanger straps and other items of
builders hardware not specified elsewhere.
tAw (2) Fastenings: Furnish per details. In general,
furnish thus:
(a) Wood plugs for fastenings in concrete and/or
masonry not permitted.
(b) Screws: Screws exposed to view, weather or
dampness: Brass where item secured is brass
and stainless steel at all other locations
requiring exposed screws. Screws for fastening
wood to wood and for wood to sheet metal:
Sheet metal type threads to #14 x 2" size.
+r. Over #14 x 2" size with wood screw threads,
unless otherwise shown.
(c) Wood to masonry or concrete where fastening is
not shown cast into concrete or grout: Machine
bolts and Phillips Self-Drilling Expansion
Shells for bolts 3/8" in diameter and larger.
Rawl "Caulk-Ins" for machine screws less than
i"" 3/8" diameter where anchors are more than 3"
from edge of concrete and where concrete is
more than 5" thick, otherwise use Rawl
yr "Doubles" . Where item to be fastened has
pre-drilled holes, use largest possible
diameter bolt or screw.
b. Detailed fastening and connector material requirements:
( 1 ) Nails and staples: Common, unless otherwise
indicated. See 06110-03 for required sizes and
locations. Pneumatic and mechanically driven
T-nails and staples meeting requirements of ICBO
(UBC) may be substituted for specified nails.
w.
�-3
06110-02
(2) Bolts, nuts and washers: Bolts and nuts per ASTM
A307. Bolts all 3/4" diameter, unless otherwise
indicated.
(3) Power driven pins for 1 1/2" + thick sleeper and
plate on concrete slabs: Omark "H-205" or Hilti NK
75 DX - 3" , or similar pin recommended by pin
manufacturer for this purpose.
(4) Framing connectors (anchors) : Type and size as
indicated. All connectors steel, galvanized after
fabrication, unless otherwise shown in
manufacturer's catalog. Furnish nail fastened
connectors with galvanized nails, one for each nail
hole in connector of size required by connector
manufacturer. Furnish bolt fastened connectors with
bolts and nuts of sizes required. Approved
manufacturers: Simpson, Bowan, TECO and Cleveland.
( 5 ) Screws:
(a) Wood to wood: Type S Phillips Wafer Head where
flush driven screws are required and Type S Pan
Head or Type S Bugle Head at other locations.
Meet requirements of ASTM. Length as required
to nearly penetrate through backing.
(b) Wood to metal: Speed Fasteners, Inc.
"Plymetal Teks" or "Header Teks" , or other
manufacturer, with Phillips "Wafer" Head where
flush driven screws are required and Pan Head
or Wafer Head at other locations. Length of
1/2" greater than total thickness of materials
fastened. Meet requirements of ASTM.
06110-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION:
1 . Lay out for framing and sheathing true to lines and dimensions
shown.
2. Verify that cement mortar drypack under sills and plates
supported on concrete and masonry is to proper level and all
wood shims employed in leveling process are removed.
3. Clean surfaces to receive framing units of irregularities and
debris.
B. INSTALLATION:
1 Install items furnished under other sections per Architect
approved shop drawings and as follows:
a. Install all metal fabrications furnished per Section
05500 except items embedded in concrete or masonry and
items installed by welding to building structure.
b. Wood trusses furnished per Section 06190.
( 1 ) During erection exercise care to keep horizontal
bending of trusses to minimum.
(2) Install temporary bracing to hold trusses true and
plumb and in safe condition until permanent bracing
and bridging is solidly nailed in place. Install
permanent bracing and make all permanent fastenings
of components before application of any loads,
except weight of erectors.
-4
06110-03
(3) Field erection, proper handling, safety precautions,
temporary bracing and safeguards or procedures consistent
with good workmanship and building erection practices
shall meet requirements of AITC.
C. Glue laminated wood structural members: Set beams with
crown up. Leave wrapping in place until permanent
protection is provided by roof or adequate cover. Should
moisture accumulate within wrapper, slit bottom of
wrapper to allow moisture to escape. Follow storage and
handling recommendations of AITC. Drill bolt holes and
install bolts per recommendations of National Forest
Products Association's "National Design Specifications
for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its' Fastenings" .
d. Hollow metal frames: Install in accurate location
plumb
at jambs and level at heads. Secure anchorages and
connections to adjacent construction. Wherever possible,
leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set
perfectly square and plumb, and anchors are securely
attached.
iw 2. Framing, stripping and blocking:
a. Cut, fit and erect framing plumb and level, except where
otherwise shown. Where framing is shown other than plumb
and level, erect true to lines and slopes shown.
b. Walls and partitions:
(1 ) Soles and sills: Install single plates at all frame
it walls. Plates same size as studs, unless otherwise
shown.
(2) Studs: Size as shown and space 16" O.C. Arrange
three studs at corners to provide nailing for finish
or backing material.
(3) Top plates: Double top plate, except top plates
directly under beams may be single. Lap at each
or intersection with walls or partitions. Joints in
upper and lower members staggered minimum of 4' -011 .
C. Joists:
( 1 ) Set with crown up; lap and spike together over
bearings. Spike Joists to studs where Joists bear
on ribbons and are at same spacing as studs. Where
joist bear on ribbons at different spacing than
studs, block joist ends between studs and Joists.
At Joist to beam and joist to header connections,
install per structural drawings.
%W (2) Double Joists under partitions which run parallel to
Joists; space to provide clearance for pipes in
partitions. Space all Joists at 16" o.c. unless
otherwise shown. Install solid box headers at ends
of all Joists, except furring Joists on ribbons.
(3) Bridging: Bridge rafters more than 6" depth and
Joists more than 4" depth at each support by solid
blocking of 2X material and between supports at
every 8' for Joists and every 10' for rafters by
solid blocking with 2X material.
d. Openings: Double framing members around openings over 4'
wide; install cripple studs under headers in addition to
double studs. Provide two cripple studs at each side of
openings where wall above opening is a bearing wall.
�-s
Provide double headers on edge (triple at 2 x 6 or larger
stud bearing walls) . Headers approximately same depth in
inches as well opening in feet (8' opening requires 2 x
8's on edge) . Minimum header size two 2 x 6.
e. Furring:
( 1 ) Partitions and soffits: At areas where wood furring
is required, whether specifically shown or not,
provide framing of same spacing and sizes as studs
adjacent, unless otherwise shown.
(2) Ceilings: Unless otherwise shown, install 2"
nominal joists where required ceiling height is less
than results from roof framing. In sizes required
for shortest span per UBC.
f. Backing and blocking:
( 1 ) For urinal fillers: Install wood backing for
ceramic tile urinal fillers between floor mounted
urinals installed at wood frame walls. Where
urinals are closer than 24" from room corner,
install urinal filler framing from urinals to
corners.
(2) For attachment to and/or support of recessed and
surface mounted items by framing: Install backing
and blocking for mounting all surface and recess
mounted items to wood framing, except backing and
blocking required solely for mounting of electrical
outlet boxes, lighting fixtures and electrical
conduit and backing and blocking required solely for
mounting of mechanical trim items, HVC controls and
piping. Install blocking in wood framing for
securing door stops, miscellaneous hardware,
mirrors, ceiling hung toilets compartments, toilet
room accessories, drapery tracks and other items
specified in Divisions 5 through 14. Verify
requirements of these divisions and make marks or
diagrams to show location after concealment.
(3) For nailing soffit material: Install 2 x 4
(minimum) blocking: At soffits where soffit
material changes direction and at locations shown.
(4) Backing for chalkboard and telephone equipment:
Install HDO plywood.
3. Firestopping:
a. Install 2X wood material to cut off all concealed draft
openings (both vertical and horizontal) within the width
of wood frame walls, wall furring and partitions and
within the depth of wood frame floor and ceiling framing
whether or not specifically shown. Install thus:
( 1 ) In all wood stud walls and partitions at ceiling
level and floor level and between wood joists where
joists cross over top plates.
(2) In all wood stud walls and partitions, including
wall furring, so placed that maximum dimension of
any concealed space is not over 101 .
(3) Within any other wood framing not specifically
mentioned above, such as holes in framing for
electrical raceways, pipes, shafting, behind furring
strips and similar places which could afford a
passage for flames.
6-40
iw
r
06110-03
b. Where width of opening for passage of draft within
framing is such that more than one piece of lumber is
necessary to block draft, install two thicknesses of 1"
nominal lumber with joints broken or 3/4"-thick plywood
or gypsum board. See Section 09250 for locations of
firestopping with gypsum board required by work of
' " Section 09250.
C. Inside furred spaces, except attic spaces, where clear
distance between wood frame assemblies (such as walls,
5rr partitions, ceilings, soffits, and roofs) is 1 ' or less
provided 3/4"-thick plywood or 5/8" gypsum board, so
placed that maximum dimension of concealed spaces is not
over 10' in horizontal and vertical dimension.
4. Cutting:
a. Cutting limitations:
(1 ) Carpenters do all cutting of structural members for
other trades or be responsible for same.
(2) Maximum boring of joists, 1" hole, but edge of hole
not permitted closer than 2" to joist edge. No
boring permitted in center 1/3 of joists.
b. Cutting treated wood: Saturate cuts with heavy brush
coat of touch-up treatment material of same type as
treated wood.
5. Coordination with other trades: Provide framing headers,
trimmers and cripples for electrical, mechanical and other
trades. Verify requirements before starting work. Frame
openings in wood for following mechanical and electrical work,
in addition to other mechanical and electrical openings
required. Frame openings from information furnished to
General Contractor before framing in area is started:
a. Electrical subdistribution panel recesses.
b. Mechanical work roof openings. Verify requirements with
work of Division 15.
C. Duct openings in floors, walls and ceilings.
6. Sheathing, decks and floors:
a. Walls: Apply plywood sheathing with face grain running
rr horizontally or vertically; all joints staggered when
installed horizontally.
b. Plywood roof decks: Apply with face grain at right
angles to joists, all joints staggered. All joints on
bearing.
C. Plywood floors: Apply with face grain at right angles to
joists, all joints on bearing.
w 7. Building paper: Install at locations indicated on drawings,
locations indicated in this section and locations noted in
other sections. Lay in full rolls, no remnants or small
pieces; protect from tearing; at vertical applications lap
horizontal joints 2", vertical joints 6" . Secure with large
head galvanized roofing nails spaced 8" o.c. at joints, 16"
iW o.c. along middle of sheets at vertical applications.
8. Fastenings:
a. Nailing:
(1 ) Drive nails perpendicular to grain instead of
toe-nailing where feasible.
+r.► 6-7
06110-03
(2) Framing connectors secured only with type and size
fastenings recommended by connector manufacturer.
Where nailing is required, install one nail for each
nail hole in connector. Install per drawings.
(3) Minimum nailing requirements for typical
connections, unless otherwise shown: Per 1985 UBC.
b. Bolted connections:
( 1 ) Plates and sills to foundations and walls: Drill
holes for anchor bolts not more than 1/32" larger
than bolt diameter. Install plate with washer on
top of top surface of plate and under nut. Draw
nuts tight against washer after leveling drypack has p
set.
(2) Built-up beams and headers: Bolt members together
when over 10" in depth at 24" o.c. Stagger bolts.
Install bolts at 2-1/2" from each edge of individual
pieces. Install washer under both bolt head and
washer. Drill holes of diameter to permit bolts to
be easily driven, 1/32" to 1/16" larger than bolt,
depending on bolt size. Forcible driving of bolts
not permitted. Tighten nut against washer to
slightly depress washers into wood.
(3) Beams to posts: Per drawings.
C. Power driven pin connections: Space specified pins at
3' -0" o.c. and within 4" of ends of members at partition
plates and 2X stripping on masonry; at 24" o.c. and
within 4" of ends of 5/8" and 3/4" stripping.
10. Erection of wood trusses per AITC.
a. Hoist into position with cables for spans under 301 ;
spreader bars for spans 30' -601 .
b. Exercise care to keep out-of-plane bending of assemblies
to minimum.
C. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold
assemblies plumb and in safe condition until permanent
bracing is installed.
d. Install permanent bracing and related components prior to
application of loads to assemblies.
e. Tighten loose connectors when of bolt type.
f. Restrict construction loads to prevent overstressing of
assembly members.
9. Do not cut or remove assembly members.
NOTE: Frame in for 2 ' sheetrock boxes forl5 light fixtures as
described in 09500 -03 for multi-purpose room. (Coordinate) .
GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06181-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish glue-laminated members.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Furnishing connectors for mounting glue-laminated beams
to non-glue laminated supporting structure in Section
05500, Metals Fabrications.
b•8
lr
06181-01
b. Erection of glue-laminated structural units in Section
06110, Framing and Sheathing.
C. Providing temporary and permanent bracing in Section
06110.
d. Providing stain in Section 09900, Painting.
iw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturer: Western Wood Structures, Inc.
(Weyerhaeuser) and Timfab, Inc. or equal.
2. Quality standards: National Bureau of Standards , AITC and
additional requirements of Section 06181.
3. Source quality control: Stamp all principal members with an
indenting AITC or PTL (Pittsburgh Testing Lab) Quality Mark.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop drawing: Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal
'&+ Procedures.
a. Indicate particulars per AITC Attachments No. 1 and 2.
Note grades and locations of laminates and ASTM number
*W for adhesives for each unit.
b. Show span, camber, size, pitch, location of units and
unit's identification mark.
C. Show appropriate erection instructions.
2. Certificates: Submit AITC certificates of conformance.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
,. 1. Individually wrap exposed-to-view (in completed building)
members. Wrap per AITC.
2. Wrapping of concealed members: Not required.
3. Unload per AITC.
4. Beams stockpiled or stored prior to erection in on-edge
Position, resting upon temporary bearing supports and braced
so as to be subjected to no unusual bending or to overturning.
yr
06181-02 PRODUCTS
W
A. MATERIALS:
1. Lumber: Per "General Notes" on structural drawings.
2. Adhesive: ASTM wet-use adhesive.
3. Shop primer: None.
B. FABRICATION:
%W 1. Per PS 56-73 and additional requirements in Section 06181.
2. Camber beams as detailed.
3. Appearance grades: As defined in "Standard Appearance Grades
+ „ for Glue-Laminated Timber, " AITC and as further called for
below.
a. All locations concealed from persons other than
err maintenance personnel: Industrial grade.
b. All locations exposed-to-view (in maintenance building) :
Industrial grade except misses not permitted in surfacing
exposed faces and all exposed faces surfaced smooth per
"Architectural Appearance Grade. "
�"" 6-9
06181-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION: Per Section 06110.
B. ERECTION: Per Section 06110.
TRUSSED ROOF JOISTS SECTION 06190
y:r
06190-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish supplier designed trussed roof joists of open-web type
fabricated from solid lumber. Furnish for locations shown and
with x-bridging as indicated. See "General Notes" on
structural drawings.
2. Related work in other sections includes erection of trussed
roof joists in Section 06110, Framing and Sheathing.
3. Design conditions: Meet requirements of "Uniform Building
Code" (UBC) of 1985 and criteria indicated per "General Notes"
on structural drawings.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications:
a. Of manufacturer: All work accomplished in properly
equipped manufacturing facility of permanent nature, open
to inspection by General Contractor and Architect. All
manufacturing by experienced workmen, using precision
cutting and fabricating equipment, under direct
supervision of qualified foreman.
b. Of truss engineering: ; Approved by Oregon registered
professional engineer employed by truss manufacturer.
C. Of lumber grading: Graded by WCLIB or WWPA or other
rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee of
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau on or after September
1, 1970, unless higher stress ratings are shown on
drawings or required by truss engineering design.
C. SUBMITTALS: Shop drawings as indicated in "General Notes" on
structural drawings.
k
06190-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Lumber: Meet stress grade and dimension requirements
indicated on engineering drawings. Moisture content at time
of fabrication between 7% and 19%. All members from lumber
grade stamped by qualified grading agency or association.
q
b-l0
w.r
06190-02
2. Connectors: In accordance with approved shop drawings.
3. Accessories provided by Joist supplier: Anchors for wood
r.
trusses, bridging and bearing plates.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Members and connectors accurately placed.
err 2. No open joints which depend on stiffness of metal connector
plate to transmit stresses nor improperly fitting joints
permitted.
3. Permanently stamp each Joist with name and address of
fabricator.
06190-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION: Per Section 06110.
B. ERECTION: Per Section 06110.
FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200
Orr
06200-01 GENERAL
w. A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Section 06200 specifies certain requirements common to work of
Sections 06201, Wood Trim; and 06220, Millwork, in addition to
installation specifications for following items furnished
under other divisions:
a. Metal Doors, Section 08100.
rw■ b. Hardware listed in Finish Hardware Schedule and specified
in Section 08710.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing wood trim in Section 06201.
b. Providing millwork in Section 06220.
C. Providing aluminum entrance doors in Section 08120.
d. Providing plastic laminate casework, including cutouts insuch casework, in Section 12310.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications of wood products grading agencies:
a. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB) .
b. Plywood: American Plywood Association (APA) .
2. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
6W a. Lumber grading rules: Meet requirements of "Standard
Grading and Dressing Rules for West Coast Lumber" of
WCLB, or "Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber" of
6W WWPA.
b. Plywood grading rules: National Bureau of Standards U.S.
Product Standard.
%W to-II
06200-01
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit shop drawings for detailed items of trim and other
special millwork items. Submit per 01340-01, Shop Drawing
Submittal Procedures.
2. Hardware installation tools: On completion of work, turn over
to owner's representative two sets of special tools furnished
by hardware supplier. Obtain signed receipt for same.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1. Delivery: Deliver materials ready to install without further
machining or sanding needed before installation.
2. Moisture content: Between 6% and 12% on delivery and in
storage.
3. Protection: Protect from damage through exposure, dampness
and handling while in transit and storage.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Conditioning wood:
a. Condition wood in location for installation to average
prevailing humidity of location before installing.
b. Place for installation: For interior installations, meet
same temperature and humidity requirements as required
per 01513-D for casework.
2. Allowable tolerances:
a. Doors with warp or twist: 1/4" , maximum, from true
plane.
b. Other tolerances: Unobjectionable deviations from
dimensions shown.
3. Protection: Take positive measures to keep work to receive
transparent and semi-transparent finish clean and free of skin
oil.
06200-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Wood:
a: Grade and species: As shown and where not shown as
specified in Sections 06201, Wood Trim; and 06220,
Millwork.
2. Fastenings: Wood plugs for fastenings in concrete and/or
masonry not permitted.
a. Nails: In general, provide steel nails with diamond
point for softwoods and blunt point for hardwoods.
b. Screws: Screws exposed-to-view, weather or dampness:
Brass where item secured is brass and, unless otherwise
noted, stainless steel at all other locations requiring
exposed screws.
C. Concrete anchors: Rawl Products "Rawlplugs" , minimum 1"
long, #9005 for #6 screws.
�-12
tirw
06200-02
d. Glue: Waterproof adhesive (Phenol, resorcinol or
ibw melamine base) meeting requirements of CS 253-63 for
"Wet-Use" or ASTM, unless otherwise specified in Section
06220.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Field Dimensions: Take such field dimensions as required.
Report any major discrepancy between drawings and field
L. dimensions to Architect.
2. Cut moldings, wood door and window frames, trims and stops
clean, sharply defined. Ease edges to approximately 1/16"
iW radius where edges are painted, varnished or stained.
3. Machine sand all flat work.
4. Finish and assemble millwork and finish trim at mill properly
equipped and experienced in type of work required.
5. All glued work assembled under uniformly distributed pressure
of minimum of 100 psi for softwood and 200 psi for hardwoods
y until glue has cured to glue manufacturer's requirements.
kw 6. Protective treatment: Treat in mill items specified treated
by complete immersion for three minutes (30 seconds for veneer
products) .
rr
rw.
06200-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION: Allow painters time to stain and prime paint work
required to be stained and primed per Section 09900, Painting, and
allow time for stain and primer to dry before installation.
Immediately after doors are fitted for hardware and before
attaching hardware to doors, allow painter to seal entire wood
60 portions of door with two coats of finish.
B. INSTALLATION:
Yrr 1. Set all wood finish straight, plumb or level, in true
alignment, closely fitted and rigidly fastened in place.
Countersink heads of exposed fastenings for face putty.
Conceal other fastenings where possible.
2. Make flush Joints carefully and leave smooth and even. Remove
sharp external corners. Fit all Joints not flush on face by
dressing off back. No face planing, excessive or cross grain
%W sanding permitted. Clean up after installation with fine
sandpaper and steel wool.
3. Doors and wood frames: Install per NWMA Standard Door
Guarantee requirements and in accurate location, plumb and
level. Fit doors to frames with following clearances: Top
and lock edge 3/32", hinge edge 1/16", bottom 3/16" unless
greater clearance is shown on "Door Schedule" for undercut
doors. These clearances are after finishes are applied,
yi
06200-03
including carpet. Bevel lock and hinge edges approximately .
1/8" in 2" . Clearance for transoms at top and sides of
1/16" . Machine doors for hardware to same clearance
tolerances specified in 08210-02-B6-b, Premachining.
4. Finish hardware: Install hardware listed in Hardware Schedule
and required to complete project. Set door hinges flush with
edge surface and in a straight line. Drill and tap hollow
metal doors for exit devices after doors are hung. Leave all
hardware clean, securely fastened and in perfect working
order. Fill under exterior door thresholds, except thresholds
at aluminum doors, with full bed of sealant. Remove hardware,
with the exception of prime coated hardware items, tag, box
and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. See
08100-03 for additional requirements.
5. Cutouts: By carpenters only in finish carpentry items.
C. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
1. Hardware: Make adjustments to finish hardware, when required,
during one-year guarantee period. See Section 08710 for ,
replacements for defective hardware.
2. Leave work clean, free from warp, twist and disfigurement,
within allowable tolerances.
MILLWORK SECTION 06220
06220-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide millwork as shown, as specified below, and as
specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Work noted in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
b. Furnishing brackets for mounting wood chair-rails and
handrails in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications.
3. Following items of millwork are work of this section and are
listed as a check list for Contractor's aid. List is by no
means represented as complete. Final responsibility for
providing all required items rests with General Contractor.
a. 2"x 8"Oak Chair Rail at window openinqs.
b. 1"x 4"Oak Base (See room finisil schedule) .
.n
�. i4
L.
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
COLORLESS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07171
07171-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide colorless dampproofing on all interior and exterior
unit masonry.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Cleaning and patching masonry in Section 04001, General
Masonry Requirements.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Thoro System Products or equal.
2 . Qualifications of applicator: Minimum two years experience in
comparable size projects.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit manufacturer's literature, specifications, equipment and
safety recommendations and application instructions.
2 . Submit per 01341, Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked
with manufacturer's name, brand name and type of material.
r.+ 2 . Clearly mark percentage of acrylic resin and other solids on
label of each container.
3 . Store materials in area where temperatures are not less than 50
degrees F. or over 85 degrees F. , unless otherwise authorized by
manufacturer.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements:
a. Do not proceed with application of materials when ambient
temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
W b. Do not apply water repellent in rainy conditions or within
7 days after surfaces become wet from rainfall or other
moisture.
c. Do not apply materials when low temperature of 40 degrees F.
or less is predicted within a period of 24 hours after
application.
` d. Provide ventilation or forced air circulation during and
after interior application until all fumes are no longer
evident.
2 . Application equipment:
a. Apply with power driven low pressure (less than 20 psi) air-
less coarse nozzle spray.
b. Do not use equipment with rubber hose, as solvent reacts with
some hose materials, causing discolorations in dampproofing
6' material.
{1rr
(lir
3 . Protection: 07171-01
a. Protect surfaces of materials not to receive colorless damp-
proofing by positive means. Allow no spillage and overspray
on surfaces not specified colorless dampproofed. Replace
items from which colorless dampproofing cannot be removed to
satisfaction of Architect which are not specified to receive
colorless dampproofing.
b. Follow all manufacturer recommended precautionary and safety
measures.
4 . Sequencing: All sealant work per Section 07900, Sealants,
completed before work of this section.
07171-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Thoroclear 777 manufactured by Standard Drywall Products, Inc.
or equal.
B. MIXES:
1. Do not dilute or alter material as packaged.
2 . Agitate per label directions. Keep cover on container when
removal not necessary.
07171-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine surfaces to receive water repellent treatment to assure
conditions are satisfactory for application of materials.
2 . See sections for substrate materials for cleaning in preparation
for colorless dampproofing.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Clean off foreign matter and efflorescence with stiff, dry,
non-metallic bristle brush.
2 . Use no acid for cleaning substrates.
3 . If, under work of other sections, removing dust and dirt was
done with water or detergent solution in water, allow 5 days
drying time in dry weather and relative humidity above 50o and
at least 3 days in dry weather and more favorable drying condi-
tions, unless lower moisture content of material to receive
colorless dampproofing is required by material manufacturer.
C. APPLICATION:
This is a clear, silicone, water repellent which provides invisible
protection for above grade application where masonry is to be left
exposed and unpainted. It meets U.S. Federal Specifications
SS-W-110 b (GSA-FSS) and Canadian Specifications 58-GP-1.
Surfaces to be coated shall be clean, free of stains and efflores-
cence, thoroughly dry, sound and in good repair. Tuckpoint any ,
loose or defective joints. Caulk joints where required. Apply
two coats completely flooding entire masonry surface with Thoro-
?-2
07171-03
clear 777 so there is a run down of 6-12 inches. Low pressure
spray applications are preferred, but brushing is acceptable. Do
not use high pressure spray. Allow 24 hours between coats.
W Thoroclear 777 shall not be applied on surfaces which have been
wet or rained upon during the 4 preceding days or if rain is
anticipated within 2 hours after application. If walls cannot be
thoroughly dried out and dampproofing is deemed necessary, allow
4 days for surface drying and apply first coat. Apply second coat
when wall thoroughly dries.
iw D. COVERAGE
Thoroclear 777 should be applied in 2 coats with total coverage at
60-80 square feet per gallon.
E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
I. Spray test: After water repellents have dried, spray coat sur-
faces with water.
ow 2. Recoat surfaces that show water absorption.
FLEXIBLE BLANKET INSTALLATION
SECTION 07210
07210-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
I. Provide flexible blanket insulation in all roof framing, except
exterior breezeways.
im 2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing mineral wool insulations used for firesto
Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing. PPing in
b. Providing mechanical work insulation in Division 15,
W Mechanical.
3 . Definition: R-value designations is thermal resistance of
i insulation only, not including alleged air spaces or other
factors assumed to result in higher R-values.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
I. Requirements of regulatory agencies: Meet U.L. hazard classifi-
cations (fire) thus:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less per ASTM E-84 .
b. Fuel contribution : 15 or less.
iAW c. Smoke developed: 30 or less.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY & STORAGE:
I. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original
6" acka
packaging.
2. Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable
standard and R-value.
3. Store materials off ground.
4 . Protect against weather, condensation and damage.
5. Immediately remove damaged material from site.
4r.
-7-3
;A
07210-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Blanket insulation: Owens Corning "Fiberglas" , or U.S. Gypsum
"Thermafiber", Standard Building Insulation in rolls with
asphalted Kraft vapor barrier having permeance of not over one
perm and 1" face nailing flanges for nailing.
a. Widths: As required by framing to fill spaces between
framing members.
b. Minimum "R" values of insulation only.
(1) Above ceilings: R-30.
2 . Insulation anchorage: Staples, flattened, galvanized. Crown:
7/16" . Shank: 1/211 .
3. Fiberglas insulation required on interior walls of all baths
and mechanical rooms. (bat insul . R-11) 07210-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine areas to receive flexible blanket insulation to insure
protection against inclement weather and other hazards and
determine that work of preceding trades is completed
2 . Examine space allocated for insulation for proper depth to
receive material .
3 . Proceed with installation when conditions are satisfactory.
B. PREPARATION: Remove or protect against projections in construction
framing that may damage or prevent proper installation.
C. INSTALLATION:
1. General:
a. Fit insulation snugly between framing.
b. Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be
insulated.
c. Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members.
d. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduits and
other obstructions.
2 . Faced insulation:
a. Staple facing flanges to sides of wood framing at 8" centers,
or closer as necessary to hold flanges tightly to framing
members.
b. Exercise care to insure integral vapor barrier is continuous
over entire surface.
c. Patch and seal punctures, tears or voids integral vapor
barrier.
d. Install faced insulation with integral vapor barrier toward
warm-in-winter side of assembly.
D. PATCHING:
1. Patch damaged vapor barrier with undamaged piece of vapor
barrier place over damaged area to overlap undamaged portions of
vapor barrier minimum of 8" .
2 . Secure patch with adhesive acceptable to Architect.
E. CLEAN-UP: Remove accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, excess
insulation materials and containers. Dispose of waste materials
off site.
7-4
METAL ROOFING SECTION 07400
07400-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide standing seam metal roofing system over plywood
sheathing. ( Show sample to owner Prior topurchase) .
2. Related work in other sections include:
a. Metal gutters, and flashings in Section 07600, Sheet Metal
rrr
Work.
b. Metal soffit system in Section 07500, Metal Soffits.
c. Manufacturer: ASC Pacific, Inc. or approved equal.
d. Klip Rib system: 24 gauge, 16" coverage, polyvinylidene
finish (PVF2) . Color: Weathered Copper. Provide and
install flashing and matching flat sheets, as required.
If required, obtain panel lengths greater than 40 feet
to eliminate endlaps.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
I. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5e ears
equivalent projects. Y experience on
2. Qualifications of installer: Minimum of 3 years experience on
equivalent projects.
rrr
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop drawings - Submit complete details including vented hori-
zontal and hip ridges, interface with continuous gutter system
and fascia and barge cover flashing.
2. Manufactures instructions for installation of gutter and trim
supplied by others. 30# tarpaper must be installed on top of
Plywood.
D. GUARANTEE:
1. Guarantee in writing, for materials and workmanship for water-
tight installation for a period of 2 years after final accep-
tance, and to repair any leaks at no cost to the Owner.
2. Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer covering color fade,
chalking, rust, and film integrity per terms stated in
Manufacturer's Warranty.
3. Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout.
07400-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
I. Roof panels - 24 gage roll formed, Grade C steel - ASTM A-446 w/
zinc alum alloy coating conforming to ASTM A-792.
2. Surface coating - factory applied, baked-on,
Polyvinylidene Fluoride PVF2 with 20y ear warranty.
3. Hold-down clips - manufacturer's concealed, stainless steel
hold-down clips.
E 4. Fastenings - wood grip screws or ring shank nails at 1
Roof sheathing ' naplywood.
per manufacturer's specification.
B. FABRICATION:
„ 1. Lines and edges sharp and true.
2. Surfaces free of waves and buckles.
3. Shop formed corners, flashings, closures, etc.
7-5
07400-02
4. Makeproper ro er allowances for thermal movement. seams.
5. Fabricate materials for continuous runs with no horizontal
6 . Exposed air vents shall be installed on west roof of admin.
bldg. and south roof of main. bldg. 07400-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Verify that plywood surface to receive metal roof system is
clean and true and free of buckles.
2. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.
B. INSTALLATION:
1. Per manufacturer's recommendations and directions.
2. Install continuous gutters, metal soffit, flashings, and vent
penetrations in coordination with roofing application.
3. Bed overlapping metal to metal thermal movement joints in seal-
ant as specified by manufacturer.
C. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Leave work clean, free of dents and objectionable blemishes.
2. Remove excess material from jobsite.
METAL SOFFIT SECTION 07500
07500-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION: panels with concealed
1. Provide continuous, flat interlocking p
fastners.
2. Related work in other sections include:
a. Metal gutters and flashings in Section 07600, Sheet Metal
Work.
b. Metal Roofing in Section 07400.
3. Manufacturer: ASC Pacific, Inc. or approved equal.
4 . PS (R-1) -12, 24 gauge, 12" modules, smooth and perforated (for
ventilation) in 12" widths. Color: white.
5. Vertical soffit ends: Smooth, non-perforated panels. Install r
flashing and (roof) matching (Weathered Copper) flat sheets.
6. Install soffit panels perpendicular to walls with liner caps at
wall and fascia. 2x4 blocking at wall and fascia and center ry
span is required for fastening. (Fastening spacing not to
exceed 3' 0" ) .
7 . Soffit at breezeways (between beams or beams in wall) is same
as para 4 above, with no perforations - perpendicular to walls.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5 years experience on
equivalent projects.
2. Qualifications of installer: Minimum of 3 years experience on
equivalent projects.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit complete details including layout of joints, mitered
corners and joint trim for architects approval.
2. Manufacturers instructions for installation of gutters and trim
supplied by others.
7-6
07500-01
D. GUARANTEE:
1. Guarantee in writing, for materials and workmanship for water-
tight installation for a period of 2 years after final accep-
tance, and to repair any leaks at no cost to the Owner.
%W 2. Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer covering color fade,
chalking, rust, and film integrity per terms stated in
manufacturer's warranty.
3. Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout.
07500-02
A. MATERIALS:
or er
1. Soffit Panels - 24 gage roll formed, Grade A/ steel - ASTM A-446
w/ zinc alum alloy coating conforming to ASTM A-792 .
2 . Surface Coating - factory applied, baked-on, smooth finish,
polyvinylidene fluoride PVF2 with 20 year warranty.
3. Fastenings - concealed wood grip screws into 2" non-roof framing
at 24" o.c. per manufacturer's directions.
4. Soffit panels: install perpendicular to eave.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Lines and edges sharp and true.
2. Surfaces free of waves and buckles.
3 . Shop formed, corners, flashings, closures, etc.
4 . Make proper allowances for thermal movement.
+ 5. Fabricate materials for runs as long as possible, with horizon-
tal seams in accordance with approved shop drawing layout.
07050 -03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Verify that wood framing members at 2'-0"
true. o.c. are level and
2 . Verify that blocking and nailer installation as required is
complete.
r.► 3 . Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.
B. INSTALLATION:
1. Per manufacturer's recommendations and directions.
2. Install continuous gutters, metal soffit, flashings, and vent
penetrations in coordination with soffit application.
' "
3. Bed overlapping metal to metal thermal movement joints in
sealant as specified by manufacturer.
C. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
iW 1. Leave work clean, free of dents and objectionable blemishes.
2 . Remove excess material from jobsite.
rr
r.
r. 7-7
}
SHEET METAL WORK SECTION 07600 .
(GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS & FLASHING)
07600-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide pre-painted galvanized steel sheet metal work fabricated
from flat rolled sheet or strips of 24 gage metal as shown for
roof flashings, counterflashings, gutters and gutter outlet
tubes.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing wood nailers for securing sheet metal work, Section
06110, Framing & Sheathing.
b. Providing flashing of pipes and ducts passing through roofs,
and piping from roof drains in Division 15, Mechanical.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of 5 years experience on
equivalent projects.
2 . Erector qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience on
equivalent projects.
C. JOB CONDITIONS: Deliver work to be embedded in roofing to jobsite
at start of roofer's work.
D. GUARANTEE:
1. Guarantee, in writing, material and workmanship of all parts of
building made watertight at sheet metal work for period of two
years after final acceptance with normal usage, and to repair
any such leaks as may occur without cost to Owner.
2 . Provide 20 year guarantee from manufacturer for pre-painted
flashings covering color fade, chalking and film integrity per
terms stated in "Warranty" .
3 . Submit guarantee per Section 01700, Project Closeout.
07600-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Galvanized steel:
a. Pre-painted sheets: 24 gage "ColorKlad" as manufactured by
Vincent Brass & Aluminum Co. For local distrributoor call
r selected
Eagle Metal, Inc. of Oregon (288-6861) .
by Architect from 8 standard colors. (Owner to approve) .
b. Un-painted sheet: Steel coated with minimum of 0.80 oz . zinc
per square foot, meeting requirements for G90 coating per
ASTM A525. Gage, unless otherwise shown: Hold-down cleats
of 16 gage.
2 . Solder: Best commercial quality, 50-50 tin and lead or
approved.
3 . Wire basket strainers: 0.054" diameter wire in type 400 series
stainless steel.
4 . Fastenings:
7-0
07600-02
„ a. Nails: Ring shank or drive screw type with large head and
length to penetrate wood 111, minimum. Exposed nails with
galvanized steel washers backing neoprene washers. Gal-
vanized for G.I. work, unless otherwise noted.
low b. Screws: Pan head Teks/2 , No. 8-18 x length required to
penetrate into wood 1” and thru metal 3/811, unless other
size and type shown. Furnish with neoprene sealing washer at
i. exposed weather locations. Galvanized finish. Teks "Twin
Seal" type washer where screw head exposed to weather.
5. Sealant: One part acrylic polymeric. Tremco "Mono" or Pecora
1160 + Unicrylic", or Glidden "Maccolastic" . Color to closely
match abutting finished surface.
6. Paints:
a. Primer: Rodda Paint Co. No. 2913 "Zinc Dust Primer" or SSPC-
Paint 5-64T.
b. Finish enamel paint to match roof color exactly.
B. FABRICATION:
1. General:
a. Lines and edges sharp and true.
b. Surfaces free of waves and buckles.
c. Surfaces cleaned per SSPC-SP 1-63 .
d. Shop prime all un-painted galvanized metal one coat, except
surfaces to receive silicone sealant and field applied
solder.
e. Corners for flashings, coping caps and roofing stops: Shop
form corner units for structure corners. Form to extend at
least 1' each side of structure corner.
f. Hem free edges to produce columnar rigidity.
g. Make proper allowances for thermal movement of sheet metal
and for movement between sheet metal and other building
elements.
h. Fabricate materials for runs in longest practical lengths,
unless other lengths are shown. Gutters to be continuous
(unseamed) .
i. Extend downspout eave tubes 6" below gutter, unless otherwise
shown.
2 . Prefinished material:
a. Cut, form, nail, solder and rivet using conventional hand and
power tools.
b. Where soldering is required, mechanically remove coating only
bw to extent necessary for sound joint. Use minimum of heat,
protecting finish beyond joint area from heat which damages
paint finish.
c. Keep cutting edges of tools, sharp, clean, properly dressed
and closely aligned.
d. Fabricate with strippable film in place, except at areas of
lapped joints.
e. Touch-up painting: After fabrication but before installa-
tion, thoroughly clean sheet metal to remove all traces of
grease, oil, dirt or other surface contaminants. Paint
iW
7-9
07600-02 ,
,31
surfaces of prefinished steel where coating was removed for
soldering 3 coats.
(1) First coat: Specified primer.
(2) Second and third coats: Specified touch-up paint.
07600-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Verify that work to receive sheet metal is in condition to
receive sheet metal; wood and other anchorage items to receive
sheet metal work are securely anchored, correctly located, and
in proper alignment; surfaces are dry, free of frost and protru-
sions interfering with sheet metal installations; preceding
work is free of conditions that will adversely affect
permanence.
2 . Assure that treatments and coatings required on prior work are
completed and have dried.
3 . Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Coat concealed portions of sheet metal with bitumen or separate
with building paper where electrolysis may occur. Use acrylic
sealant at exposed-to-view locations for electrolysis control.
2 . Install hold-down cleats where required.
C. INSTALLATION:
1. General:
a. Make exterior work as permanently weathertight as best prac-
tices permit.
b. Install proprietary materials per manufacturer's printed
directions and recommendations.
c. Install sheet metal work embedded in metal roofing in coordi-
nation with roofing application.
d. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
e. Wherever possible, prime paint field soldered joints after
soldering.
f. Neutralize acid fluxed soldered joints with sodium bicarbo-
nate and wash clean with water, allow to dry before priming.
g. Bed overlapping metal-to-metal thermal movement joints in
full bed of sealant over entire lapped surfaces. Minimum lap
311, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2 . Joints:
a. Stagger joints horizontally in flashings 6" minimum where
runoff from sheet metal above has joint.
b. Use rivets, where practical to reinforce joints. Solder
rivets weathertight. Tin soldered joints 1/211 , minimum,
beyond laps.
3 . Counterflashings:
a. Vertical joints lapped, corners with closed miters.
b. Width to overlap base flashings 4" minimum, unless otherwise
shown.
7-10
07600-03
4. Fastenings:
a. Gutters: Secure as shown and as required for permanent
installation, allowing for thermal movement. Surround
building side of gutter with "Combination Sheet" . Kraft
side toward gutter.
5. Install basket strainer at each downspout outlet from gutter.
6. Install all work with proper allowances for thermal movement of
n work and substrate. In general, allow for 160 degrees F. over-
all temperature range.
7. Field painting: Field paint field soldered joints same as
specified for shop painted joints. Field paint fastenings heads
and accessible surfaces of installed pre-painted sheet metal
with touch-up paint.
D. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Leave work clean, free of stains and foreign matter, watertight
and free of objectionable blemishes.
2 . Remove excess material and debris from jobsite.
�r
lrr
j 7-11
SEALANTS SECTION 07900
07900-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide sealant caulking at all locations shown, except those
locations noted in 112" below. Provide sealant caulking between
all wall mounted plumbing fixtures, both surface and recess
mounted, and abutting finishes and between masonry units and
electrical finish plates at electrical boxes.
2 . Related work in other sections include:
a. Providing sealant bedding for thresholds in Section 06200,
Finish Carpentry.
b. Providing sealant work for:
(1) Sheet metal work per Section 07600, Flashing & Sheet
Metal.
(2) Concealed joints within and concealed by aluminum windows
per Section 08520.
(3) Installation of glass per Section 08800, Glass & Glazing.
c. Providing sealant work for making weathertight mechanical and
electrical installations where opening requiring sealant work
is not shown on architectural drawings in Division 15, and
Division 16, Electrical.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified sealant manufacturers:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Dow Corning Corp.
2. Qualifications of applicator: Minimum of 3 years experience on
equivalent projects.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit manufacturer's instructions per 01341, Manufacturer's
Instructions.
2 . Warranty: Submit silicone rubber sealant manufacturer's
standard warranty on applied material. Indicate date on which
warranty expires. Submit per guarantee requirements of Section
01700, Project Closeout.
"F
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver packaged material in manufacturer's original, unopened
containers bearing date of manufacture and brand name of
manufacturer.
2 . Store packaged material in the dry and at temperatures between
40 and 90 degrees F.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Existing conditions: Allowable deviation in joint width dimen-
sion in preceding work requiring caulking from width shown:
a. Between concrete elements: 50% greater and 50% less.
b. Between concrete and metal or masonry elements: 25% greater
and 25% less.
c. Between metal elements: 25% greater and 25% less.
1-12
iW
07900-01
,. 2 . Environmental requirements:
a. Ambient temperature in area of joint work: Above 40 degrees
F. from two hours before any sealant work is done and during
time of application of sealants.
' b. Surfaces to receive sealant: Dry, frost-free.
3 . Protection of surfaces not to receive sealant:
a. Allow no primer for sealant to contact exposed-to-view sur-
faces more that 1/4" from location to receive sealant.
b. Allow no sealant to contact exposed-to-view surfaces more
than 1/8" from location shown at recessed joints and more
that 1/16" at flush joints.
4 . Sequencing: Complete sealant work before colorless damp-
proofing, glaze coating and jobsite painting of sealant abutting
surfaces.
07900-02 PRODUCTS
i`. A. MATERIALS:
1. Sealants:
a. Type: Silicone rubber, exterior type at exterior and interi-
or, one-part, except only G.E. 1700 or Dow Corning 785
(nonporous surfaces) at plumbing fixtures.
b. Brand names, product series numbers and colors.
(1) G.E. SCS01300.
(2) G.E. Silpruf.
(3) Dow-Corning 790.
(4) Dow-Corning 780.
6w 2 . Primer: Per sealant manufacturer's latest recommendation for
securing maximum bond.
3 . Back-up filler: Polyethylene foam sealant backer. Dow
"Ethafoam SB" rod or P.R.C. "Minicel" of size to have in-place
compressed width across joint of between 60% and 75% or
original diameter.
4 . Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene film tape with one adhesive
w face.
07900-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine surfaces to receive sealant to assure that they are
fully installed, cured, patched and cleaned as required by work
%P of sections relating to that material.
2 . Check joint widths for conformance with acceptable tolerances.
3 . Assure that sealant substrates are dry and free from conditions
iw that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of
work.
4 . Proceed only when conditions are satisfactory.
B. PREPARATION: Within 24 hours of sealant application perform
following:
1. Wash concrete and masonry to remove soluble alkaline salts.
1-19
07900-03
2 . Remove all loose friable particles on concrete and masonry with
wire brush.
3 . Remove dust and loose dirt by blowing out joints with compressed
air which is free of oil and moisture or by vacuum cleaning.
4 . Wipe metal with oil-free solvent on solvent soaked clean cloth.
5. Apply bond breaker tape to back of finish plates at electrical
outlets and switches in slump block where sealant contacts
plate.
C. INSTALLATION:
1. Where sealant manufacturer recommends priming or indicates
maximum adhesion developed if primer is used, apply primer per
sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Prime only those
surface areas to receive sealant.
2 . Install backer rod with plain faced roller, without stretching
rod longitudinally and without puncturing surface skin on rod.
Compress backer to between 60% and 75% of original diameter.
Recess backer at concrete and masonry joints to maintain exposed
face of sealant 1/4" back of beginning of parallel sides of
joint. See details. Depth of sealant at thinnest point half
width of joint for joints over 1/4" wide up to 3/4" wide.
Joints 3/4" wide and wider with 3/8" depth of sealant at thin-
nest point. For joints 1/4" wide and under, depth of sealant
1/811. Back rod not required at plumbing fixtures and electrical
finish plates.
3 . Apply sealant under continuous pressure with pressure type
equipment. Fill joints solid without voids. Remove excess
sealant material and leave joint and adjacent materials neat,
and clean, with solvent tooled flat faced sealant joint.
D. CLEANING UP:
1. Remove excess sealant from non-pourous surfaces while sealant is
still uncured, using solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer
which will not damage surfaces.
2 . On porous surfaces, allow excess sealant to cure, then remove by
abrasion or other mechanical means which will do no damage to
these surfaces.
3 . Remove tools, equipment and surplus materials from each area as
work is completed.
4 . Upon completion of work of this section, clean up rubbish and
remove from site.
7-►4
}
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
HOLLOW METAL DOORS & HOLLOW METAL FRAMES SECTION 08100
08100-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish following hollow metal work as shown and indicated by
symbols. Symbol "HM" for non-fire rate assemblies and Symbol
"HMU" for fire rate assemblies. Furnish steel doors, mullions,
sidelight frames, relite frames, exterior wall louver subframe
and door frames. See drawings, "Door Schedule", and details
for sizes, arrangements, styles and locations.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Installation of frame anchors embedded in masonry and relite
frames fully surrounded by masonry in Section 04001, General
Masonry Requirements.
b. Installation of hollow metal door and relite frames, Section
06110, Framing & Sheathing, except relite frames fully
surrounded by masonry.
w+• c. Installation of hollow metal doors and hardware on doors and
frames in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
d. Providing aluminum doors and frames in Section 08120.
e. Providing coiling doors in Section 08330.
f. Furnishing hardware in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
g. Providing glass and glazing in Section 08800.
h. Providing finish paint coats over primer in Section 09900,
Painting.
J B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturers: Grand Metal Products, Curries Mfg. Co.
Corp. or approved equal.
2 . Requirements of regulatory agencies: Provide U.L. labeled
hollow metal doors where indicated on "Door Schedule" . Provide
"Fire Class" doors with U.L. labeled hollow metal frames.
Provide doors with U.L. rating indicated on schedule, and
provide both doors and frames with required labels. Modify
Architect's specifications and details, if required, to secure
labels.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Delivery:
a. Pad doors to prevent contact with anything but padding.
b. Deliver frames fully assembled and with spreaders to assure
alignment.
i 2 . Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent
damage and deterioration.
3. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1" or
1'
more off ground or floor and at least 1/2" between individual
kw pieces.
4 . Follow special storage and handling requirements of
manufacturer.
"r
r.
6-1
08100-01
D. JOB CONDITIONS: Hardware: Arrange attachments for hardware as
follows: Hardware supplier will supply door manufacturer with
correct and complete templates for all items installed at jobsite.
08100-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: F
1. Steel:
a. Sheet steel: Prime grade, cold rolled, stretcher leveled,
full pickled by treatment at mill; free from scale, warp and
buckles. Sheet steel of United States standard gages noted
in these specifications.
b. Hardware reinforcement steel: Per ASTM standards.
2 . Primers and surfacers:
a. For frames: Rodda Paint Co. , Synthetic Rust Inhibitive Metal
Primer - Oxide Red, or Fuller Paint Co. , or approved equal .
b. For doors: Rodda (Grey) Synthetic Primer and Surfacer or
Fullers, or approved.
3 . Glass stops: 18 gage furniture stock steel.
4 . Shims: Galvanized steel of size and thickness to fully distri-
bute loads without distortion.
5. Fastenings:
a. For glass stops: Cadmium plated screws with oval head, sheet
metal threads. J,
b. Sizes: As required for rigid installation. Not less than
3/8" diameter bolt for fastenings into concrete.
6. Wall louvers: Provide 2 adjustable 32" x 54" air louvers ("Z"
blades) w/bronze fly screen 1 ft. above finished floor. (RM 2104,
a. Manufacturer: Grand Metal Products, Portland, Oregon.
b. Model No. 1100.
c. Color: Dark Brown:
7 . Hardware Reinforcements: Hinge, door closer and exit device
reinforcement 3/16" steel. Latch tapping plates 3/16" x l 1/4"
x 4" long, minimum.
8 . Sealant: Tremco Mfg. Co. "Mono" , 1 part acrylic, tan color.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Hollow metal doors: 1 3/4" thick flush type hollow metal doors
of size indicated on Door Schedule; steel not less than 18 gage
for face sheets, internal reinforcing channel stiffeners, etc.
Hinge, door closer and exit device reinforcement 3/16" x 1 1/2"
x 10" flat bar steel. Pan form door face sheets to meet in
center of door edges. Install internal bracing channels around
entire pan perimeter and full height of door, space not over
6" o.c. , spot welded not less than 4" o.c. Install sound
deadening fireproof insulation between vertical stiffeners full
height and width. Weld edges of doors full length and grind
flush. Weld into top edge of exterior doors continuous channel
cap, set with web of channel approximately 1/16" below door top.
Seal all channel web perimeters to face pans with specified
�r>
Af
8
na
bw
08100-02
sealant. Bevel doors 1/8" in 2" at latch stile. Fit doors to
3/32" clearance in frames, 3/8" over finished floors, including
carpeted floors, and 3/16" over thresholds, unless other
clearances at threshold is required by threshold hardware or
drawings indicate greater clearance.
2 . Frame fabrication:
a. Hollow metal door, and louver subframe: Frames, integral,
of 16 gage steel. Wall ties of steel in gages and design
per UL requirements where Fire Class doors occur. Furnish
ties for frame installation in masonry adjustable for
r position on jamb, one tie for each 16" of jamb length.
Furnish floor anchor clips, Phillips "Red Head" type con-
crete anchors, bolts and other items shown or required.
Make corners and rises sharp and 'clean cut, miter all frame
corners, fit miters to within 0.025" of closed, fully weld
trim face joints and tack weld joint at rabbets and stop on
interior side of frame to maintain joint alignment. Grind
exposed-to-view joints to produce invisible joint. Seal
unwelded portions of joints on interior of frame at frames
for exterior locations and frames in masonry walls with
specified sealant or by welding fully across interior depth
of frame to watertight condition. Hinge reinforcement:
Full depth of jamb x 10" long x 3/16" thick with four spot
welds at each point of contact. Furnish stops for glass
mounted in sidelights. Provide drip cap per detail.
3 . Hardware preparation: Provide reinforcements for both concealed
and surface applied hardware.
a. Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using tem-
plates, except for exit devices which finish carpenters drill
and tap after doors are hung.
b. Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to
develop full strength of reinforcements per details.
c. Prime coat painting: After completion of fabrication,
thoroughly degrease, clean and bonderize work by steam
chemical process. Give external surfaces of doors 2 coats,
minimum, of primer surfacer. Sand first coat(s) on doors so
visible surfaces are free of spots or depressions and final
*A coat of primed work presents flat, smooth appearance.
08100-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION: Per Sections 06110 and 06200 and thus:
1. All shimming of steel frames by use of specified steel shims.
Place shims to give full bearing under connectors and select
shim size to prevent warping of frame and to make permanently
rigid installation. Shims concealed by minimum of 1/2" covering
by abutting finish.
2 . Hollow metal doors projecting beyond frame when door is closed
will be rejected.
(ir
bw 8 3
ALUMINUM DOORS & ALUMINUM FRAMES SECTION 08120
08120-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide entrance doors, door frames, sidelight and transoms
frames of aluminum at locations indicated in "Door Schedules"
by Symbol ALUM.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing sealant compound between exterior frames and abut-
ting materials in Section 07900, Sealants.
b. Furnishing all hardware in Section 08710, Finish Hardware.
c. Installation in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, of hardware
items furnished per Section 08710.
d. Providing glass and glazing in Section 08800, Glass &
Glazing.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturer: Kawneer Architectural Products, Fentron
Industries, U. S. Aluminum or equal.
2 . Erector qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience on
comparable projects.
3 . Allowable tolerances:
a. Members straight to within 1/1500 of length.
b. Openings to receive frames: True in size, shape and in true
plane +/- 1/18".
c. Completed assemblies: Free from twists, bends, and open
joints.
d. Door clearances: As indicated in manufacturer's full size }
details.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit shop drawings to show materials, arrangements, profiles,
thickness, size of sections, size of openings, door clearances,
assembly and erection details, fastenings, anchor locations,
anchors, reinforcement, clearances, weatherstripping, hardware
coordination and necessary connections to work of other trades.
2 . Submit shop drawings per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal
Procedures.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver product in manufacturer's original unopened packages
with labels legible and intact.
2 . Identify packages with manufacturer's brand name, size, finish
and location of installation.
3 . Store unopened packages in protected dry area. Protect from
weather and damage.
4 . Store in designated areas as close as possible to point of
installation in upright position off ground on dunnage.
08120-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Aluminum entrance materials, including doors, door frames,
transom and sidelight frames and threshold:
8-4
�r
08120-02
a. Extruded sections: AX63-52T alloy with physical and mechani-
cal properties equal to 6063-T5 aluminum alloy or 6063-T5
alloy.
b. Glazing stops and beads: Snap-on stops, minimum of 1/16"
thick, with non-stretch, high shore vinyl of bronze color for
both sides of glass. Designed for 1" thick insulating glass.
c. Fastenings: Screws, nuts, bolts and fastening devices
aluminum, stainless steel or other non-corrosive material.
Metallic expansion anchors for anchorage to concrete and
masonry.
d. Framing sections: Manufacturer's specifications, including
pile weather-stripping in frame head, both jambs and mullion.
e. Finish: Color anodized, "Dark Bronze".
2 . Sealant:
a. For threshold: One-part polysulfide base (Thiokol) with
manufacturer's recommended primers.
b. For concealed joints: G.E. "Silglaze".
+► 3. Bituminous paint: ASTM standards.
4. Finish hardware:
a. RIXON 28 door closers on doors 1 and 2; RIXON 30 on door 3.
ef , b. 7" wide bronze thresholds.
c. TICE Industries No. 33 bronze back to back push bars.
d. ARMS 3-point lock T-turn and indicator with sign posted
over exterior doors reading "This door must remain unlocked
during business hours" in letters not less than one inch
in height on a contrasting background.
5. All shims aluminum and of dimensions to carry loads without
deforming supported sections.
B. FABRICATION:
i. 1. Provide sections with clean, straight, sharply defined lines,
free from defects impairing strength and durability.
a 2 . Doors: Symmetrical top rails and stiles, completely weather-
, stripped, securely joined and reinforced.
3. Make cutout operations accurately for hardware preparation and
reinforce.
4 . Fit snap-in glazing beads, ready for glazing.
5. Factory preparation so fabricated that field assembly will pro-
duce accurate tightly fitted joints.
6. Fabricate per approved shop drawings and hardware list.
08120-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine openings to receive frames for completeness and accuracy
of preparation called for in other sections.
2 . Assure that surfaces to contact frames are clean, uniform,
' sound, dry, free of irregularities, excessive obstructions or
projections and other unsatisfactory conditions.
3 . Start work when unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Aluminum isolated from concrete and masonry with bituminous
paint, including shims.
2. Put weatherstripping in place and correctly adjust.
8-5
C. ERECTION: 08120-03
1. Erect in accordance with instructions furnished by manufacturer.
2. Set work plumb and true, properly aligned, without warp or rack,
securely anchored, and with proper provisions for thermal
induced movement.
3 . Corner joints sealed with full bead of sealant. Make frames and
doors watertight.
D. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight
when closed.
2. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3. Cleaning: Remove protective materials and excess sealant from
work. Clean aluminum with household soap or detergent and
drinking water.
4 . Remove debris from work site.
WOOD DOORS SECTION 08150 .''
A. DESCRIPTION:
1-3/4" Particle core, 7 ply Oak veneer with matching vertical edges.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Qualified manufacturers - Vancouver Door Company, Western Door Co. , or
approved equal.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1 . Delivery:
a. Pad doors to prevent contact with anything but padding.
b. Deliver frames fully assembled and with spreaders to assure
alignment.
2 . Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent
damage and deterioration.
3. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1" or more
off ground or floor and at least 1/2" between individual pieces.
4. Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.
8-b
OMMMMUMMOMMONOW
1r
COILING DOORS SECTION 08330
08330-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide roll-up doors shown on plans.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing structural steel shapes and other steel shapes
associated with work of this section and not specified below
are in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications.
b. Providing finish painting over door manufacturer's primer in
Section 09900, Painting.
c. Providing field wiring and disconnect switches, Division 16,
Electrical. .
s
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp. , or approved equal.
2. Underwriters Laboratories requirements: Provide UL labeled
roll-up door of "Fire Class" . Required for Type V N
(Sprinklered) building.
C. SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with 01340, Shop
Drawings & Samples. Show supporting construction requirements and
clearances required, method of anchoring, servicing access re-
quirements and other pertinent details as apply to this project.
08330-1 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: The following material and fabrication specifications
are based upon the Overhead Door Corporations - 422 Series, Insulat-
ed steel sectional doors.
1. 9 - 12' x 14' (nominal opening) sectional upward acting doors.
2 . Top and bottom sections - 2" thick (nominal) , 24 gauge. Gal-
vanized steel.
3 . Factory painted both sides (baked on epoxy enamel) . Finish
color selected by Owner.
4 . Glass panels at section - 4'-6' above floor at each door.
5. Tracks: Galvanized, angle mounted for steel vamps. 3"wiDE tgy W/
6. Hinges: Galvanized steel, full floating ball bearing rollers.
7. Optional perimeter seals to prevent air leak.
8. Insulation: Provide manufacturer' s standard polystyrene with
26 gauge backer panel for R- value.
9. Window panes: Provide one row of manufacturer' s standard
porthole windows with insulated DSB glass. (Solar bronze tinted) .
rw
on
8-7
08330-1
10. Electric door operators (9) : Provide model SFL-250 drawbar
openers as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation.
Provide 3/4 HP instant reversing with automatic reset
thermal overload protection. Furnish heavy duty reversing
contactor with both mechanical and electrical interlock
and adjustable rotary type limit switches. Provide
solenoid actuated drum type brake to lock door in any
position.
Furnish electrically operated safety reversing door edge.
Door to reverse to the full open position if obstruction
is sensed.
Provide 3-button station marked "open - close - stop" in
Type 1 enclosure on inside of wall and key actuated switch
mounted on exterior wall. All switches to be keyed alike.
08330-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION:
1. Install per approved shop drawings under supervision of
sales representative of door supplier.
2. Install in perfect alignment, free from warp, twist or
distortion. Lubricate moving parts and adjust door to
operate smoothly, without binding.
88 }
r.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 08520
08520-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide aluminum windows designed for outside glazing at all
exterior window openings in size and arrangement shown. Provide
complete with all required anchors, hardware, accessories and
with preformed gasket between windows and masonry.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing of openings to receive aluminum windows and instal-
ling windows in masonry in Section 04220, Clay Unit Masonry.
b. Providing caulking and sealants between aluminum windows and
openings to receive windows per Section 07900, Sealants.
c. Providing glass and glazing in 08800, Glass & Glazing.
y d. Providing aluminum doors, including transom and side lights
per Section 08120, Aluminum Doors & Aluminum Frames.
B. SUBMITTALS: Indicate alloy of materials, arrangement, profiles of
sections, thickness of members, size of parts, size of openings,
clearance, assembly and erection details, gaskets at perimeter of
sash in masonry, fastenings, fastening locations, anchorage
materials and locations, reinforcement, hardware and finishes of
aluminum and hardware. Submit per requirements of 01340-01, Shop
Drawing Submittal Procedures.
08520-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
aw 1. Aluminum window extrusions.
2 . Window frame, ventilators and muntin sections minimum 1 1/2"
deep, web total thickness, either single or tubular, not less
Yw than 0. 093" (3/32" +/-) and weathering members not less than
0. 095" thick.
y 3 . Glazing beads: Extrusions for rock-in installation at insulated
panels and insulated glass. Square shape extrusions for snap-in
installation, minimum of 0. 050" thick at single glazing.
4 . Weatherstripping Geon vinyl, No. 70 durometer Shore A or equal.
5. Miscellaneous materials such as necessary shims, anchors and
fastenings provided in aluminum alloys or austenitic (non-
magnetic) stainless steel that will not promote corrosion.
6. Sealant compound: General Electric "Silglaze" or Dow Corning
11781" .
7. Sealant tape: Butyl base rubber with 100% solids, non-volatile
material, 1/16" thick, adhesive one side.
8. Neoprene channels: DuPont "Neoprene" . Color: Black.
Adhesive: Recommended by channel manufacturer.
9. Mullions of extruded aluminum of sections shown, except mullion
sections shall have moment of inertia of not less than that
required to have not over length/180 deflection at uniform wind
loading of 15 lbs. per square foot, regardless of mullion
section shown.
8-9
B. FABRICATION: 08520-02
1. Corners of frames coped and mechanically fastened together or
mitered and rigidly welded together. Muntin bars and meeting
rails tenoned and air hammer riveted.
2 . Attach gaskets to sash installedin masonry with adhesive. Miter
corners. Fill bottoms of gasket pockets with adhesive. ,
C. FINISHES: Finish all exposed-to-view aluminum thus:
1. Anodized finishes per requirements of "Aluminum Association
Standards for Anodically Coated Aluminum Alloys for Architec-
tural Applications".
2 . Complete welding, then acid etch before anodic finishing.
3 . Anodic coating: Satin finish producing dark range bronze color.
08520-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION:
1. Examine condition of openings and surfaces to receive windows
for conformance to requirements of other sections. Do not
proceed with installation at openings found unacceptably out of
plumb and level and not acceptably clear of debris and
obstructions. Notify General Contractor of deficiencies.
2 . Window work installed by experienced workmen per window
manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Windows
installed plumb and level.
3 . Windows securely anchored per shop drawings. Anchors as maxi-
mum spacing of 24" o.c. and not more than 6" from each side of
each end of mullions nor more than 6" from each corner of each
window.
r;
4 . Seal weathertight all metal-to-metal joints within window units
and joints between window and aluminum mullions included in this
subcontract with specified sealants applied in accordance with
sealant manufacturer's printed instructions using sealant primer
when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply sealant tape
where wood trim is shown abutting exterior sash leg.
5. At time of installation, remove all excess sealants and all
dirt, damage, or disfiguration resulting from work. Leave all
aluminum window work clean and free of discoloration. Final
cleaning in Section 01710.
?F
B-10
aw
FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08710
08710-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Furnish for installation per Section 06200, Finish Carpentry,
all finish hardware and related items necessary to complete the
work, unless specifically excepted in this section. If hardware
s for specific locations is not described or indicated in this or
other sections, furnish required hardware same as specified for
similar locations and of no lesser quality.
rr Hardware items for each door are indicated by numerical symbol
in Door Schedule on plans. Numerical symbols on drawings are
keyed to Hardware Schedule in 08710-03.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Angle type thresholds in Section 05500.
t b. Installation of finish hardware furnished per this section
in Section 06200.
c. Prefabricated plastic laminate casework hardware except
cabinet locks, in Section 12310.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualifications:
a. Of manufacturer: Where manufacturer is named in this
section, furnish only that manufacturer's product. Substitu-
tion of unspecified items or makes not permitted without
prior approval of Architect in writing.
b. Of dealer: Hardware furnished only by direct dealer autho-
rized by manufacturer at each item specified.
c. Of supplier: Operate competent recognized "contract"
hardware department.
d. Of representative: Experience, competent person, capable of
assisting in applying and adjusting all items at jobsite and
shops of subcontractors.
o
C. SUBMITTALS:
s 1. Master keys: Deliver directly to Owner, by Registered Mail, all
required master keys. Obtain signed receipt from Owner. Submit
required number of copies to Architect per Section 01700,
Project Closeout. Warning: Unless all master keys are so
delivered and receipted for, all locks must be changed to new
master key system without additional cost to Owner.
2 . Furnish hollow metal and aluminum door and frame manufacturers
with correct and complete templates of items connected with work
of Section 08710, and furnish templates on request of Division
10 suppliers.
3 . Samples: When requested by Architect, submit samples of finish
+rww hardware before ordering or furnishing. Leave samples with
Architect until substantial completion of project.
8-f I
08710-01
4. Hardware schedule: As soon as practical after award of
Contract, but not later than 30 days from that date, submit four
(4) copies of complete Finish Hardware Schedule per Section
01340.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1. Delivery: Deliver hardware to job or, when specified or re-
quested, to subcontractor's shop in time for inspection before
setting.
2 . Packaging: Package separately for each location. Mark and
number each package to indicate location for installation. Key
marking to schedule and indicate on schedule, to accompany each
shipment, all items for each location for installation
3 . Special tools: Furnish General Contractor with two sets of
specified installation tools for use during construction.
08710-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Fastenings: Furnish hardware fastenings for various locations
thus: Exterior fastenings solid bronze or stainless steel to
match specified finish of item fastened.
a. Solid wood core doors: All hardware items with sheet metal
type screws.
b. Gypsum core doors: Door closers and exit devices with six
bolts. All other hardware with sheet metal type screws.
c. Hollow metal doors: Exit devices, closers, butts, push and
pulls with machine screws. Kick plates and weatherstripping
with sheet metal type screws.
d. Door stops and holders:
(1) Exposed-to-view locations: All spanner head:
(a) Sheet metal USA Type AB threads at wood.
(b) Machine screws in tapped holes at steel.
(c) Machine screws with Rawl "Caulk-In" type anchors at
concrete.
(2) Concealed-to-view locations: All Phillips head: Same
as exposed-to-view locations except head.
e. Thresholds: 1/4 - 20, minimum, machine screws, Phillips head
with Rawl "Caulk-In" type anchors.
2 . Hinges:
a. Sizes: Furnish in width as required by swing and trim.
Projection determined by formula: Twice the door thickness
plus trim projection minus 1/211 . Following sizes are length
of hinge joint:
(1) Wood or metal doors up to 24" wide . . 4"
(2) Over 24" and up to 41" wide. . . . . . . 4 1/2"
(3) Over 41" and up to 47" wide. . . . . . . 5" Extra Heavy
(4) Over 47" wide. . . . . . . . 6" Extra Heavy
b. Number required: All regular doors: 1 1/2 pair; any door
over 8' high and any over height UL labeled door: 2 pair.
g-i2
w
08710-02
c. Ball bearing type: Five knuckle, non-rising full floating, stainless
steel pin, flush tip, concealed bearings with full length "Oilite"
bronze lateral bearings. Furnish all hinges on outswinging exterior
doors with Allen head stainless steel set screws in barrel to make
pins non-removable. Groove pins in centerline of top knuckle to re-
ceive set screws. Furnish hinges required in Hardware Schedule.
3. Door closers: Furnish per symbol in Hardware Schedule, interior or ex-
terior type as appropriate, door closers sized per closer manufacturer's
schedule for application involved. Verify conditions.
4. Door silencers, stops and holders:
a. Door silencers: Furnish 3 Glynn-Johnson gray rubber Type for each
regular door.
b. Door stops and holders: Furnish as required. Verify wall and floor
construction and furnish specified type fastenings. Hardware supplier
must assume that due to job conditions some stops or holders will need
to be exchanged for another type.
5. Thresholds: Furnish as required per Hardware Schedule.
6. Finishes:
a. Service Building:
(1) Locksets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
(2) Hinges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
(3) Push and kick plates. . . . . . . . . . . .612
(4) Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
'- (5) Door stops and holders . . . . . . . . . .612
r (6) Door closers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
b. Office Building:
(1) Locksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
W (2) Butts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
(3) Exit devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
(4) Door stops and holders . . . . . . . . . .612
(5) Door closers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
B. KEYING: In general, key thus: See 08710-03 for determination of final key-
ing requirements.
1. Key entire project to new Master Key System.
1�r 2. Key each building sector to different submaster key.
3. Key all rooms in each sector differently.
4. Panel locks: Key all alike. No master keying required.
5. Required keys: Furnish thus:
a. Three (3) change keys for each "keyed different" lock or cylinder.
b. Ten (10) master keys for project.
6. Key and markings: Furnish all keys cut from smooth faced blanks die
marked with 1/8" letters "DO NOT DUPLICATE" on one side and smooth blank
on other side. Furnish all keys in individual envelopes, marked for
identification.
7. Master keying: Master keying accomplished by bonded locksmith. No other
arrangement for master keying permitted.
08710-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION:
1. Verify measurements, backsets, door thickness, sizes for kick plates,
etc.
2. Verification of keying requirements: Visit Owner, explain lock functions
and assist Owner in setting key schedule. Make such modifications to
specified keying schedule as Owner requires, without cost to Owner.
� 813
08710-03 EXECUTION
Secure in writing from Owner approval of final keying schedule before
ordering any locksets or cylinders.
B. INSTALLATION: Installation and adjusting: Have qualified hardware manu-
facturer's representative inspect hardware and assist in installation and
adjustment of all hardware required by work of this section, both at job-
site and subcontractor's shops. Exchange door stops and holders as neces-
sitated by job conditions.
C. HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
1. MATERIALS SPECIFIED: APPROVED EQUAL
Hinges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lawrence. . . . . . . . . . . . .McKinney, Stanley
Locksets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Schlage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
Closers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LCN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
ExitDevices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Von Duprin. . . . . . . . . . .Sargent
Stops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BBW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ives (Quality)
Push Pull & Kickplates. . . . . . . . . .BBW. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .Ives (Quality)
Weatherstrip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pemko. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .National Guard
or Reese
2. HARDWARE GROUPS:
Group 1 (DRS 1, 2, 3) )
2 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .20-001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .613
Group 2 (DR 4)
3 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639
2 Ea Exit Devices. . . . .9927)et. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
2 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .20-021. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 W)
2 Ea Closers. .. . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
2 Ea Kickplates. . . . . . .37 10" x 2" LDW. . . . . . . . . .612
4 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . .
Group 3 (DRS 5, 6)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea 4010 (DR 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . .
Group 4 (DR 7)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . .99jX.8% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . .
1 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
8-14
.r
08710-03 EXECUTION
Group 5 (DRS 23, 24)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Push Plate. . . . . . . .47 4 x 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Pull Plate. . . . . . . .57C 4 x 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4010. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Kickplate. . . . . . . . .37 10 x 2"LDW. . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
Group 6 (DRS 10, 11)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D70PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
y 3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
Group 7 (DRS 12, 13, 14, 27, 31)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4/5 x 4/5 NRP. . . . . . .639
1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . . .99)e/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Cylinder. . . . . . . . . .20-021. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9076X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV - 36 .. . . . . . . . . .ALUM
1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0"
Group 8 (DR 15)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Privacy. . . . . . . . . . .D40S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
*w 1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
wr Group 9 (DRS 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 26, 29,
30, 33, 34, 36, 37, 45, 48)
1. 5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .4181 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
'i," Group 10 (DRS 20, 25, 28, 32, 38)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
i` 1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Floor Stop. . . . . . . .F9076. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
Group 11 (DRS 39, 47)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. : . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Exit Device. . . . . . .99/A--BE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110-CUSH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0"
Ciw
5.15
08710-03 EXECUTION
Group 12 (DRS 40, 41)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5 NRP. . . . . . .639
1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0"
1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV - 36... . . . . . . . . .ALUM
Group 13 (DR 42)
3 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
2 Ea Flushbolts. . . . . . . .458B10B
1 Ea Co-Ord x UL BKTS(2) . . . .648 x Filler. . . . . . . . . . .600
2 Ea Closers. . . . . . . . . . .4110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Set Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 20'
Group 14 (DRS 35, 43, 44)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Lockset. . . . . . . . . . .D50PD-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4010. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Threshold. . . . . . . . .171A x 210AV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ALUM
1 Set W/Strip. . . . . . . . . . .S88D - 17' 0"
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Group 15 (DRS 8, 9)
1.5 Pr Butts. . . . . . . . . . . . .BB4101 4.5 x 4.5. . . . . . . . . . .639
1 Ea Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . .D10S-OLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Closer. . . . . . . . . . . .4041-DEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
1 Ea Armor Plate. . . . . . .37 34 x 2" LDW. . . . . . . . . . . . .612
1 Ea Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . .WC12T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3 Ea Silencers. . . . . . . . .
Group 16 (DR 16)
1 Set Bi-Pass Hardware. .HD526D
4 Ea Flush Pulls. . . . . . .Pulls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Group 17 (DR 46)
1 Ea Pocket Door Frame
1 Ea Pocket Door Pull. .101-613
Group 18 (DR 49)
1 Set Bi-pass Hardware. .HD526D
2 Ea Flush Pulls. . . . . . .2-1/8" diameter. . . . . . . . . . . . .612
D. Hardware suppliers qualified to furnish material:
1. Oregon Washington Contract Hardware, Inc.
2. Chown Hardware Co.
3. Northwest Contract Hardware, Inc.
4. Western Contract Hardware, Inc.
8-Ib
GLASS & GLAZING SECTION 08800
sw 08800-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide all float and sheet glass and glazing throughout pro-
ject, except glass and glazing work excluded per paragraph 112"
below.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Final washing in Section 01710, Cleaning Up & Custodial
Services.
b. Fitting of glass stops and plastic glazing beads throughout
rr. work and furnishings fastenings for glass stops.
c. Priming of steel openings and steel stops to receive glass in
Section 08100, Hollow Metal Doors & Hollow Metal Frames, and
iW priming of wood in Section 09900, Painting.
d. Providing mirrors in Section 10810, Toilet Room Accessories.
3 . Glass schedule:
a. Exterior of Office Building and Service Building: See "b"
below for glass in doors.
(1) All exterior glazing with insulating glass.
(2) All exterior panes of insulating glass: "Bronze tinted"
� . 1/4" thick plate.
(3) All panes of insulating glass at interior side: Clear
glass, 1/4" thick plate.
(4) Panes of glass shown by Symbol TGL: Tempered
bronze tinted glass, tempered as required by code.
b. Relites in interior partitions.
(1) Clear of thickness determined by size of lite per
schedule in 08800-02-A, unless shown tempered (Symbol
TGL) .
„ (2) Panes shown with Symbol TGL: 1/4” thick and tempered.
c. Door lites: See door styles and Door Schedule on drawings.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturers:
a. Glass:
(1) Clear float and sheet:
(a) PPG Industries, INc.
(b) Libby-Owens-Ford
(c) ASG Industries
k„ (d) C-E Glass, Combustion Engineering, Inc.
(2) Tinted plate, float and sheet:
(a) PPG Industries, Inc.
(b) Libby-Owens-Ford
(c) ASG Industries
(3) Wired glass:
(a) C-E Glass "Mississippi"
(b) ASG Industries "NuWeld"
2 . Qualified fabricators:
a. Insulating glass:
(1) PPG Industries "Twindow"
(2) Libby-Owens-Ford "Thermopane"
w.
JW 8-17
08800-01
(3) ASG Industries "Tru-Therm"
(4) Mercer Industries, Inc. "Double Lite"
(5) Temp-Seal, Inc. Northwest r
b. Glass tempering:
(1) PPG Industries, Inc. "Herculite"
(2) Libby-Owens-Ford "Tuf-Flex"
(3) ASG Industries "Tru-Temp:
(4) C-E Glass "Arm-R-Clad"
(5) Pacific Tempered Glass Corp.
(6) American Tempering Co. of Union City, CA. ;
(7) Permaglass "Safeglaze" of Torrence, CA.
3 . Qualified glazers: Minimum of 5 years experience on comparable
projects.
4 . Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Building code: UBC, 1985.
b. Glass in fire class opening assemblies with UL rating: Per
UL requirements.
5. Standards: Unless otherwise specified in this section, provi-
sions of following standard specifications and publications
govern applicable portions of work.
D. PRODUCT HANDLING:
1. Meet most detailed requirements of:
a. "General Conditions Governing Glazing" in "Glazing Manual" of
Flat Glass Marketing Association.
b. PPG Industries "Technical Service Memo" 11-1-70 titled "Care
and Storage of Glass".
2. Glazer to advise General Contractor of care required for protec-
tion of tinted glass to avoid thermal breaks and uneven fade of
tint.
x�
E. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Glaze only when ambient temperature is
above 40 degrees F.
08800-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Glass:
a. Clear glass (Symbol CG) and where type or symbol is not
shown or specified otherwise: Class I (Transparent) .
Thickness Maximum Area Type
Double Strength To 12 sq. ft. II f=
Note: All panes
of insulating
1/4" 12-42 sq. ft. I glass 1/4"
thick.
8-18
tinted
b. Tinted glass: 1/4" bronze/plate thermo-pane
Thickness Maximum Area Type
1/4" To 42 sq. ft. I
C. Wired glass (Symbol WRG) :
Baroque", 1/4" thick. Mississippi or L-O-F "Polished
2 . Glazing materials: All materials for glass and panel instal-
r lation of color which is inconspicuous in complete structure
matching opening frame when standard matching color is
available.
L a. Glazing compounds for exterior glass lites: Gun grade one-
part silicone rubber supplied with manufacturer's recommended
primer. General Electric "Silglaze" or Series "SCS 1200"
or Dow Corning "781", or equal.
"' b. Glazing tapes:
(1) Exterior lites: Polyisobutylene butyl, 1/8" thick by
depth of rabbet, reinforced and pre-shimmed with
W synthetic rubber rod centered in tape, Tremco 11440
Pre-Shimmed", or approved.
(2) Interior lites: Closed cell PVC resin based foam tape
with pressure sensitive double faced adhesive, 1/8"
thick, unless otherwise noted, by full depth of sash
rabbet, Norton "Bear Brand" No. 534, or approved.
c. Setting blocks and glass edge spacers: Neoprene with 70-90
Shore "A" Durometer. Setting block of minimum thickness
1/8" thick x length of from 1" to 12" depending on weight of
glass with not over 20% decrease of in place and loaded
thickness.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Insulating glass:
" a. Combination of 1/4"bronzelass
g per 08800-02-A and 1/4"
clear glass per 08800-02-A,bronze glass to exterior and clear
glass toward interior, stainless steel edge construction,
1/2" air space, combined overall thickness of i" from outside
faces at glass.
b. Where both panes are required to be tempered, locate per-
manent markings in same sill corner of all lites.
2. Tempered glass:
a. Tong marks: If glass is not supported during tempering by
air-support, support glass during tempering with tongs
Jil" located only at sill edge, spacing tongs not more than 8"
o.c. and not more than 1/2" from sill edge.
b. Permanent marking:
W (1) Permanently mark one corner of sill edge of all TGL glass
indicating glass is tempered, glass thickness and
fabricators name per 1985 UBC.
it (2) Coordinate marking location with fabrication of insula-
ting glass so markings occur in required locations.
"° 8.19
08800-02
(3) All permanent markings occur in same corner of all
installed lites; i.e. lower right or lower left corner
when view from interior of building.
08800-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Condition of work to receive glass: Examine openings to receive
glass for completeness of preparations called for in other
sections. Notify General Contractor of deficiencies in time for
correction before glazing. Openings and stops to be:
a. True in size and shape +/- 1/16" . In true plane +/- 1/16"
overall for openings and +/- 1/32" for stops.
b. Without obstructions which may damage glass. Watertight at
exterior joints of exterior openings, at rabbet of bottom web
of metal windows, at interior glass stopping legs of metal
windows, and at sill joints of interior sash stopping leg of
metal windows.
c. Removable stops on one side of door lite opening temporarily
positioned in final location, accurately fitted. Stops on
one side of door lite opening permanently fixed in place.
d. Neoprene slide-in glazing beads in place. Roll-in beads
temporarily in place.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Clean unpainted metal glass holding members including sash webs
with Toluol, MEK or other non-staining, non-etching, oilfree
solvent on clean, solvent saturated cloth.
2 . Check glass for bite. Minimum bite per PPG Industries
"Architectural Glass Products" 1975 Edition, pages 29, 30 and
31.
C. INSTALLATION: Set tempered glass with tong marks at bottom edge,
marks indicating tempered glass at same corner at lights in all
runs.
1. Exterior lites installed with metal stops:
a. Cut specified glazing tape to length on cutting table. Apply
back bed of tape with edge flush with sight line and with
tape ends butted tooled, sill and head tape full width of
glass opening without joint. Tool all butt joints. Do not x;
lap tape. Remove backing paper just prior to setting glass.
b. Block under glass with two setting blocks at bottom outer
quarter points. Prepare bottom snap-in stop to clear blocks.
c. Press glass firmly against back bed tape.
d. Apply heel bead of glazing compound around all four edges of
in-place glass, filling space between glass edges, sash web
and back bed tape. Bed stops with full bed of glazing
compound applied under pressure.
2 . Exterior lites with pocket glazing: Permit no glass contact
with metal.
a. Secure two setting blocks at bottom outer quarter points at
sill, full width of rabbet.
a-2o
08800-03
b. Apply 8" long pieces of exterior or interior glazing tape
full width of "deep" pocket for glass, one at top and one at
bottom.
i„ c. Joggle glass into position with vertical edge entering "deep"
pocket first. Glass shall not touch metal at any time
before, during and after glazing.
d. Center glass in opening, apply blob of glazing compound at
jambs near top and bottom of glass to hold glass from
traveling horizontally, then roll in exterior neoprene glaz-
ing bead. Straighten sight lines on interior and exterior
beads.
e. Seal joints in glazing bead and neoprene weathering with
specified glazing compound in color to match neoprene bead.
3 . Exterior lites with glazing bead stops: Permit no glass contact
with metal.
a. Seal joints in interior glazing bead and stops with sealant.
b. Block under glass with two setting blocks at bottom outer
quarter points. Prepare bottom exterior stop to clear
blocks.
c. Install glass on blocks, centered in opening.
yr d. Install glob of sealant at bottom and top corners of glass to
prevent glass from "traveling" in opening.
e. Install exterior snap-in stops. Straighten sight lines on
interior and exterior beads.
f. Seal joints in glazing bead and neoprene weathering with
glazing compound matching bead color.
4 . Interior lites: Back and face glaze with specified tape. Set
"W glass on setting blocks. Use no glazing compound. Install
stops to give firm pressure on glass after stop is secured
using tape thicker than 1/8" if necessary to produce required
pressure.
D. ADJUSTING: At final acceptance, make loose glass tight and free
of rattles.
E. CLEANING:
1. Remove excess glazing compound during normal work life of
compound.
2. Trim tape above sight lines with sharp razor blade.
3. Leave glass whole, tight, free of scratches and discoloration
j „ and with clean sight lines.
tirr
8.2�
it
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
GYPSUM DRYWALL SECTION 09520
lwr
09520-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide gypsum drywall board work, including gypsum wallboard,
gypsum backing board, fastenings, caulking and accessories at
gypsum drywall locations shown on drawings and Room Finish
.r Schedule. In addition, provide gypsum drywall firestops where
specified in this section and provide attic area separations
where shown. Definition of core types per ASTM.
I ow a. GWB . . . . Single ply of regular core wallboard.
b. WP-GWB. . . Single ply of regular core wallboard with
special moisture resistant core and face papers.
c. Type X GWB. Single ply of "X" core wallboard.
d. Type 1/2" concrete (wonder) board.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing wood framing and stripping to receive gypsum dry-
wall in Section 06110, Framing & Sheathing, including gypsum
wallboard firestopping per 06110-03 .
b. Providing gypsum drywall joint taping; nailhead, screwhead
4" and joint finishing; and surface texture coatings on drywall
surfaces in Section 09270, Gypsum Drywall Finishing.
3. Definitions: Terms "wall" and "partition" are used interchang-
ably in this section. The term "edge" in reference to gypsum
* boards refers only to paperbound edges at long dimension of
wallboard.
tw B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Standards: Meet requirements and recommendations for
materials and workmanship of ANSI current Edition, for "The
Application and Finishing of Wallboard".
b. Fire resistive standards" At all corridors meet fire re-
strictive requirements for 1 Hr. rated walls insofar as
ANN gypsum drywall materials and their assembly form a part of
specified fire resistive construction. Terms are defined in
1985 Edition of UBC "Standards" based on "Standard Methods"
(Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials) of ASTM.
-� C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1. Delivery, handling and storage of materials per ANSI Standards.
2 . Deliver fire rated materials bearing testing agency label and
required fire classification identification.
D. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements: Install gypsum drywall only in
spaces protected from precipitation and free of standing water.
2 . Adhesive laminate installation work at 55 degrees F. , minimum.
09250-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Gypsum boards: 5/8" thick and 4' wide, unless otherwise
specified.
9-{
09250-02
a. Gypsum wallboard type "X" : Meet requirements of ASTM "Gypsum
Wallboard", for type "X" wallboard with tapered edges or USG
Type SW eased edges. Edges paper bound. Type III, Grade X,
fire retardant core.
b. Gypsum wallboard - moisture resistant: Meet requirements of
"Watertite" , U.S. Gypsum. Edges paper bound, tapered or USG
Type SW.
2 . Fastenings:
a. Nails: 5d, 1 5/811 , 19/64" diameter head, No. 13 1/2" gage,
"Parkerhead Dritites" or 6d, 1 7/811 , 1/4" diameter head No.
13 gage, cement coated or chemically etched.
b. Screws: 1" in metal framing and 1 1/4" in wood framing No. 6
self-drilling screws for single layer construction, USG brand
"Hi-Lo" screws, Type S, bugle head or approved.
3 . Sealant: Butyl rubber meeting requirements of Fed. Spec.
TT-S-230a, May 5, 1967, amended September 6, 1967, Type II
(nonsag) , or PRC "Rubber Caulk 700011 , Eternaflex "One Part" ,
Tremco "Mono", any Thiokol "tested and approved" one part
polysulfide base sealant, or acrylic latex sealant by Pecora
Chemical Corp. 11AC-2011 , or Eternaflex Acrylic Latex Sealant" .
4 . Backer rod: Polyethylene foam, Dow "Ethafoam SB" rod or PRC
"Minicel" of size to have in-place compressed width across joint
of between 60%-75% of original diameter.
5. Accessories: 26 gage galvanized steel.
a. Corner bead: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 220 "Corner Guard" ;
USG "Dur-A-Bead" ; J-M No. 220. Leg 1 1/8" x 1 1/8" , minimum.
b. "U" shape edge: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 108; USG No.
200-A; J-M No. 108.
c. "L" shape edge: Casings-Western, Inc. No. 106 "Wide Flange
1 1/411' USG No. 200-B; J-M No. 106. Angle leg over ends and
edges of wallboard same dimension as wallboard thickness,
fully covering wallboard ends and edges.
09250-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Condition of framing to receive drywall:
a. Drywall bearing surfaces of minimum or greater widths re-
quired per ANSI Standards.
b. Maximum moisture content of wood framing and stripping to
receive drywall 15% of oven-dry weight of wood, as measured
by moisture meter at time for board application.
c. Wood framing and furring aligned per 06110-01-B3 .
B. INSTALLATION:
1. In general, install ceilings before walls.
2 . Apply with all edges and ends of wallboard and backing board in i
moderate contact between abutting pieces of board. Where less i
than moderate contact occurs at wallboard to receive finished
type joints per 09270-03, correct contact conditions, and where F
less than moderate contact occurs elsewhere, either correct I
contact or rough tape loose joints.
9.2
4r,r
09250-03
3. Where interior angles receive joint treatment, apply board by
"floating" interior angle method, unless prohibited by fire
resistive construction requirements.
4. Firestopping concealed spaces in wood frame construction:
ii• Inside furred spaces, except attic spaces and sound isolation
partitions, where clear distance between wood frame assemblies
(such as walls, partitions, ceilings, soffits, floors and roofs)
w is greater that 11 , provide 1/2" or 5/8" "regular" core or "X"
core wallboard or gypsum backing board firestopping, so placed
that maximum dimension of concealed spaces is not over 10' in
horizontal and vertical dimension.
bw" 5. Attic area separations: Where attic area separations are shown,
install gypsum board, rigidly supported and extending from
ceiling tight to bottom of roof deck. Thickness of wallboard
r 1/211, except where attic area separation is continuation of
partition with drywall on exposed portions, in which case con-
tinue same thickness and number of plies of drywall to bottom
of roof deck.
6. Install moisture resistant type wallboard at lowest 4' of
wainscots and walls to receive gypsum board in spaces in which
finished floors are ceramic tile or concrete. This requirement
shall govern when Room Finish Schedule shows any type of gypsum
board finish to occur within 4' of floor in above note spaces.
7. Install 1/2" concrete (wonder) board on walls of shower (part
w of Rm 205) and hose-off booth (part of Rm 207) behind tile.
8. Fastening drywall:
a. All gypsum board nail or screw applied with fastenings spaced
not less than 3/8" nor more that 1/2" from edges and ends of
perimeter of board.
b. Perimeter fastening into plate and sole at top and bottom is
required.
c. Nails and screws driven home with heads slightly below sur-
face of board and in manner to not fracture face paper with
fastener head. Screws driven with electric screwdriver.
.. d. Fastener schedule:
Maximum Maximum
Thickness o.c. Spacing o.c. Spacing
& Type of Plane of of Fasteners of Fasteners
Gypsum Board Framing (Inches) (Inches)
(Inches) Surface Nails Nails Screws
5/8" Face Horizontal 16 6 --
w. & Ceilings Vertical 16 7 8 @ board
perimeter and
12 intermediate
w
8. On wood framed partitions, vertical and horizontal wood furring,
wood framed ceiling of joists or suspended wood framing:
a. Apply board in maximum practical lengths, with long dimension
parallel or at right angles to vertical framing members and
at right angles only to horizontal (ceiling) framing members.
Stagger joints in board when applied at right angles to
9-3
09250-03
framing members and allow maximum possible distance between
joints. All abutting ends and edges occur over framing mem-
bers except edges when joints are at right angles framing to
framing members. Joints of vertically applied board on
opposite sides of partition arranged to occur on different
framing members.
b. Nailing to proceed from central portion of board toward the
end and edges. Double nail where board is not tight to
framing.
c. Sidewall vertical angles: Overlap board at internal corner
framing per floating angle method. Overlapping board applied
to bring underlying board into firm contact with face of
framing member behind it. No fastenings to corner stud
permitted in underlying board.
9. Where partitions abut walls or ceilings other than of gypsum
board, provide a uniform perimeter relief space a minimum of
1/4" and maximum of 3/8" by holding gypsum board back from
abutting walls, columns and decks over top of partitions.
Provide minimum 1/8" and maximum 1/4" space between bottom of
gypsum board and floor and 1/8" space around plaster rings for
electrical fixtures, outlet boxes, electrical panels, duct
openings.
10. Seal between gypsum board and abutting vertical surfaces
materials other than gypsum board wherever casing beads are not
required. Where framing for gypsum board provides back-up for
sealant and joint is not over 1/4" wide, fill entire space with
specified sealant or install specified backer rod, allowing for
approximately 1/4" depth of sealant in joint. Install rod with
plain faced roller, without stretching rod longitudinally and
without puncturing surface skin on rod, then fill remainder of
space with sealant to give slightly concave face, holding
sealant back just far enough to permit installation of metal
control joint. Install backer rod, to give 1/4" depth of seal-
ant, and apply sealant at control joints on both faces of
partitions.
11. Installation of accessories: Install accessories straight,
plumb, level, square and true to required angles and required
building shapes. Install in longest lengths possible and with
tight joints. Trims installed with mitered corners. Shim if
necessary using metal shims of same metal and finish as acces-
sory. Attachments rigid enough to hold accessory in required
location. Fastenings at maximum of 12" o.c. Install tight to
materials abutting drywall.
a. Locations: At corners and edges exposed-to-view where dry-
wall receives paint or glaze coating, where flexible wall
covering or other decorative coating occurs. Corner guard
behind room base, but no metal trim required along floor
where rubber base occurs.
b. Types:
(1) External corners: Corner bead.
9-4
Wr
09250-03
(2) Drywall edges and ends: "L" shape edge trim, unless
otherwise shown.
(3) Drywall edges and ends shown to receive "U" shape edge
AW trim: "U" shape edge trim.
C. CLEANING:
1. As rapidly as drywall work is completed in each space, clean all
rubbish, utensils and surplus materials from space and leave all
surfaces broom clean.
2 . Before final acceptance of project, remove drywall equipment and
drywall debris from project site.
firr
err
Mr
iW
l"" 9-5
GYPSUM DRYWALL FINISHING SECTION 09270
09270-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide gypsum drywall joint taping and finishing treatment for
fasteners and for metal drywall beads, trims and control joints.
In addition, provide texture finish on gypsum drywall where
indicated in Room Finish Schedule.
2 . Related work in other sections includes: Gypsum drywall board,
metal trim and accessories for drywall in Section 09250,
Gypsum Drywall.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Requirements of regulatory agencies: All
gypsum drywall finishing at single ply board to meet requirements rr
for 1 hour fire resistive type of construction.
C. SUBMITTALS: Samples: Submit samples of texture finish on 12" x
24" pieces of drywall board of same type and manufacture as used on
work to receive texture finish. Submit samples per 01340-02 ,
Samples.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: Delivery, handling and
storage of drywall finishing materials shall meet requirements of
ASA and pre-mixed compounds shall not be allowed to freeze or have
been frozen.
E. JOB CONDITIONS: Environmental conditions: Where materials are
being mixed or used for joint treatment, and for texture finishing,
continuously maintain temperature between 55 and 85 degrees F. from
two days before starting work in area and maintain temperature
within this range until other finishes are to be applied in area.
See Section 01513 , Temporary Heat & Ventilation, for additional
requirements.
09270-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Joint compound, joint tape and finishing or topping compound:
Meet requirements of ASTM, be made or recommended by gypsum
board manufacturer whose material is to receive drywall finish-
ing, and meet additional requirements specified below.
2 . Joint compound: Plant mixed vinyl base joint taping compound in
either machine or hand tool consistency for type of equipment
employed except joint prefill for U.S. Gypsum wallboard type SW
shall be USG "Durabond" joint compound only.
3 . Joint reinforcing tape: Spark perforated or fully perforated
and where used for corner applications, pre-creased.
4 . Finishing-topping compounds:
a. For painted or glaze coated drywall: Special purpose
finishing or topping compound designed for finishing over
tape and not all-purpose type. Compound USG "Durabond Joint
Compound-Topping", Kaiser "FC" finishing compound, National
Gypsum "Gold Bond Topping Compound" , J-M "Topping Compound",
Georgia Pacific "Topping Compound" .
9.10
09270-02
+.r b. For drywall other than painted or glaze coated work: Plant
mixed vinyl based compound all-purpose type. USG "Ready-
Mixed Joint Compound All-Purpose", Kaiser "Dual Purpose
Pre-Mix", National Gypsum "Gold Bond Ready Mixed Joint
Compound", J-M "Ready-Mix" joint compound, Georgia Pacific
"Ready Mix Joint Compound" . Finishing-topping compounds per
"a" above may be substituted for plant mixed compounds at
'w drywall finishing subcontractor's option.
5. Texture finish material: U.S.G. "Spray Texture Finish" .
B. MIXES:
1. Compound mixing: Finishing-topping compound and joint pre-fill
mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed direc-
tions. Ready mixed compounds used as they come from container.
""` 2 . Texture finish, job mixed in strict accordance with manufac-
turer's printed directions adding water as required to produce
consistency suitable for light finish.
ow
09270-03 EXECUTION
ion A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine work to receive gypsum drywall finishing and determine
acceptability of surfaces and installation, as application of
to finishing work without objection to unsatisfactory, or in-
complete wallboard installation constitutes acceptance.
2 . All edges and ends of gypsum wall board to be in moderate con-
tact. Where this condition is not met, either have wallboard
ow contact corrected or rough tape joint, regardless of joint
location.
3 . Assure that all drywall fastenings are tight.
ON B. APPLICATION:
1. Locations of drywall to receive joint and fastener depression
treatment: Where joints are required to be finished type
aw joints, fastener depressions also finished.
a. Provide finished type joints at locations exposed to view of
person other than locations normally seen only by maintenance
personnel.
b. Provide drywall to receive paint, and texture finish with
finished joints.
c. Provide drywall in concealed locations having eased edges,
tapered edges or any edges which are not in moderate contact
with rough taped joints.
d. Provide drywall shown on drawings to have rough taped or
r finished joints with type of joint treatment shown.
e. Rough tape joints in drywall used for attic area separations
where drywall joint does not occur on framing member.
2 . Types of joint treatment:
a. Finished type joints:
(1) Taping or embedding: Joint compound applied in thin
uniform layer to joints and angles to be finished. Tape
applied immediately, centered over joint and seated into
compound leaving approximately 1/64" to 1/32" remaining
i.. 9-7
09270-03
under reinforcing tape. Skim coat shall immediately
follow tape embedment but shall not function as fill or
second coat. Tape folded on center pre-crease and
embedded in all angles to provide clean angle. Allow
compound on tape to thoroughly dry prior to application
of fill coat. Pre-fill USG type SW wallboard per
manufacturer's printed directions.
(2) Filling: Joint compound, same material as taping-
embedding compound, applied over embedding coat to fill
board taper flush with board surface, cover tape and
feather out slightly beyond tape. On joints without
taper, fill coat shall cover tape and feather out
minimum 4" beyond each side of tape, except at interior
angles no fill coat is required. ��
(3) Finishing: Spread specified finishing or topping com-
pound required for type of wall or ceiling finish drywall
is to receive evenly over and extended slightly beyond
fill coat on all joints. Finish and feather to smooth
uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not permit
finished joint to protrude beyond plane of surface of
wallboard. Give all taped angles finish coat to cover
tape and taping compound; providing true, clean, sharp,
straight angle.
(4) Sanding: Sand between coats where necessary to prevent
excessive build-up of joint thickness and sand final
coat of compound to provide smooth surface, free from
roughed-up face paper, ready for decoration.
(5) Where spray texture finish is shown, modify sanding
requirement for finished type joints and for fastening
depression sanding thus: Sand in manner which produces
no more than minor degree of roughed-up face paper, so
that finish will not be objectionable after spray tex-
ture finish and painting and glaze coating work is
completed.
b. Rough taped joints: Finish same as finished joints per
09720-03-B2-a(1) and (2) only. No finishing or sanding
required, but hold compound below plane of board face to
receive tile or board finish material.
3 . Fastener depressions treatment: Taping or all-purpose compound
applied as first coat to fastener depressions requiring finish-
ing, followed by minimum two additional coats of required
finishing or topping compound for type of wall or ceiling finish
drywall to receive. Leave depressions requiring finishing level
with plane of wallboard surface.
4 . Finishing beads and trims:
a. Fill coat: Joint compound applied to all bead and trim,
feathered out from ground to plane of wallboard surface,
allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of second
fill coat except USG "Durabond Joint Compound-Taping" need
only have hardened prior to application of next coat.
b. Second fill coat: Joint compound applied same as first fill
coat and extended slightly beyond.
9-6
09720-03
c. When all fill coats are thoroughly dry, apply finish coat of
finishing or topping compound specified for type of wall or
ceiling finish drywall is to receive. Extend finish coat
slightly beyond second fill coat, feathered from ground to
6W plane of wallboard.
d. Sand finish coat to provide smooth surface, ready for
decoration.
#Am 5. Texture finishing: On drywall construction, prior to applica-
tion of texture finish, joints finished type joints and fastener
depressions finished, scratches and scuffs smoothed and
spackled. Apply a uniform coat of spray texture finish with
light "orangepeel" texture to all gypsum drywall to be painted
or glaze coated. Match Architect approved sample.
C. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Remove all excess compound from edges of beads and trim,
electrical outlet boxes and from other surfaces not to receive
drywall finish.
2 . As rapidly as drywall finishing is completed in each space,
clean all rubbish, utensils and surplus materials from space,
leaving surfaces broom clean, ready for decoration specified in
other sections.
3 . Remove drywall finishing equipment and debris from site before
time for substantial completion of the work.
err
llirr GYPSUM PLASTER SECTION 09280
09280-01 GENERAL
A. Wrap glu-lam beams and built up framing to match concrete trim
bands.
B. Materials: Gypsum plaster over 3. 4 lb. self-furring expanded
diamond mesh-metal lath and 2h" wide flanged expanded metal
corner beads.
C. Finish: Sand texture, painted to match concrete trim band
appearance.
D. Joints: Locate at center line of brick pilasters.
bw
ir.
""
9-9
CERAMIC TILE SECTION 09310
09310-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide ceramic tile, where called for on Room Finish Schedule
and details.
2 . Related work specified in other sections includes: Providing
gypsum wallboard for ceramic tile base backing in Section 09250,
Gypsum Drywall.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Tile work and materials shall meet only those
portions of The Tile Council of America, Inc. "Handbook for Ceramic
Tile Installation" which are specifically called for herein except
all ASTM specifications listed in "Handbook" under design numbers
called for in 09310-03-A, Installation,* shall apply to this pro-
ject and no ANSI specifications shall apply except those portions
of ANSI standards specifically noted in 09310-02-A and 09310-03-A.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: The Certification Mark of
The Tile Council of America, the "Standard Grade" stamp and the
manufacturer's name shall appear on each carton of tile. Tile
shall be delivered to project in sealed cartons. Keep grade seal
on cartons intact and keep cartons and materials containing
portland cement dry.
�.4
D. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental:
a. Set and grout tile in portland cement mortar when ambient
temperature is at least 50 degrees F. and rising.
b. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of
manufacturers for bonding and grouting materials in other JA
than portland cement mortar.
2 . Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work
begins.
09310-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: Installation per manufacturer' s specifications.
Exact colors to be selected by Owner.
1. Lobby floors: Thompson - "Fiandre" (8" x 811 ) J.,
Restroom floors: American Olean - Unglazed Porcelain (2" x 2" )
Restroom walls : American Olean - Matte finish
(4" x 4")
J
9-10
09310-02
2. Grout: Custom Building Products acid resistant grout or Upco
"Hydroment" or L&M "Acid-R Grout" or Chicago Mastic Co. Color
of grout for tile as selected by Architect.
3 . Divider strips: Half-hard brass divider strips of type
specified below and shown on drawings, The American Terrazzo
Strip Co. , Inc. , Type "K", or approved.
4 . Water repellent admix: Sonneborn "Hydrocide Powder" or Master
Builders "Omnicron Mortarproofing".
5. Bonding agent: Masons Supply Co. "Masco Concrete Bonding Agent"
or Madden Construction Supply "Unicon 240 PVA" or Standard
Drywall Products "Acryl 60".
6. Base tile adhesive: Upco Mastic 5100 or Architect approved.
7. Cleaning detergent for unglazed tile: Sure-Klean No. 600
masonry detergent.
B. MIXES:
1. Setting bed mix: Meet requirements of ANSI for proportions and
mixing of setting bed and dope coat (pure coat) mix.
2 . Grout for floor and base tile: Add specified grout to clean
water in mixing container. Use proper ratio of grout to water
per manufacturer's printed directions. Mix to smooth consis-
tency by machine mixer.
3 . Admixtures: Integrally treat all setting bed mortar for all
floors with admixture and bonding agent specified in 09310-02-A4
and A5. Use in strict accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
09310-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile floors over concrete slabs on grade: Per
Cement Mortar, bonded. No control joints required.
2 . Ceramic base tile over gypsum board and ceramic tile base over
bw masonry: Per Gypsum Board Organic Adhesive.
3 . Divider strips: Install at junction between ceramic tile floors
and abutting floor coverings of other materials. Set flush with
top of tile, centered under door when door is closed.
to 4 . Grouting floor and base tile: Grout all base and floor tile to
full depth of joint with materials specified in 09310-02, using
a trowel, squeegee, brush or finger application. Use sufficient
too grout to completely fill air pockets and voids. Remove excess
material and before grout sets, smooth joints to depth of
cushion edge.
5. Cleaning: After joints have become firm, clean with cleaning
detergent specified in 09310-02-A6.
B. CLEAN-UP: Remove accumulation of waste materials, rubbish, excess
6W insulation materials and containers. Dispose of waste materials
off site.
+t- 9-i
SS
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT SECTION 09500
09500-01 GENERAL-
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide acoustical tiles, acoustical panels and metal suspen-
sion system at ceilings where indicted on drawings and Room
Finish Schedule.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing temporary facilities in Sections 01511 and 01513,
including temporary electricity, heat and ventilation.
b. Providing ceiling air diffusers in Division 15, with support
for diffusers from flexible connectors to diffusers by
ceiling suspension system.
c. Providing light fixtures and speakers furnished and installed
per Division 16, Electrical, supported by ceiling suspension
system.
3 . Definitions and identification of terms and standards:
a. AIMA: Refer to Bulletin of Acoustical and Insulating
Materials Assoc. for:
(1) Tables classifying materials according to appearance and
composition, indicating thickness, light reflectance,
flame spread index per ASTM, flame spread class per
Fed. Specs.
(2) Definitions of terms.
(3) Installation recommendations, when not otherwise speci-
fied in this section.
b. ASTM: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
c. ASTM: Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal
Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile & Lay-In
Panels.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Acceptable installer: Approved for installation work by
manufacturer of acoustical materials and installer of minimum
of 3 installations of comparable extent and type as required for
Project within past 2 years.
2 . Allowable tolerances:
a. Deflection:
(1) Suspension system components, hangers and fastening
devices supporting light fixtures, ceiling grilles and
acoustical units: Maximum deflection 1/360 of the span.
b. Allowable tolerance of finished suspended acoustical ceiling
system:
(1) Level within 1/8" in 12' when measured in any direction,
noncumulatively. Measure after completion of installa-
tion of entire ceiling work in space.
(2) Exposed members parallel and perpendicular with one b
another so 45 degree diagonal measurements between any 1
intersecting ceiling grid points in common within a
ceiling field do not deviate more than 1: 1000.
9.12
09500-01
(3) Maximum deviation of any line of exposed members from
parallel with averaged c. 1. axis between walls where axis
is indicated parallel to walls: 1/16" in 121 , non-
cumulative.
on-
cumulative.
(4) Cross runners installed within 1/32" of required center
distances. This tolerance noncumulative.
(5) Exposed surface of two intersecting runners lie within
0.015" vertical distance of each other.
(6) Butt joints at exposed surfaces of two abutting main
runners lie within vertical and horizontal distance of
bw each other of 0. 015" after ceiling loads are imposed.
(7) Horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces of both abutting
and intersecting members do not exceed 0.020" .
Yew
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Samples:
a. Submit 2 full size samples of each type of acoustical unit to
be supplied to illustrate range of appearance, trueness of
edges, quality of paint finish, etc.
b. Submit samples per 01340-02, Samples.
�w 2 . Maintenance materials:
a. Furnish Owner minimum of 1% of each type acoustical unit
used on Project. Furnish suspension system components for
each type of system in amount sufficient to install all extra
units of type supported by that suspension system.
b. All materials packaged in plainly marked cartons and of same
"run" as those installed.
6W c. Obtain written receipt from Owner's representative for extra
stock.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging
with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern,
aw size, thickness, flame spread rating, and for light fixture
protection boxes, UL Fire Hazard Classification marking. Labels
legible and intact.
2 . Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent
6W soiling, physical damage or wetting.
3 . Store cartons in heated building, off floor, open at each end to
stabilize moisture content and temperature.
4 . Do not begin installation in a space until sufficient material
to complete space is received.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513 , Art. D.
2 . Sequencing:
a. Dampening materials work completed before acoustical work.
b. Acoustical ceiling work completed before carpet and casework
installations.
9-13
09500-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: To maximum extent possible, furnish materials of one
manufacturer's products.
1. Acoustical units: Provide and install acoustical Armstrong
Fissured Travel-tone (white) 24" x 24" x 3/4" , Tegular Edge,
panels (Item No. 507A) . Panels are rabbeted on all four sides
and rest on exposed-grid suspension system. Surfaces of
individual panels extend 11/32" below grid.
2 . Staples: For hanger wire support as wood joists: Stronghold
"Fence Staple", 1 1/2" x 9 gage, flattened head, or USS
"Griptite" staples.
3 . Suspension systems: All components of a system from one
manufacturer and per requirements of ASTM, unless otherwise
noted.
a. Acoustical unit support materials: Furnish complete with all
required accessories.
(1) Exposed grid tee. Electro-galvanized steel, white paint
finish on exposed-to-view parts.
b. Suspension system type, fire resistance rating, and struc-
tural classification requirements: Per ASTM "Furring Bard
Suspension System" is specified in other sections.
"Intermediate-duty main runners, direct hung".
c. Hold down clips: Type as supplied by suspension system
manufacturer.
d. Rough suspension:
(1) Hangers: Minimum 12 gage but heavier gage capable of
carrying 5 times design load where loads exceed capacity
of 12 gage wire. Wire galvanized, soft annealed, mild
steel wire, with 3/8" diameter threaded rods for fixture
support. 3/16" thick x 1" wide, zinc coated, flat steel
straps for fixture support.
(2) Wire ties: 18 gage, galvanized annealed steel wire.
(3) Hanger clips: Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening
hangers to furring channels dovetail anchor slots in
concrete steel joists structural steel bulb tees.
(4) Carrying channels: 16 gage, 1 1/211, cold rolled steel
weighing 475 lbs. per 1000 lineal feet, electro-
galvanized or painted black.
09500-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION: Condition of surfaces and of prior work: Starting
installation work in a space indicates acceptance of space as ready Y
for acoustical installation. Report to Architect in writing
defects in conditions which prevent satisfactory installation.
Determine that work above ceiling level and at abutting walls is ;3'
completed to degree necessary for satisfactory ceiling installation
and that interference requirements of ASTM are met.
B. PREPARATION:
1. Coordinate layout with other trades to assure symmetrical place-
ment of grilles, light fixtures and other items exposed thru
ceiling. Meet requirements of ASTM.
9-14
09500-03
2. Determine fixture loads to be supported by suspension systems.
Determine locations for and install additional hanger wires and
suitable accessory devices to support fixture loads when fixture
loads exceed 3 .5 lbs. per lineal foot on main runner members and
also when ceiling support system, including both main runners
and cross runners, will not resist more than 2 degrees rotation
due to fixture loads.
C. INSTALLATION:
iW 1. General requirements:
a. Install ceilings per manufacturer's printed instructions; per
AIMA recommendations, and as futher supplemented in this
section.
b. Make border units more than half acoustical unit width when
measured perpendicularly to wall or edge of acoustical panel
perimeter.
6W 2. Suspension systems: Per this paragraph; per additional printed
instructions from manufacturer or specified proprietary products
where such instructions are more explicit; and, where not otheriW -
wise required by preceding noted requirements, per ASTM.
a. General suspension system installation requirements:
(1) Erect ceiling system level within 1/8" in 12' when
measured in any direction, noncumulatively. Measure
after completion of installation of entire ceiling work
in the space.
(2) Exposed member parallel and perpendicular with one
another and also parallel with perimeter walls.
(3) Cross runners installed within 1/32" of required center
distances. This tolerance noncumulative.
(4) Exposed surface of two intersecting runners lie within
0.015" vertical distance of each other and with abutting
cross member above continuous main member.
(5) Splines longer than dimension between edges of supporting
members running perpendicular to splines placed so
splines rest either all above or all below main running
members.
10 (6) Butt joints at exposed surfaces of two abutting main
runners lie within vertical and horizontal distance of
each other of 0.015" after ceiling loads are imposed.
(7) Horizontal gaps between exposed surfaces of both abutting
and intersecting members do not exceed 0.020" .
(8) Provide hanger, main runners, cross runners and rough
suspension headers for support of light fixtures, sound
WW system speakers and air diffusers and grilles.
(9) Ceiling to be installed with use of lasers and seismic
or laterally braced in accordance with UBC No. 47-18 .
W b. Rough suspension:
(1) Hanger wires:
(a) Secure to sides of wood joists at 511, minimum, from
bottom edge of joists. Use on staple per hanger
wire. Drive staple so both legs are fully embedded
into joist.
(b) Hanger wire clips: As recommended by clip manufac-
w' turer to carrying channels.
f
09500-03
(c) Space hanger wires 4'-0" o.c. along lengths of
carrying channels or main runners.
(d) Install additional hanger wires 6" from walls, parti-
tions, columns and other vertical surfaces at ends of
each suspension member and at light fixtures and air
diffusers and additionally where loads exceed 3 . 5
lbs. per lineal foot and at draper track supports at
4'-0" o.c. along supports.
(e) Wires not splayed more that 5" in 4' of vertical
drop.
(f) Top and bottom ends or wires wrapped around portion
of wire in tension 3 times horizontally and as close
to support points as possible, ends turned upward.
(2) Carrying channels: Saddle tie to hanger wires, leveled
to 1/8" in 12' per 09500-03-C3-a(1) and with wires taut
to prevent downward movement when ceiling loads are
imposed. Local kinks or bends in wires as means of
leveling not permitted. Clips or other attachments to
hanger wires by other trades not permitted, unless
ceiling systems subcontractor has given permission for
attachment per 09500-03-B2 and local kinks or bends
resulting from such attachment are not subject to
straightening under ceiling loads. Install additional <<
carrying channels, suspended by hanger wires, or wire
tied to carrying channels, as required for support of
mechanical and electrical work supported by ceiling
suspension system.
c. Finish suspension:
(1) Main and cross runners:
(a) Space main runners at centers required by specified
acoustical unit size. Wire clip with furring clips
to channels at all intersections.
(b) Space cross runners at centers required by specified
acoustical units.
(2) Wall molding: Install at intersection of ceiling with
vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings
intersect.
(3) Hold-down clips: Install as required at AB-13 1 Hr.
rated ceilings and as recommended by manufacturer for
AB-9 ceilings.
d. Ceiling fixture protection batts: Install at ceiling with
acoustical units per Symbol AB-13 on each light fixture that
penetrates ceiling and on loud speakers with opening thru
ceiling.
e. Acoustical units:
(1) Install in level plane and in straight line courses.
(2) Units bear all around on suspension members.
(3) Minimum width of border tiles: One-half unit dimension.
x
9-i6
W
09500-03
D. REPAIR OF DEFECTS:
1. Dents and deformations: Replace with specified new material
where paint alone is not adequate to correct damage. No spackle
or fillers permitted for repair of dents and deformations.
2. Scratches and abrasions: Repair acoustical work slightly
scratched or abraded following installation by painting with
paint of same type, color and manufacturer as on material to be
repaired. Apply in manner to match unblemished work.
E. CLEANING:
j 1. Acoustical work: Clean soiled and discolored acoustical work
surfaces after installation by methods and with materials recom-
mended by acoustical materials manufacturers. If cleaning
causes damage or is not adequate to correct condition, replace
unsatisfactory work.
2 . Remove from site packaging and excess acoustical work materials
from work of this section on completion of work in each area.
SPECIAL NOTE FOR MULTI-PURPOSE ROOM:
The 15 parabolic louver light fixtures in this room require
a higher unit backing than can be provided in the air space between
the suspended acoustical ceiling and the truss joists with bat
insulation. Components of the 15 lighting fixtures must be
o extended into the air space between trusses. Therefore, the ceiling
installer must ensure that the T-bars in this room coincide exactly
and parallel with the truss system 2 ' o. c .
General contractor will ensure that fire-proof sheetrock boxes,
2 ' x 2' , are installed in these areas, appropriately framed with
wood.
60 9-i-7
Fer
SHEET VINYL FLOORING SECTION 09660
09660-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide resilient tile flooring work at locations noted on Room
Finish Schedules. Resilient tile flooring work includes all:
a. Sheet vinyl floor covering work.
b. Rubber base work.
The work of this section does not include installation of floor
covering and of base beneath and behind built-in equipment such h
as fixed cabinets having enclosed bases.
2 . Related work in other sections includes: }
a. Providing forming of concrete surfaces; type and locations
for control and isolation joints; use of form release
coating and agents; and use of bond breakers specified in
Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
b. Providing finishing of concrete floor slabs per 03310-03-B4 ;
curing of concrete per 03310-03-C; patching of concrete per
03310-03-E; and cleaning of concrete per 03310-03-F.
c. Providing metal saddles and thresholds in Section 08710,
Finish Hardware.
d. Providing painting in Section 09900.
e. Providing casework with finished fixed bases in Section
12310, Prefabricated Plastic Laminate Casework.
B. SUBMITTALS:
1. Maintenance instructions: Submit floor covering materials
manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions per Section
01725, Operating & Maintenance Data.
2 . Extra stock: Furnish to Owner at time of final acceptance of
project a minimum of 1% of each color and pattern of vinyl
used on project. Furnish Owner with minimum of 2% of each color
of each type of based used on project. All pieces of this base
to be 4' long or longer. All of this extra material to be of
same factory run number as material installed in project. Get
signed receipt from Owner's representative on delivery of extra
stock.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver materials to project in manufacturer's original, un-
opened containers with labels indicating brand names, colors and
patterns, and quality designations legible and intact.
2. Store and protect materials per manufacturer's directions and
recommendations. Unless otherwise directed, store materials in
original containers at not less than 70 degrees F. for not less
than 24 hours immediately preceeding installation. ;.
D. JOB CONDITIONS: Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513 for
temperature in spaces where sheet vinyl flooring work takes place.
j,
9-15
wr
09660-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: (Color to be selected by owner)
1. Preparation materials: Cleaning agents and equipment, moisture
testing units, patching and leveling compounds, substrate
aw sealants and similar materials and equipment as recommended by
floor covering material manufacturer for type and location of
substrate and other conditions involved.
2. Sheet vinyl: The following description is based upon Armstrong,
Classic Corlon series - vinyl sheet flooring.
a. 6' wide rolls. chips in vinyl
b. Gauge: .085 overall. . 050 gauge vinyl composition/matrix we
&W c. Reference specs: L-F-475A(3) , Type II, Grade A mil standard ayer
1623D for deck covering.
d. Fire test data: ASTM E 648.
3 . Rubber base: Top set, 4" and 6" high, rubber roll goods.
a. Flexco (continuous roll) or approved equal.
4 . Application materials: Primers and adhesives recommended by
manufacturer of floor covering material to be applied for types
and locations of substrates involved. When floor covering
manufacturer markets application material for conditions
involved, use floor covering manufacturer's material.
5. Tile colors and patterns: Selected by Owner. In
general, colors and schemes per Section 09900, Painting.
09660-03 EXECUTION
A. INSPECTION:
1. Examine substrates for excessive moisture content and for
6W acceptability, within specified requirements of work of other
sections. Performance of work of this section without objection
to work of other sections constitutes acceptance of job condi-
tions at locations where work of this section is performed.
2 . Do not proceed with work of this section until defects in work
of other sections have been corrected, moisture levels in
concrete and masonry are satisfactory, and resilient tile
flooring subcontractor is satisfied that he is providing a
satisfactory, permanent installation.
Y B. PREPARATION:
1. Fill cracks less than 1/8" wide and depressions less that 1/4"
deep with crack filler at remodel areas.
2 . Prime surfaces where and as recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
3 . Roughen surfaces of hard, glossy materials to receive base.
C. INSTALLATION:
1. Adhesives: Mixed and applied in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions and printed recommendations
for each material, location and job condition involved.
2 . Vinyl: Lay vinyl symmetrically, square with axis of space and,
where possible, borders at all perimeters. Install vinyl with
edges tight to floor and joints tight.
9-(9
WW
S:
09660-03
(Color to be selected by owner)
3 . Base: / Install base around perimeter of room or space, at
toespaces of fixed cabinets and casework and, unless otherwise
indicated, at perimeter of all resilient tiled and carpeted
floors. Detailed requirements thus:
a. Install with minimum of joints. Internal corner and scribed
end joints not over 1/64" wide. Unless otherwise directed by
Architect, all joints at internal corners only, and coped.
b. Job form external corners without cutting through base,
properly relieved, rolled into place.
c. Install base after carpet is installed, with top level, and
with bottom not over 1/8" from substrate for carpet. Press
down cove base so bottom cove edge follows floor profile.
No face nailing permitted.
d. Where cove base ends with end of cove exposed, not dying into
a corner, relieve and trim toe, bring toe back to wall, then
cement toe and back of base firmly to wall.
4 . Reducing strips: Install where vinyl flooring terminates at
uncovered adjoining floors. Center under door where resilient
tile flooring terminates at door opening. Install with minimum
possible number of joints. Locate joints well away from ends of
strips where possible. Fit ends abutting walls and door frames
to within 1/64".
D. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Repair of defective work: Replace coverings showing deteriora-
tion, ridges, dimples and/or pimples due to substrate roughness,
unclean surfaces, or construction damage before substantial
completion inspection.
2 . After adhesive materials have set, clean visible adhesive
resulting from resilient tile work from all surfaces by methods
and with materials recommended by floor covering material
manufacturer.
9-?-0
CARPETING SECTION 09680
09680-01 GENERAL
A. DECRIPTION: (Color to be selected by owner)
1. Provide carpeting where indicated on Room Finish Schedules.
Inspect jobsite areas requiring carpeting installation to
determine exact area and dimensions for completed carpet in-
stallation.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing quality control in Section 01400, Quality Control.
b. Providing concrete slabs with steel trowled finish at
carpeted areas in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturers: and carpet name: Stratton Ironside 28
a. 28 oz. Antron Nylon
b. 9. 0 S.P.I.
c. Pile Height . 156 (glue down installation)
d. Backing: Unitary with 18# average touch bind.
e. Total weight: 63 oz.
f. 3 ply yarn. + 3% minimum overage for future repair (give owner)
2. Acceptable installer: Regularly engaged in carpet installation
work and completed minimum of 5 comparable type and size instal-
lations in past 2 year.
3 . Requirements of regulatory agencies:
a. Flame spread: Rating not exceeding provisions of ASTM
"Standard Method of Test For Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials" .
b. Flammability: Meet Federal Flammability Standards.
C. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver materials in original, protective packaging with
manufacturer's labels, mill register number on each roll and
product identification legible and packaging intact.
2 . Deliver adhesives and primers in unopened containers.
3 . Carpeting subcontractor to open carpet packaging at earliest
opportunity and visually inspect enough of carpet material to
detect obvious deviations from required material, including face
yarn color, pattern, type of construction, backing type, pile
height, gage or pitch and stitches per inch. Reclose packaging
and report all deviations to Architect at time of detection.
4. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent
soiling, physical damage and wetting.
5. Store carpet material in manner and environmental conditions to
stabilize moisture content and temperature at levels normally
expected to exist when carpeted space is occupied by Owner.
6. Store adhesive at working temperatures per label instructions.
7 . Do not begin installation until sufficient quantity of materials
to complete all spaces are received.
L
9-Z
09680-01
D. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements: Per Section 01513, Temporary Heat
& Ventilation.
2 . Sequencing:
a. Install carpet after acoustical ceilings, vinyl flooring and
fixed casework are installed.
b. Install carpet before room base and rubber skirting.
09680-02 PRODUCTS
F
A. MATERIALS:
1. Carpet: See 09680-01-B (Quality Assurance) .
2. Accessories:
a. For junction between carpet and uncovered concrete floors:
Vinyl tile reducing strips in color as selected by Owner.
b. Adhesives:
(1) Carpet to concrete: Product recommended in writing by
carpet manufacturer.
(2) Carpet seaming cement: As recommended in writing by
manufacturer of carpet.
c. Substrate sealer: Product recommended in writing by carpet
and carpet adhesive manufacturers.
B. MANUFACTURE:
1. Carpet of "first quality" and per qualified manufacturer.
2 . Carpet yarn: All from same dye lot.
09680-03 EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION:
1. Remove dust from slabs to receive carpet by vacuuming.
2 . Apply concrete sealer per sealer manufacturer's instructions to
floor slabs.
B. INSTALLATION:
1. Install be direct glue-down method.
2. Secure carpet to floor with specified adhesive per carpet
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3 . Install wall to wall except wall to fixed casework toespace base
where fixed casework occurs.
4 . Use continuous carpet lengths in widths as broad as possible.
No cross seams permitted except where shown on approved layout
plan. ;
5. True cut edges and appropriately treat edges to form non-ravel-
ing joints.
6. Seam per carpet manufacturer's recommendation using seaming
cement.
7. Install carpet to vinyl by "butting" . Use seaming cement on
carpet edge at this joint.
9-22 k
r.
09680-03
C. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Remove loose pieces of yarn with sharp scissors.
2. Replace frayed and pulled tufts, when permitted by Architect, to
correct position. Anchor with seaming cement to tuft bind
required.
3 . Remove all dirt, soiled spots, excessive adhesive and scraps
from surface of carpet. Use carpet manufacturer's recommended
materials and methods for conditions involved.
4 . Replace sections of carpet with objectionable blemishes, includ-
ing excessive tears, frays and/or pulls and replace with
acceptable specified carpet as directed by Architect.
D. REMNANTS:
1. Package in appropriate protective wrapping, label appropriately
and deliver to Owner all remnants and usable scrap.
2 . Get signed receipt from Owner's representative for remnants.
3 . Do not include remnants less than 48" in any dimension in
tw required overrun quantity.
s
r
Wr
9-23
PAINTING SECTION 09900
09900-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION: (Color to be selected by owner)
1. Provide painting work where indicated on Paint Schedule and
drawings by notes or symbol which correspond to symbols listed
and described in 09900-02, Products. In addition, paint items
specified in this section to be painted which are not otherwise
indicated to be painted. Where drawings indicate a particular
paint material in a praticular number of coats on a particular
substrate material, assume drawing indication is typical of
painting required for all similar conditions at all similar
locations of work under this Contract which are not shown, not
indicated or not specified as otherwise finishede. No painting
of factory finished items required under work of this section.
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing concrete form coatings and bond breaker in Section
03100, Concrete Formwork, and certain extent of concrete
patching in Section 03310, Standardweight Concrete.
b. Providing primer coat on metal, where required under work of
Division 5, is specified in Division 5, Metals.
c. Providing primer coat on sheet metal where required in
Section 07600, Sheet Metal Work.
d. Providing primer coat on hollow metal doors, hollow metal
door and window frames, and door grilles and louvers,
Section 08100, Hollow Metal Doors and Hollow Metal Door
Frames.
e. Providing preparation and texture fininshing of gypsum dry-
wall for painting in Section 09270, Gypsum Drywall Finishing.
f. Providing prefinished casework, Section 12310, Prefabricated
Plastic Laminated Casework.
g. Providing job and factory painted mechanical items per
Division 15, Mechanical.
h. Providing factory painted electrical items per Division 16,
Electrical.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified materials manufacturers: "Best grade" and "first
line" products of specified manufacturer per 09900-02 or Miller
Paint Co. , PPG Industries, Dutch Boy, Benj . Moore and Glidden
for all materials except stains.
2 . Acceptable applicators: Work done by material manufacturer's
authorized applicator where paint material manufacturer stipu-
lates this requirement in product literature.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Materials list: Promptly after award of Contract, submit to
Architect 4 copies of list of materials proposed for use.
Submit List per 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures.
List to state name of material manufacturer, name and stock
number of each item of material and complete specification by
manufacturer on storing, mixing and applying each product.
9-24
09900-01
2 . Samples: Submit per 01340-02, Samples. Make three sets of
samples comprised of every substrate requiring painting work
with all paint products required on that material. Finish in
progressive steps at rate of coverage recommended by paint
manufacturer, allowing small strip of each preceding coat to
show in sample. Sheet materials approximately 10" x 12" in
area. Casings, trim and the like to be piece of the material
specified for project, approximately 12" long. Submit samples
set directly to Owner. When samples satisfactory to Owner have
been approved, Owner will distribute:
a. One set to Architect.
b. One set to painting subcontractor.
Finished surfaces will be checked by Architect and compared to
samples. If, in Architect's opinion, coverage is not as good as
sample, painting subcontractor will be ordered to apply
additional coat(s) of finish, irrespective of number of coats
already applied. In accepting subcontract for painting, paint-
ing subcontractor agrees to be bound by these regulations
without recourse.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original containers,
plainly labeled and unopened.
2 . Provide or arrange for suitable storage room. Store all
materials not in immediate use in storage room and do all mixing
and opening there.
3 . Continuously take proper precautions against fire and daily
4w remove soiled rags, etc. , from premises.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental conditions:
a. Paint only under favorable conditions of lighting and
humidity. Moisture content of materials painted shall not
exceed 12%, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. No
exterior painting shall occur during inclement or threatening
weather. Apply paint when surrounding air temperature is
above 50 degrees F. , or at other temperature recommended by
paint manufacturer.
b. Maintain areas in process of being painted as clean and free
of dust, dirt and rubble as is expected in completed struc-
ture at time of initial occupancy.
2 . Protection: Protect own work, and work of others against
damage while painting work is in progress. Place drop cloths
to protect floors, fixtures and equipment. Exercise care to
avoid stains on glass, joint sealant and hardware and remove
stains where they occur. Replace items from which stains cannot
be removed.
,,, 3 . Sequencing: Sealant work complete before painting.
rr.
9-25
09900-02 PRODUCTS
1
A. MATERIALS:
1. General:
a. Unless otherwise noted, all material names and numbers listed
in products part of specification are products of Rodda Paint
Co. , Portland, Oregon.
b. Symbols: Symbols on Paint Schedule indicate type of finish
and number of coats applied by painting subcontractor thus:
(1) ENF/2C indicates flat enamel in 2 coats.
(2) At metal, finish schedule indicates number of finish
coats in addition to prime coat, thus APE/2C indicates
painting subcontractor to apply 2 coats of All Purpose
Equipment Enamel over prime coat by supplier of metal
item and, at galvanized metal, not specified prime paint-
ed in another section, 2 coats of All Purpose Equipment
Enamel in addition to one coat of galvanized metal
primer, all 3 coats applied by painting subcontractor.
(3) Textures - suffix symbol: Where suffix symbol "S" occurs
(example ACP-S) final coat of paint to be of stipple mix
for roller application to give "orangepeel" texture.
c. Colors:
(1) Colors selected by Owner and approved by Architect.
Painting subcontractor will be furnished Owner-Architect
approved color schedule after project is bid. Paint,
enamel and stain colors selected from specified materials
or, at Owner's option, from qualified materials
manufacturer's colors whose materials painting subcon-
tractor elects to use.
(2) Colors for interior walls in any one room or space will,
in general, be all of same color.
2 . Exterior paint materials:
a. Symbol APE:
(1) TWO FINISH COATS of All Purpose Equipment Enamel by
painting subcontractor over shop prime coat specified in
other sections and over painter applied prime coat when
shop prime coat is not required in other sections.
(2) Prime coat exterior ferrous and galvanized metal items to
receive enamel which are not shop prime coated before
applying finish coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel.d
Prime thus:
(a) Ferrous metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Synthetic
Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red" , No. 2447,
or approved substitute, one coat.
(b) Galvanized metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Zinc Dust
Primer" No. 2913 , or approved, one coat.
3 . Interior paint materials:
a. Symbol ACP:
(1) Concrete to paint:
(a) First coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in con-
tainer.
\ (b) Second coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in con-
tainer.
�Q b. Symbol ACP. (1) Concrete to paint (2 ribbons around buildings)
(a) First Coat: Krillicon paint as it comes in container.
(b) Second Coat: Krillican paint as it comes in container.
09900-02
(2) Sheet metal dusts and insulated pipes to paint:
(a) Clean metal with "Galvaprep".
(b) One coat Metal Primer No. 2153 Zinc Chromate.
w, (c) Two coats Krillicon as it comes in container.
(3) ACP-S-2c: Second coat of stippling consistency.
b. Symbol APE:
(1) Ferrous metal to enamel: Apply TWO FINISH COATS over
r shop prime coat specified in other sections and over
painter applied prime coat on galvanized metal. Finish
coats: All Purpose Equipment Enamel.
ow (2) Ferrous and galvanized metal to enamel, not shop prime
coated: Prime coated by painting subcontractor and given
TWO FINISH COATS thus:
1 60 (a) Ferrous metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. "Synthetic
Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer - Oxide Red", No. 2447,
or approved, one coat.
(b) Galvanized metal primer: Rodda Paint Co. , Zinc Dust
Primer No. 2913, or approved, one coat.
(c) Finish coats: All Purpose Equipment Enamel.
c. Symbol EN and ENS:
o (1) Wallboard, gypsum and cement plaster to enamel:
(a) First coat: Roseal No. 7700, tinted toward final
color.
(b) Second coat: Semi-Gloss Custom Color Enamel, apply
without thinning.
(2) ENS-2C: Same as (1) above except second coat of
stippling consistency.
d. Symbol ENF: Wallboard, gypsum and cement plaster to enamel.
(1) First coat: Laysn Enamel Undercoat No. 390 with gloss
ratio of 15. Tinted toward final color, without
thinning.
(2) Second coat: Lasyn Eggshell Finish No. 934 with gloss
ratio of 15, apply without thinning
4 . Putty: For small repairs and nail holes: Pure linseed oil,
lead and whiting. Color to camouflage repair.
5. Spackles and fillers:
a. For interior work at small patches except wood to be stained:
Synkloid "Spackle Paste" or Muralo "Spackle" .
09900-03 EXECUTION
�r
A. INSPECTION: Conditions of surfaces:
1. It is intent of this specification that painter receive surfaces
from others ready for finishing with whatever cleaning, sand-
papering, defect fillings and other preparative processing that
is necessary and not specified in other sections.
2 . Examine surfaces before starting work and if surface to be
kw finished is not in condition specified in other sections, ready
for painter's preparation, immediately notify General Contractor
and Architect in writing, or assume responsibility for and
r rectify unsatisfactory finish which may result.
9-z7
09900-03
3 . Application of paint materials without objection to surface or
job conditions constitutes acceptance of these conditions by
painter.
B. PREPARATION: Prepare surfaces for painting by such means as
necessary to secure permanent bond for paint and to provide finish
free of objectional blemishes.
1. Wood surfaces:
a. Wash sap spots and knots with Mineral Spirits, then coat
knots and sap streaks with know sealer.
b. Putty and spackle, over dry primer, to bring filler material,
when dry, flush with adjoining surface. Fill nail holes,
cracks, open joints and defects.
c. Stained and varnished work sanded to unblemished condition.
Sand again after tinted repair filler work is completed.
Tint filler to hide defects and nail holes. Permit no
visible sanding scratches.
2 . Ferrous metal: Remove foreign matter from unprimed surface by
such means as necessary to produce rust free, bright metal
surface with minimum of sound metal removed, then immediately
prime.
3 . Zinc coated metal: Clean to free of contaminant condition by
washing with Mineral Spirits, then immediately prime.
C. APPLICATION:
1. Paint all exposed surfaces in-place work noted, scheduled or
specified in this section to be painted. "Exposed surface"
means surface of in-place work accessible to painter with paint
brush. In addition, paint following thus:
a. Visible surfaces behind mechanical grilles and louvers.
Paint these surfaces 2 coats flat black.
b. Exposed surfaces of electrical conduit and boxes, plumbing
fire protection, heating and control piping work in spaces
with no other color coat printing required per this section.
Paint per APE/2C (one prime coat and two equipment enamel
color coats) in color to match background behind these items.
c. Mechanical sheetmetal ducts insulated pipes and miscellaneous
sheetmetal: Paint per ACP (one coat primer, 2 coats
Krillicon) .
�r
d. Paint all external surfaces of interior and exterior steel
doors, including access doors and visible surfaces of instal-
led steel door frames, except surfaces concealed by hinges
and wall finish, 2 coats of All Purpose Equipment Enamel over
prime coats by door manufacturer.
e. Surfaces requiring paint under work of this section which
will become inaccessible for painting after installations
required by other sections: Coordinate painting with work of
other sections. Before final placement of hardware,
l,+
9-z8
09900-03
fixtures, finish plates, grilles, louvers, signs, convector
covers and similar items, arrange for opportunity to finish
areas and items that cannot be properly finished when such
items are in place, including grilles and louvers required to
be spray painted.
2 . Methods for application of paint materials:
a. Apply materials on all surfaces by rollers, except as noted
thus:
(1) Brush apply on millwork, handrails, conduit and similar
irregular shapes.
(2) Brush apply on hollow metal doors, hollow metal frames,
and similar broad metal surfaces. Immediately following
brush application of each coat, roll out paint with
short napped roller to give ligth "orangepeel" texture.
(3) Spray paint grilled and louvers specified painted by
painting subcontractor with hydro-spray (airless)
equipment at off-site location or at time and in pro-
tected on-site location.
b. Where painting subcontractor believes spray application of a
paint material will produce superior job, submit written
request to use spray method, stating material to be applied
and type of spray equipment used. Upon approval, employ
approved method, equipment and material on approved surfaces.
c. Roller application: Apply material with roller strokes in
both directions so as not to leave roller marks or excessive
build-up of material at laps. Make final direction of
rolling vertical.
v 3 . Priming: Treated, prime coat painted and sealed wood required
per other sections does not eliminate any coat specified in
this section.
a. Face, back, edge and end prime all wood to be painted.
b. Prime paint wood requiring priming with specified first coat
material except prime concealed portions to receive NV
4 finish with sealing satin only.
c. Prime paint metal, wood and plywood items requiring primer
coat under work of this section after fitting and before
jobsite assembly and installation.
d. Prime all ungalvanized ferrous metal not specified primed by
supplier and not otherwise indicated to be primed. See
09900-02-A for priming of galvanized metal.
4 . Do not apply, spill or overspray paint materials onto copper,
bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum,
plastics. Do not prime or paint miscellaneous steel items above
ceilings, unless otherwise specified in this section.
5. All coatings evenly spead on or flowed on, and free of runs,
sags, crawling or other defects.
6. No succeeding coats applied until preceding coat is thoroughly
dry and, at wood and metal, has been sanded, unless specifically
noted otherwise by paint material manufacturer.
9.29
09900-03
7 . Hand sand with #0 sandpaper or finer as necessary to prevent
visible sand scratches, all woodwork surfaces before first coat
and between succeeding coats and dust clean except sand wood
doors lightly with 3/0 and 5/0 sandpaper using finest abrasive
sandpaper which will remove handling markes and effects of
moisture.
8. Putty and filler compound applied after surface is primed and
primer is dry.
9. Apply coatings without reduction except as specifically required
by label directions.
10. Adulteration of materials not permitted. Adulteration means
subsitution in part or whole of material without Owner's
authorization.
11. Vary shade of paint in succeeding color coats to facilitate
inspection.
D. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
1. Provide finished work free of all dust and damage.
2 . All moving parts left in proper working order.
3 . Remove or correct any defects resulting from painting work.
4. Remove from site all surplus materials, rubbish and debris
resulting from painting subcontractor's activity.
5. Clean all stains resulting from this work from hardware, floors,
glass and other surfaces. Use materials and methods recommended
by manufacturer of stained material for removing stains.
n
dA'
rt
9-30
dr
1W
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10110
+ FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10110-01 GENERAL
A. Fire Extinguishers: 10 lb. ABC multi-purpose dry chemical
Amerex #441 or General TGP O-F with all metal valve works.
(15 total, incl. one Gen. Data Halon 1211 in telemetry room)
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
1. FEC #1: J. L. Industries: 1029V10, Academy Series,
i"► dark bronze anondized finish, surface mounted, con-
temporary V door style, door glazing 10 (double strength
glass) , options: aluminum tub, dark bronze color: trim
and door. (3 total) .
2. FEC #2: J. L. Industries: 1027V10, Academy Series,
iw dark bronze anodized finish, recessed mounted with 22"
RT trim style, contemporary V door style, door glazing
10 (double strength glass) , options: aluminum tub, dark
bronze color: trim and door. (6 total) .
C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets:
F
1. Provide and install standard "J" hook wall bracket
furnished with fire extinguisher. (6 total) .
FOLDING STAIRWAY SECTION 10120
10120-01 GENERAL
ow
A. Provide and install one (1) Bessler space saver folding attic
folding stairway 22" x 54" in Room 206 .
' ENTRANCE MATS SECTION 10130
it
10130-01 GENERAL
A. Provide and install FABCO entrance mats (pedigrid/petimat)
(carpet tread) at doors 1, 2, 27, and 31. Mats are 1/2"
thick and are installed in 3/8" recessed concrete outside of
doors. For doors 1 and 2 : 6 ' x 3 ' . For doors 27 and 31:
3 ' x 3 ' . (Color of carpet to be selected by owner) .
10-1
}
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
METAL TOILET PARTITION SECTION 10162
10162-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide overhead supported metal toilet compartments where
shown.
2 . Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing blocking in frame partitions and ceilings for
mounting toilet compartments in Section 06110, Framing &
Sheathing.
b. Providing toilet room accessories in Section 10810. 1.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Approved manufacturers: Global, Sanymetal, Robart, Knicker-
bocker, Weis or approved.
2 . Acceptable installer: Regularly engaged in toiled compartment
installation work for past 2 years on comparable size and type
of project.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Submit shop drawings to indicate size and arrangements of com-
partments. Show door swing, locations of loafer rails, typical
elevations, all pilaster sizes and anchorage details. Submit
per 01340-01.
2. Submit color samples on printed color card. 2 cards required.
10162-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Compartments and pilasters:
a. Galvanized and bonderized steel with minimum zinc coating of
15 mils each surface.
b. All door, panel and pilaster surfaces finished with baked
enamel of colors selected by Architect from a minimum of 18
different colors standard with the manufacturer.
2 . Hardware and accessories:
a. Pilaster shoes minimum 22 gage stainless steel or chrome
plated cast non-ferrous metal.
b. Hinges recessed and concealed gravity type with s.s. pintles.
c. Loafer rail: Extruded aluminum anti-grip headrail with end
caps.
d. Furnish one coat hook for each compartment; combination coat
hook bumper where in-swinging doors occur; bumpers on out-
swinging doors.
e. All other hardware bright finished cast non-ferrous metal or
s.s. ; (aluminum acceptable only for wall brackets. All
finish on aluminum parts anodized to same Aluminum Associa-
tion designation) .
f. All mechanical fastenings vandalproof type.
10-2
A
-02
10162
B. FABRICATION:
1. Compartment: Ceiling supported with headrail.
kw a. Doors, panels and pilasters constructed of two sheets of 20
ith fiberboard or honeycomb
gage steel (doors 22 gage) w
filler cemented under pressure.
b. Doors and panel thickness: 1" .
c. Pilaster thickness: 1 1/411.
d. Openings in partitions required for toilet room accessories
are to be framed to size per approved toilet room accessory
shop drawings. Frame edge construction to be same as parti-
tion perimeter detail.
2 . Size:
a. Pilasters: All stalls with doors, minimum pilaster size 6",
maximum 1011, no intermixing of sizes permitted.
b. Compartment size and arrangement:
.► (1) Handicapped stalls with out-swinging doors: 36: wide x
58" deep.
(2) Other compartments: 58" deep x width to fill opening
between walls.
3 . All other fabrication per manufacturer's standard details and
approved shop drawings.
10162-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION: Install work per Architect approved shop drawings.
*w
B. ADJUSTING:
1. Adjust hardware for proper operation.
2. Set hinges to hold doors uniformly ajar when not latched.
C. CLEANING & TOUCH-UP: After completion of installation, clean and
polish exposed compartment surfaces and touch-up minor scratches.
SECTION 10441
w. PLASTIC RELIEF SIGNS 10441-01 PRODUCTS
A. Provide twenty (20) plastic relief signs as prescribed by owner.
(Post as required) .
10-3
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES SECTION 10810
10810-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTIONS:
1. Provide toilet and locker room accessories at locations shown
on drawings.
2. Related work in other sections includes: R
a. Providing backing for mounting accessories in Section 06110,
Framing & Sheathing.
b. Providing toilet compartments in Section 10162, Metal Toilet
Partitions.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Qualifications of manufacturer: Manufacturer's
names and catalog numbers listed below establish standard of
quality required, but are not restrictive. Similar and equal
products of other manufacturers may be substituted with Architect's
approval.
C. SUBMITTAL: Submit rough-in drawings for use in locating backing
and frame recess.
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING.
1. Deliver product in manufacturer's original, unopened and un-
damaged packages with labels legible and intact.
2. Identify manufacturer, brand name, size, finish and location.
3. Store in unopened packages in manner to prevent damage from
environment and construction operations.
4. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Replace damaged items.
10810-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Mirrors: 1/4" plate 60" high x 48" wide with 1" beveled
edge with chrome clips installed in Rooms 106,
107, 108, 124 and 125 (5 total) .
1/4" plate 72" wide x 48" wide with chrome clips
in Room 205
2. Medicine Cabinets: Bobrick B-398 recessed medicine cabinets
with mirror installed in Room 108 (west wall near
lay. ) and Room 218 (directly above wall lay. ) f
3. Shower Door: Holcam Model MX 35-36. Chrome frame with
obscure glass, standard height 63h" . Adjust to
width 354" to 36411 . Install in Room 205.
r
10-4
r
10810-02
4. Grab bars: Bobrick B-6206 Series, concealed mounting,
1Y" O.D. x 18 gage wall thickness, stainless
steel with satin finish. Each concealed
mounting with 4 tamperproof stainless steel
Allen head screws. Anchor to vertical sur-
face by means capable of sustaining 500 lb.
load. Clearance between wall and grab bar
must be 1h" minimum. Install a 36" and 42"
grab bar in Rooms 106 and 107, the two
handicapped toilets. (2 bars per toilet) .
5. Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptables: Bobrick B-3944 .
Recessed cabinet, equipped with satin finish
stainless steel door. One each in Rooms
106, 107 , 124 and 125. Installation of
this unit in Rooms 106 and 107 must be at
it handicapped height.
Bobrick B-369. Recessed cabinet, satin
finish stainless steel. One each in Rooms
108 and 218 .
6 . Toilet Paper Dispensers: Bobrick B-288 surface mounted
multi-roll toilet tissue dispenser. Stain-
steel satin finish. One installed at each
toilet in Rooms 106, 107 , 108, 127 , 125,
205 and 218 . (12 total) .
7 . Soap Dispensers: Bobrick B-8221. One at each lavatory
i1w in Rooms 106, 107 , 108 , 124 and 125. (5 total) .
8 . Soap Dishes : Surface mounted ceramic tile in shower
room, near Room 205. (2 total) .
VW
10810-03 EXECUTION
iW A. INSTALLATION:
1. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's directions
in locations indicated on drawings. Exercise special care to
W install in a rigid and secure manner using mechanical fasteners
only, not adhesive.
2. Coordinate grab bar and napkin disposal installation with
toilet compartment installation.
B. ADJUSTING: Adjust hardware and operating mechanisms for proper
operation.
C. CLEAN-UP:
1. All accessories clean and acceptable for normal maintenance
procedures.
2. Remove packaging materials from site.
10-5
r.
w.
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11000
91�
APPLIANCES SECTION 11300
A. DESCRIPTION:
1. Provide and install in accordance with manufacturer' s
specifications.
r► 2. Related work in other sections.
a. Division 16 - Electrical
b. Disision 12 - Plastic laminate - Casework
C. Division 5 - Sheetmetal - Ductwork
d. Division 15 - Mechanical
' B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Qualified Manufacturer: General Electric or owner approved
equal.
C. MATERIALS LIST:
Provided &
Item Quantity Number Installed by Color
Refrigerator, 2-door, To be deter-
"' No Frost, 19 . 7 Cu.Ft. 2 TFX 27F Owner mined later
Built-in cook tops, 30" 2 J.P. 651 Owner of
Spacemaker microwave
exhaust fan combina-
tion, 30" 2 J.V.M. 48 Owner "
Dishwasher w/potscrub,
30" 1 GSD 1000G Contractor "
Washer (large capacity) 1 Used Owner N/A
Dryer (large capacity) 1 Used Owner N/A
(Electric)
r
Garbage Disposer 2 * Contractor
*In-Sink-Erator stainless steel Classic. Stainless steel
lugs, continuous feed, automatic reversing action, with
1 HP capacitor start motor, corrosion protection shield,
self-service wrenchette, 5-year warranty on parts and labor.
11-1
,wr►
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
PREFABRICATED PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK SECTION 12310
12310-01 GENERAL
A. DESCRIPTION:
too 1. Provide casework shown in the plans in the following areas:
2. Related work in other sections includes:
a. Providing general millwork, wood trim items and wood blocking
AW in wood frame walls where required for fastening casework in
Division 6.
b. Providing sinks and sink trim in Division 15, Mechanical,
including piping work serving same, unless otherwise
specified in Section 12310.
c. Providing electrical work in or on casework in Division 16,
Electrical.
hr 3. Definitions: Per "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and
Guide Specifications" of Architectural Woodwork Institute,
except as otherwise defined in Section 12310. "Or equal" shall
be understood to mean "as standard" with below listed qualified
manufacturer only when manufacturer lists other than specified-
material in his catalog for herein specified usage.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1. Qualified manufacturers: Submit catalog of selected manufac-
turer for approval.
iW 2 . Qualified installers:
a. Trained journeyman, each with minimum of 3 years experience
on equivalent size projects in installations of type required
on Project.
b. Installers employed by either casework manufacturer or
authorized representative of casework manufacturer.
C. Installation work force under direct supervision of casework
manufacturer's authorized representative.
C. SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings per 01340-01
for Architect's approval and corrections before fabrication of
casework. Show materials, dimensions, locations for electrical
runs, fittings, hardware and other accessories. Locate sink
centerlines for guidance of other trades. Show connections of
cases to each other and to adjacent work, whether or not all
materials are furnished by casework fabricator. Show joint
locations in countertops and show methods of anchoring casework
to building.
2 . Rough-in drawings: Provide 4 sets of rough-in drawings promptly
after award of contract for use by mechanical and electrical
subcontractors. Indicate locations of sinks, sink trim,
electrical outlets, path for wiring, etc.
3 . Samples: Submit samples of laminated plastic countertop cover-
ing, laminated plastic facing and lining materials and plastic
molding materials for color selection. Obtain approval before
fabrication from Owner.
12-I
(fir
12310-01
D. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING:
1. Deliver, store and handle cabinets in manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
2 . Defer delivery to job until installation and storage areas are
complete and dry of all wet-type construction.
3 . Maintain relative humidity in storage areas not to exceed 60%.
4 . Protect all surfaces of cabinets subject to damage while in
transit and storage.
5. Provide temporary skids under all large or heavy units.
E. JOB CONDITIONS:
1. Environmental requirements: Per 01513, Temporary Heat &
Ventilation.
2. Sequencing: Deliver casework to area where installation is
required after acoustical work is installed in that area.
12310-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Vertical surfacing high pressure plastic laminate, .208" to
. 036" thick of Formica, or Wilson-Art, of one sheen, and one
manufacture. Pattern will be selected by Architect from all
standard patterns of manufacturer casework subcontractor elects
to use. In general, exterior of casework units will have all
vertical surfaces of same pattern throughout Project.
2 . Colored high pressure plastic laminate backing sheet: Neutral
color, 0.020" to 0. 035" +/- 0.004" thick, matte finish.
3 . Cabinet liner: Formica cabinet liner grade, 0. 020" +/- 0. 004"
thick, in one color throughout project as selected by Architect.
4 . Countertops and backsplashes: High pressure plastic laminate:
0.051" +/- 0. 004" thick, NEMA Forming Grade, Textolite or
Formica or Wilson-Art. Color in any one room or space will be
same. Color as selected by Architect from all standard patterns
and solid colors of one manufacture. Exposed edges finished
with same plastic laminate as tops. Backing sheet: Formica,
or equal, 0.062" +/- 0.004" thick. Laminating cements: "Heat
Resistant" type as recommended by Formica for conditions
involved.
5. Plywood and finish lumber:
a. Plywood: Interior Grade B-B plywood, 3/4" thick, unless
other thickness shown, except 1" thick for shelve spanning
over 42" and 1/2" thick for backs of units exposed on
exterior. Plywood option in lieu of particleboard finished
with cabinet liner at "semi-exposed" vertical interior sur-
faces of ends and dividers: 3/4" thick HDO plywood.
b. Waterproof plywood: Exterior grade B-B plywood per PS 1-74 ,
1/2" thick.
c. Lumber: "C&Btr" Finish per WCLIB Standard Grading Rules.
6. Particleboard: Minimum 45 lb./cu. ft. density. Moisture
content: 8%, maximum. Maximum warp in 48" of 0. 004" per foot.
11/16" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
12-2
-rrr
12310-02
Imo. 7. High density overlaid plywood: HDO-EXT-DFPA.
8. Hardware: As follows "or equal" per 12310-01-A.
a. Hinges: National Lock or Stanley, 2 1/2" high, flat button
or button tip, loose pin, steel, Stanley, size No. 2 . Black
`" finish
b. Pulls for doors and drawers: National Lock. Finish black.
c. Catches:
+ (1) Magnetic: Ives in brown metallic lacquer. Use on doors
without cabinet locks; on active leaf of doors; and
provide 2 catches at doors over 50" high.
(2) Elbow catches and surface bolts: For inactive leaf or
pairs of doors at doors with cabinet locks:
Doors up to 36" high . . . . . . . . One Ives elbow catch
Doors over 36" high. . . . . . . . . Two Ives surface
bolts, 9" top and
12" bottom.
t`w
(3) Magnetic and elbow catches on inactive leaf at doors in
pairs with cabinet lock: Use one magnetic at bottom of
door and one elbow at upper part of door. Elbow catch -
Ives. Magnetic catch - Ives.
d. Roller guide for drawers:
(1) Typical drawers: Grant or Knape & Vogt.
(2) Shallow drawers: Grant where front to back length inside
of drawer is less than 12".
e. Drawer bumpers: Rubber, Glynn Johnson, 2 per drawer.
w, f. Adjustable shelf clips: Knape & Vogt.
g. Clothes hanging poles: 1 1/16" chrome plated.
h. Fastenings: All cabinet hardware requiring wood screws for
fastening furnished with COARSE THREAD SCREWS (Sheet Metal
Type "A" or "AB") finish to match cabinet hardware. All
screws for assembly and mounting of casework, except where
machine screws are required, of coarse thread ("A" or "AB")
type with corrosion resistant finish, such as "Parkerized" ,
at concealed locations and cadmium plating where exposed.
All with "Phillips" type screwdriver slots.
w i. Provide all other hardware in or on prefabricated plastic
laminate casework units as indicated on drawings except
cabinet locks.
B. FABRICATION:
1. Sizes: Unless otherwise noted, sizes shown on plans and on
elevations at each unit of casework indicate width, height and
o► depth, respectively, of that casework unit in inches. Actual
dimensions determined thus:
a. Width: As shown when both exterior sides of unit are exposed,
w excluding overhangs of countertop at base units, as shown
when one side is exposed and other side abuts another case-
work unit, excluding side overhang of base unit countertop;
4 and as shown when unit is between other abutting units. For
unit abutting wall as side of unit, add any amount between
it 12.5
12310-02
1/2" and 1 1/4" to width shown on drawings for this unit,
thus allowing for scribing work at wall. For units abutting
other units at right angles, such as at a room corner where
casework occurs on both walls and blind corner unit is not
required, add equally to widths shown for corner units any
amount between 1/2" and 1 1/411, so all corner units in same
space have equal width corner filler strips, scribe fitted.
b. Height: Dimension shown is distance from finished floor to
top of countertop at base units and top of top on full height
unit, including 4 1/4" for toespace. Dimension shown for
wall hung upper units is from bottom of unit to top of unit.
Table, desk and bench heights shown are from floor to top of
unit's top. Top of end standards flush with top of unit's
top at full height and wall hung units. Bottom edges of
doors and end standards at wall hung units flush with unit's
bottom.
c. Depth: Dimension shown at base unit is depth of countertop
from wall, including an allowance of 3/4" for overhang of
countertop at front of unit. Backs of units shown with backs
against wall to be as close to wall as possible . Dimension
shown at upper units and full height units is distance from
wall to front face of door or drawer at closed units and to
furthest projection from wall at open fronted units mounted
against wall. For free standing units, depth shown does not
include any countertop overhangs and is from finished face to
finished face or finished back above toespace level.
d. Other dimensions, unless otherwise indicated in qualified
manufacturer's catalog.
(1) Shelves:
(a) Depth: For adjustable (in height) shelves: 1/4"
less than distance from interior face or unit's back
to front edge of standards at open shelving and
1 3/4" less than distance between these same surfaces
at exposed face frame units with doors in front of
shelving.
(b) Length of adjustable shelves: 3/16" less than clear
distance between standards supporting shelves.
(c) Height adjustment for adjustable shelve: 1"
increments of height.
(d) Thickness: See 12310-02-B1-d(3) .
(2) Drawer sizes: Inside length of drawers (from front to
back) not less that 3 1/4" less than depth of casework
unit, excluding countertop overhang. Inside width of
drawers maximum possible, allowing for attachment of
roller guides per guide manufacturer's details. Assume
drawer fronts are of equal height in a casework unit,
unless otherwise indicated. Height of drawer sides
above top of drawer bottom:
�w
12-4
err
12310-02
r (a) Drawer immediately below countertop: 2 1/2" minimum,
which allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top
of front 1/8" below bottom of countertop, except this
dimension 3 3/4" minimum where no drawer occurs below
top drawer.
(b) Bottom drawer in bank of drawers" 3" minimum, which
allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top of
drawer bottom 1 5/8" above bottom of casework bottom.
(c) Drawers between top and bottom drawer: 3" minimum,
which allows minimum of 5" high drawer front with top
of drawer front 1 3/4" below top of drawer next
above.
(3) Thicknesses: See 12310-02-B5 for tops.
(a) Shelves: 3/4" to 42" span; 1" over 42" span. These
thicknesses for core only of plastic laminate faced
shelves.
(b) Divider and end standard cores: Each casework unit
with own 11/16" sides at both sides to give 3/4"
(finished thickness) end standards and 1 7/16"
divider where two casework units abut at sides,
1 60 except at open shelving.
(c) Door and drawer fronts: 11/16" cores.
(d) Drawer sides and drawer backs: 1/211, minimum.
(e) Bottoms at all units and tops of units without
AW countertops: 3/411, nominal.
(f) Drawer bottoms, dust panels and vertical dividers
within units: 1/411 .
tW (g) Casework backs: 1/4" where exterior face of back is
concealed and 1/2" elsewhere.
(h) Scribe strips: 3/411.
rw (4) Job dimensions: Verify dimensions of spaces for all
casework locations in building and verify locations of
related work by other trades which enter into casework.
2 . Machining, fitting and joining: All parts machined for
accurate fit, with rounded corners on drawer fronts and door
corners. Assemble to produce true, square, level, plumb and
rigid units. Assemble with quantity of fastenings and type
y , of adhesive capable of sustaining all loads so joined
materials fail before joint separation occurs. In general,
and unless otherwise indicated in qualified manufacturer's
catalog, fasten thus:
a. Glue continuous full length of joints where gluing is re-
quired. Metallic fasteners concealed, unless otherwise
noted. Screws with sheet metal type "A" or "AB" threads,
black, cadmium or chrome plated where exposed. Minimum
penetration of fastener into edge of material fastened to:
1", unless otherwise noted. Into board face: Penetration to
within 1/8" of opposite face of board material.
b. Base unit bottom to ends: Glue and staple with concealed
coated staples.
it
�w.
12-5
w
i,
12310-0
c. Bottoms to bases: Flush, countersunk, flat head, Phillips
head screws in neat, symmetrical arrangement or, if levelers
are used #8 wood screws thru holes in levelers at each cor-
ner of each unit and leveler adjusting hole in base capped
with chrome plated steel or inconspicuous color plastic
drive-in cap.
d. Web frames and/or subtops to unit ends and dividers: Glue
and nail at 4" o.c. , plus screw at each front corner of unit
with two 1 3/4" x #8 screws. All metallic fasteners
concealed.
e. Wall unit's top and bottom to unit ends: Glue, screw and f
staple with coated staples. All metallic fasteners con-
cealed. Minimum of four 1 3/4" x #8 screws per end.
f. Full height unit's top and bottom to ends: Glue and minimum
of four 1 3/4" x #8 screws. Conceal metallic fasteners.
g. Backs to ends, divider standards, top of upper wall hung
units, bottoms, web frames and subtop and fixed shelves: `
Glue, staple and screw at single faced units. Glue and
staple at double faced units. Screws, #6, at not more than
12" o.c. and staples at 4" o.c. Backs set into dado at
double faced units glued and stapled at approximately 4"
o.c. , with staples driven at line of junction between back
and standards to minimize exposure of fastener heads.
h. Top to back of wall hung upper units: In addition to
fastenings per "g" above, use 3/4" x 3/4" x 1/16" aluminum
angle, Alcoa No. 78-K, or equal, continuous full inside
width of unit, located at exposed interior intersection of
top with back. Angle secured to top with 1/2: x #8 screws
at 6" o.c. thru top leg of angle into unit's top.
i. Scribe pieces: Secure with brads at 4" o.c. , driven from
exterior of casework unit, not thru interior finish.
3 . Scribe pieces: Locate per typical details.
4 . Surface finishes, unless otherwise indicated in qualified
manufacturer's catalog or otherwise shown.
a. Exposed vertical exterior surfaces, except scribe pieces,
and countertop backsplash surfaces, finished with vertical
surfacing high pressure plastic laminate. "Exposed' means
exposed to view in finished project. "Exterior" means the
outside of casework unit. "Surface" means a face, not an
edge such as that on the least dimension of a piece of
particleboard.
b. Exposed vertical interior surfaces of ends and dividers at
open (without doors) casework units finished with same
vertical surfacing high pressure plastic laminate as exterior
exposed vertical surfaces.
c. Following surfaces finished with cabinet liner, unless other-
wise indicated in qualified casework manufacturer's catalog:
(1) Top and bottom of adjustable shelves.
(2) Semi-exposed vertical interior surfaces of ends and
dividers. "Semi-exposed vertical interior surfaces"
means vertical surfaces behind opaque doors and vertical 4;
surfaces to minimum of 6" back of front of drawer fronts
12--6
12310-02
inside units housing drawers. At contractor's option,
3/4" thick HDO plywood may be substituted for particle-
board core and cabinet liner omitted on semi-exposed
vertical interior surfaces.
(3) Top of casework unit's bottom and bottom of top, except
bottom of countertop.
(4) Bottom of upper wall hung unit's bottom, regardless of
height of bottom from floor.
(5) Back face of doors and back face of drawer fronts.
d. Following surfaces finished with high pressure plastic
laminate backing sheet.
(1) Underside of countertops at sinks set in plastic laminate
covered tops.
(2) Underside of table tops with plastic laminate finish to
top.
(3) Underside of tops not attached to casework unit where top
is plastic laminate finish.
(4) Wherever unsupported area of top exceeds 6 square feet
and is finished on top surface with plastic laminate.
e. Following surfaces finished with 0. 051" Forming Grade of
1/16" General Purpose colored high pressure plastic laminate:
Exposed face of scribe pieces.
f. Other surfaces: Natural characteristics of specified
material, without further finishing of surface, except
iW countertops and backsplashes fabricated and finished per
following paragraph.
5. Fabrication and finish of countertops and backsplashes:
Backsplashes 3/4" thick and 4" high, unless otherwise shown.
Joints located to minimize number of joints and prominence of
locations in finish material. Backsplash and endsplash of
plastic finish coved integrally into countertop. High pressure
plastic laminate. Fabricate per Formica Specifications with
materials specified except overall nosing height 3/411 . End-
splashes of same height as backsplashes are required at case-
work ends abutting vertical surfaces where backsplashes are also
required, except at abutting "vertical surface" plastic laminate
surfaces.
6. Edge finishes:
a. Plastic "T" type edges: Install on:
(1) Front edge of shelves.
(2) Partitions inside casework units, except hardboard
divider partitions.
(3) Front edge of fixed bottom shelf (case unit bottom)
behind doors.
r (4) Drawer sides and backs at top edge and all four edges
of drawer fronts.
(5) All other exposed edge locations not shown or specified
to receive other edge treatment.
(6) Edges of doors.
b. High pressure plastic laminate edges: 0.051" countertop type
material:
�r.
2-?
4W
12310-02
(1) Vertical edges of countertops and edges of backsplashes
which are covered with high pressure plastic laminate,
glued full height of counter edges, full width of back-
splash edges, and with extension for scribing to abutting
vertical surfaces at backsplashes. Color to match
countertop and backsplash color. occurs on all four
edges of island type units.
(2) Exterior exposed divider standards, end standards and
scribe pieces. Field applied on standards in one piece
width where two casework units are side-by-side. Where
end standard edge at back of wall attached unit is
exposed due to close proximity to an "outside" corner of
space or to ground level window, etc. , this edge also
requires edge finish.
c. Countertop and backsplash edges: End splashes of same
materials as tops where backsplashes are shown, unless other-
wise specifically noted on drawings, finished same as back-
splashed: Plastic laminate edges: Per Formica speci-
fications, Cove Type Countertop, with specified materials.
7 . Core and board material locations, unless otherwise specified as
qualified casework manufacturer's catalog:
a. Countertops and backsplashes: As specified per top fabri-
cation for type finish shown.
b. Plywood:
(1) Scribe strips or, at Contractor's option, of solid
lumber.
(2) At Contractor's option, for following locations: "
(a) Toeboards at toespaces in lieu of solid lumber.
(b) Concealed web or skeleton framing in lieu of solid
lumber.
(c) Any location where 11/1611, 3/4" or 1" board core
material is required, except doors and countertops,
in lieu of particleboard. Make plywood substitution
in same, or thicker, thickness as required for
particleboard, i.e. 3/4" plywood for 11/16" particle-
board.
c. Particleboard:
(1) End and divider standards.
(2) Bottoms (bases) of base, wall hung and full height units.
(3) Tops of upper wall hung units.
(4) Doors, removable panels and backs exposed on units
exterior.
(5) Drawer fronts, sides and backs.
(6) Shelves.
(7) Backs of free standing units where back is exposed.
d. Hardboard, light duty, 1/4" thick:
(1) Drawer bottoms.
(2) Backs of wall hung upper units.
(3) Backs of wall mounted base units.
(4) Dividers subdividing interiors of units thus:
(a) Mounted vertically at subdivided units.
IZ 8
err
12310-02
w► 8. Detailed assembly requirements:
a. Bases:
(1) Construct base supports for fixed units with top at level
line 4 1/4" (+/- 1/811) above floor slab or underlayment
or floor finish, face of toeboard straight and in longest
continuous pieces practical, using 3/411, 5/4" or 8/4"
stock, depending on job conditions. Rigidly secure
toeboard to casework bottom.
(2) At casework manufacturer's option, use base levelers in
lieu of shimming base supports, providing bottom of toe-
board is not more than 5/16" above substrate for floor
finish at any point and toeboard is rigidly secured to
bottom of casework unit. Provide continuous backing for
attaching room finish base material to kickboard, using
longest practical lengths of 1/4" hardboard to face
kickboards when casework units are constructed as indi-
vidual units on unit principal. Secure base levelers to
give blocks on bottom of case bottom so lower edge of
metal bracket supporting leveler foot is approximately
flush with bottom edge of kickspace toeboard. Screw
fasten leveler bracket at all holes in bracket using
largest size screw bracket will accommodate and with top
of bracket resting firmly on glue blocks.
Itw b. Web frames: Provide web frames or solid subtop immediately
under countertops, except above top drawers immediately under
solid subtops; and web frames at top of doors immediately
below drawer. At Contractor's option, partial web frame of
• plywood or particleboard, extending not less than one-half
depth of unit, may be substituted for full web frame at top
of doors immediately below drawer. Locate partial web frame
at front of unit.
c. Backs:
(1) Backs fully overlap following back edges:
(a) Top web frame or subtop of base units.
(b) Fixed shelves.
(c) Divider standards, except at double faced units.
(d) Concealed end standards, except at double faced
units.
(2) Backs at double faced units installed per "d" below.
(3) Backs rabbeted into and overlap minimum of 3/4 of width
of following back edges:
(a) Bottoms of upper wall hung units.
(b) Tops of full height and wall hung units where a
plastic laminate finish is required on top surface
of these tops.
(c) Exposed exterior end standards of upper wall hung
units.
d. Double faced units: Construct base units under 4' high with
separate backs for each face; common ends with one piece
core, and common top with one piece core, not joined length-
wise of assembly.
12-9
�r
12310-02
e. Drawers: Sides, front of box and back lock-shouldered.
Applied front (overlaying front) screwed to box front with 2
or more screws from inside box. Bottoms housed in dado at
front, sides and back. Bottoms glued and stapled in dado.
Drawers mounted on specified type roller guides corresponding
to type of drawer or unit indicated. Stop drawers with two
rubber silencers per drawer, located to contact roller guides
drawer removal trip lever.
f. Shelves: Adjustable for height in unit at i" intervals.
Holes for shelf clips 1" from front and back edges of
Shelves.
g. Face rails and valance boards: Required only at sink units,
unless otherwise shown. Height of rail same dimension as
depth of sink below cabinet top. ,
9. Install hardware per shop drawings and hardware manufacturer's
directions. Install 3 hinges per door on doors over 48" high.
12310-03 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION:
1. Set casework bases accurately in place and level. Secure bases
to floor, except at wall attached units, to prevent tipping or
dislodging of casework unit. Consider peninsular shaped units
as not wall attached.
2 . Fit scribe pieces accurately to abutting vertical surfaces.
Secure scribe pieces only to casework unit, using concealed
fastenings. Front face of plastic laminate on scribe piece
flush with front face of kickspace toeboard at wall side of J
exposed end standards, unless otherwise detailed on drawings.
3 . Set casework accurately on base, level and plumb. Install
attaching devices, closures and trim members required.
4 . Install continuous 1/4" hardboard kickboard cover on casework
units built on unit principal, closely fitted to underside of
units bottom and not over 5/16" above substrate for floor
covering. All joints over solid backing. Nail heads set flush,
ready to receive room base.
5. Scribe fit upper wall hung casework units.
6. Secure casework units at walls thus:
a. Base units: Secure to studs with #8 or larger screws at not
more than 32" o.c. Locate screws as closely as possible to
junction of units back with top web frame or subtop and as
close to corner of units as possible. If fastener if thru
1/4" back, shim between back and wall finish at fastener
locations to prevent distortion of back. Fasten with oval
head screws with finishing rings. Screws to penetrate wood
studs minimum of 1" and metal studs minimum of 1/211 . At
concrete or masonry walls, use Rawl "Caulk-Ins" with #8
machine screws or, for hollow units, Rawl "Spring-Wings" with
3/16" bolt, also oval head and with finishing ring when thru
1/4" back.
12-10
tirr
12310-03
b. Wall hung units: Secure near top of unit same as for base
units, except fasteners at 16" o.c. , maximum. Secure round
head fasteners at top thru aluminum angle, without finishing
rings and secure units near bottom, approximately 2" above
top of bottom, same as for base units.
c. Wall mounted units: Secure to backing with #10 or larger
screws at approximately 16" o.c. thru back, using finishing
r.r rings. Screws to penetrate into backing minimum of 1 1/211 .
Place screws symmetrically and in two horizontal rows near
top and bottom of unit, equally spaced from ends. Shim
behind back of unit, same as for base units.
7 . Tops: Install high pressure laminate plastic tops with scribe
fit at ends abutting vertical surface plastic laminate and with
backsplashes and endsplashes scribed to walls. Secure tops to
web frames and/or subtops with screws. If joint in core of top
is not on subframe, use continuous 5"-6" wide butt block center-
ed under joint in core, glued and screwed.
8 . Cut all holes in casework units to receive electrical and
mechanical outlets, sink trim and sinks required to be installed
per other sections. Make cutouts in plastic laminates with
rounded corners to prevent laminate cracking per Formica
Casework Specifications.
9. Drill holes for cabinet locks installed by finish carpenters
under work of Section 06200.
B. ADJUSTING: Adjust moving parts to operate freely, without objec-
tionable imperfections. Correct misalignments and improper
clearances.
C. PATCHING AND TOUCH-UP:
1. Where permitted by Architect, touch-up joints and chipped edges
of plastic laminates and countertop materials, using laminate
and countertop material manufacturers touch-up products for
material involved.
,r 2. Secure Architect's approval of means, methods and materials for
other required corrective work.
D. CLEANING:
1. Remove exposed adhesive materials, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer of surface from which adhesive is
removed.
2 . Vacuum clean interior of casework behind doors and inside
drawers.
iw
DRAPERY TRACK SECTION 12510
12510-01 GENERAL.
A. DESCRIPTION: Provide ceiling type surface mounted, traverse
equipped drapery track where shown on drawings.
B. QUALITY MANUFACTURERS: Kirsch, Grant or prior approved.
C. JOB CONDITIONS: Sequencing: Install after ceiling and painting
is completed.
12510-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Track Kirsch Series No. 9047 extruded aluminum.
2 . Equipment:
a. No. 9661 pulley set.
b. No. 9641 tilt-in masters.
c. No. 9670 plain ballbearing carriers with No. 9671 at every
fourth carrier. Provide carriers at 4" o.c. at each track.
d. No. 9921 ballbearing tension pulley.
e. No. 9965 waxed fiberglass centered cord No. 5 size.
f. Additional equipment as required for complete workable
installation.
12510-03 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION: Mount track in recess at window head per details.
12-12
ru
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
r.
INDEX
15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS
15011 General
15012 Drawings
15013 Codes
15014 Equipment , Materials and Workmanship
15015 Substitutions
t
15016 Change Orders
15017 Guaranty
15018 Air Balancing
15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
15051 Pipe and Pipe Fittings
15052 Valves
15053 Piping Specialties
15054 Mechanical Supporting Devices
15055 Mechanical Systems Insulation.
15056 Electrical Work
15057 Miscellaneous
15200 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
it 15201 General
15202 Water Supply Piping
15203 Domestic System
aw
15300 SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
15301 General
15302 Piping
aw 15303 Traps
15304 Flashings
15305 Cleanouts
irr 15306 Floor Drains
5� 307 Catch—Ba---in
15308 Ran—holes
15309 Downspout Connection
15440 SPECIAL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
15441 General
15442 Underground Storage Tanks
15443 Air Compressor
15444 Car - Truck Hoist
,W 15445 Service Equipment
15460 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
15461 General
%W 15462 Plumbing Fixtures
15463 Hydrants & Hose Bibbs
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
INDEX - Continued
15800 AIR CONDITIONING
15801 General
15802 Dampers
15803 Ductwork
15804 Air Diffusers, Registers and Grilles
15805 Furnaces
15806 Unit Heater
15807 Radiant Heating System
15808 Infrared Heater
15809 Ceiling Exhaust Fan
15810 Roof Exhaust Fans
15900 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15920 MOTOR CONTROLS
5
r
ikw
�r
taw
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS'
15011 GENERAL
iW
a. The General Conditions and Requirements listed in index of
the specifications apply to the work under this Division. Plans
and specifications cover furnishing of all labor , materials,
equipment , tools , and apparatus necessary for and reasonable,
incidental to the installation of complete air conditioning and
plumbing systems, as indicated on the drawings and as specified.
15012 DRAWINGS
a. Contract Documents:
6r 1 . Drawings and specifications show the extent of the
systems and characteristics of the equipment and installation.
Items not indicated but required for complete operating systems
b• are to be of quality equal to those specified. Obtain actual
roughing-in-measurements before proceeding with work. Review
architectural and electrical drawings , and coordinate the
w, mechanical work as required.
2 . Follow the spirit as well as the letter of the drawings
and specifications . Have any alleged or existing error ,
omission , or conflict in drawings and specifications clarified
before formulating bid.
iww 3 . Failure to have misunderstandings corrected will not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility of supplying the proper
materials and labor to install and complete the job as required,
or to make good any damage to, or defect in, his work or the
results obtained therefrom.
4 . Supplementary details and drawings supplied to the
aw Contractor, as required during construction, will be considered
part of the Contract Documents.
b. Shop Drawings :
1 . Submit for approval manufacturer ' s detailed shop
drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment to be
"'�" furnished, excepting equipment specified by catalog number, in
which case a statement of conformance will suffice . It shall be
the Contractor ' s responsibility to see that all deviations from
rw drawings and specifications shall be specifically noted and
called to the Architect ' s attention on these shop drawings,
otherwise approval will be automatically voided. Abbreviations
I UM or codes are not acceptable.
15-1
Page 2
Section 15010
2 . Equipment shop drawing submittals shall consist of a
single sheet , or sheets , if required , for each piece of-
equipment ,
fequipment , and shall give the specific data needed for
consideration of approval . All pertinent data listed in the
specifications and in schedules shall be furnished, including all
special features. In addition, the items shall be identified
with the building, and specifications section they appear in by
number, and bound together in an indexed loose-leaf folder . In
order to avoid delays in submitting shop drawings, stragglers may
be submitted at a later date for inserting in the previously
submitted indexed loose-leaf folder . All shop drawings shall be
indexed , and the original submittal shall note which shop
drawings will be submitted at a later date . Marked-up catalogs
are not acceptable . All submittals shall be in proper order .
3 . All materials and shop drawings shall be submitted
within thirty ( 30) calendar days of contract receipt .
15013 CODES
The Contractor shall perform all work and provide all materials
in accordance with applicable codes, state laws, local laws, or
ordinances. He shall obtain and pay for all required permits,
licenses, and code inspections.
15014 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND WORKMANSHIP
a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
determine that each piece of equipment meets the detailed
requirements of the drawings and specifications , and that it is
suitable for the installation shown. The Architect shall be
notified of any shortcomings found during the bid period. Each
piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements
of the specifications and drawings . Equipment not meeting all
requirements will not be acceptable , even though specified by
name along with other manufacturers .
b. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are
specified, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts
of entire system need not be product of same manufacturer .
Furnish all materials and equipment , new and free from defects
and of size, make , type and quality herein specified or appproved
by Architects.
rr
rr
W
Page 3
iW Section 15010
15015 SUBSTITUTIONS
All requests for approval of substitution for materials other
than those specified or shown must be submitted in writing and be
received at the office of the Architect at least ten ( 10 )
calendar days prior to the bid date . All approvals granted are
subject to complete compliance with the drawings and
specifications. Requests shall be accompanied by catalog cuts
and complete technical data pertaining to the request and any
other data the Architect may require. Data shall include ratings
shown on drawings and specified horsepower, voltages, special
requirements, etc . Incomplete data will be subject to rejection.
No verbal approvals will be given, and all approvals will be
listed in an Addendum issued before bid opening date .
15016 CHANGE ORDERS
All supplement cost proposals by the Contractor shall be
accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown showing quantities
of material , unit cost of material , and labor allocated to each
6W item of work.
wr 15017 GUARANTY
a. The Contractor shall make good the following guarantee
requirements within one ( 1 ) year following date of final
acceptance without additional cost to the Owner .
b. All work and apparatus shall be free from defects of
material or workmanship.
C . All apparatus shall be so built and installed as to deliver
ow its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was
designed.
d. Air shall be supplied to or exhausted from all rooms
simultaneously in amounts equal to that called for.
e . The entire mechanical apparatus shall operate at full
capacity without objectionable noise or vibration.
i5-3
Page 4
Section 15010
15018 AIR BALANCING
a. Description: At the completion of the work, a firm which
specializes in this work and has been approved by the Architect
stall adjust all air systems .
b. Scope : The adjusting firm shall :
Adjust air flows to within plus or minus 10% of the shown volume .
Make required drive changes . Adjust minimum ventilation air
settings. Record final fan rpm, amperage, voltage, etc .
C . Logs and Data: After completion of air balancing , a
typewritten report shall be prepared containing the following
information, with three ( 3) copies to the Architect .
1 . Actual air volume readings at all inlets and outlets.
2 . Total CFM air supplies to area from air conditioning
system.
3 . Total CFM air exhaust from. area.
4 . Fan data.
J,
15-4
rr
Page 5
for
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
%W
15051 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
a. Excavations and Backfill :
+ 1 . Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required
for the installation of mechanical work. Any piping or other
work damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired
at Contractor 's expense.
2 . Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width.
Cost of additional excavations to facilitate utility crossovers,
additional offsets , etc . , shall be borne by the Contractor.
Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench shall be
widened if the Architect does not consider it wide enough for a
wr proper installation.
3 . All underground cast iron piping shall be full bedded
i. on sand. A minimum 4-inch deep layer of sand shall be placed on
the leveled trench bottom for this purpose . The sand shall be
removed to the necessary depth for piping bells and/or couplings
to maintain contact of the pipe on the sand for its entire
length. All other piping shall be laid on a smooth level trench
bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length.
o„„ 4 . All backfill under interior slabs shall be bank sand or
pea gravel . (Excavated material may be used outside of buildings
at the Contractor ' s option. The final 8-inch course shall be
soil in any event . ) All backfill shall be placed in layers not
"' exceeding 8-inches deep and compacted to 95% of maximum density
at optimum content to preclude subsequent settlement .
kw 5 . Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level
of surrounding soil . All excess soil shall be disposed of as
directed.
ir.
6. Instructions for installation of exterior fresh water
system are shown on Drawing Number M-1. Owner will pay for and
install the three (3) water meters shown. Contractor will be
6"' responsible to ensure that master shut-offs are installed in
accordance with the plumbing code.
7 . TWD will perform all tasks related to furnishing and
installation of ductile iron (fresh) water pipelines including
fire hydrants and appurtenances to within 5 feet of buildings.
TWD will also install copper service lines to the three meters.
IS-5
Page 6
Section 15050
b. Measurements, Lines, and Levels:
Check dimensions at the building site and establish lines and
levels for the work specified in this section.
C. Piping Installation:
Install unions in all non-flanged pipe connections to apparatus
and appurtenances for removal for servicing, so located that
piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system.
Provide dielectric couplings , unions , or flanges between
galvanized steel and copper pipe or tubing. Install all piping
so as to vent and drain. Run all piping parallel to the building
structure and support it sufficiently to prevent sagging .
Support all piping independently so that its weight is not
carried by the equipment .
Note: Gang as many air vents as possible
d. Piping Materials: and install on west roof of adm.
bldg. and south roof of main. bldg.
1 . Waste and Vent : (No exposure to Hall Blvd. or RR tr. )
a. Underground to 5-feet Outside Building: Standard
weight cast iron with either hub and spigot or no-hub
ends.
b. Underground 5-feet Outside Building Line :
Cast or ductile iron or PVC, in accordance with code.
C. Above Floor: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe ?
with galvanized recessed drainage fittings for 1 1/2
inch and smaller standard weight cast iron with either
hub and spigot or no-hub ends.
2 . Storm:
a. Above Grade : Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe
with 150-1b . malleable iron , galvanized screwed
fittings . Rain drain risers on outside of building
shall be one piece .
b. Inside Below Grade to 5-feet Outside Building
Line: Standard weight cast iron with either hub and
spigot or no-hub ends.
C . Underground 5-feet Outside Building Line :
Cast or ductile iron or PVC in accordance with code.
3 . Domestic Water :
a. Underground (4-inch and smaller) : Type "K" hard-
drawn copper tubing with wrought solder fittings .
Joints shall be soldered with "All-State" No. 430 with
No. 430 flux having a tensile strength of 14 ,000 psi .
(U. S. made copper)
i5-�
Page 7
Section 15050
w
Tyton joint,
b. Underground ( 6-inch and Larger) : / Ductile iron
pipe with cast iron fittings. (All cement lined) .
C. Above Floor: Type "L" hard-drawn copper tubing
with cast or wrought solder fittings and all joints
soldered as specified for underground copper tubing.
4 . Gas Piping: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 psi
malleable iron screwed fittings.
5 . Compressed Air: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with
250 psi galvanized fittings.
6 . Lubricant : 14 gauge 0 . 083 wall steel tubing with
high pressure fittings.
fir.
7 . Miscellaneous: Type L hard drawn copper tubing as
t;
specified for above floor domestic water piping. (U. S. made)
Y.r
15052 VALVES
6. a. Provide valves as shown and at connections to equipment .
All valves accessible and fully equal in size to piping. Support
all valves where necessary. Valves shall be Jenkins, Powell ,
`w Wallworth , or approved . Jenkins catalog numbers, except as
noted, used as basis for selection.
b. Relief Valves: Combination temperature and pressure relief
valves as manufactured by Watts Regulator , McDonnell-Miller,
Crane, or approved equal .
Ser- Type Size Figure Rating Ends Materials
vice No .
Water Gate 3" & #47U 200# Screwed Bronze
& Air under WOG
Water Gate 3" & #1240 225# Solder Bronze
& Air under or#1242 Cold
Water
Water Globe 2-1/2" #106A or 300# Screwed Bronze
& Air & & #108A WOG
Angle under
Water Globe 3" & #1200 or 300# Solder Bronze
& under #1202 Cold
�"" Angle Water
Page 8
Section 15050
VALVE SCHEDULE (continued)
Ser- Type Size Figure Rating Ends Materials
vice No. �
Water Vertical 3" & #119 300# Screwed Bronze
Check under WOG .,
Water Horiz . 3" & #352 300# Screwed Bronze
Check under WOG
Water Horiz . 3" & #1222 300# Solder Bronze
Check under Cold
Water
Gas Home- 2 1/2" #1601 150# Screwed Semi Steel
stead &
under
Gas Home- 3" & #650 150# Flanged Semi Steel z
stead larger
d. Notes :
1 . Disc material shall be selected for the intended
service and valves shall be tagged with permanent label
under handwheel indicating type of disc installed.
2 . All globe , and gate valves shall have Teflon
impregnated packing with 25% Teflon minimum.
15053 PIPING SPECIALTIES
a. Floor & Ceiling Plates : Provide stamped split type plates
on all pipes exposed to view and passing through floors, walls,
partitions, and plaster furring. Provide chrome plated plates in
finished rooms . Plates shall completely cover opening around
pipe .
b. Unions : 150 lb. malleable iron, brass to iron seat , ground
joint , black or galvanized to match pipe. 200 lb. WOG bronze,
ground joint , solder type for copper tubing. Where galvanized
pipe and copper tubing join, dielectric unions or couplings shall
be installed.
.K_A
WW
Page 9
wr Section 15050
15054 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
a. Foundations & Supports: Supports for all apparatus to be
furnished as specified , detailed and as required by the
manufacturers of specific equipment .
b. Hangers & Supports:
W
1 . General : Provide adjustable hangers for all pipes,
complete with adjusters, swivels, rods, etc. Size hangers to
clear insulation and guide where required, as well as support
" piping . Provide hangers within three feet of all changes in
direction of mains . Provide all additional structural steel
angles , channels or other members required to support piping
where building members do not occur as required for proper
support .
Space hangers as noted below except on soil pipe, which shall
have a each at hanger joint with a maximum of one
g j per fitting.
In areas of multiple fittings , sufficient hangers shall be
provided to maintain proper slope without sagging.
Pipe Sizes Hanger Rod Spacing
Diameter
3/4" thru 2" 3/8" 1/211 , 3/4"-5" o. c .
2-1/2" thru 3-1/2" 1/2" 1" , 1-1/4" & 1-1/2"-7 ' o. c.
4" thru 5" 5/8" 211 , 2-1/2" & 3"-10 ' o . c .
6" 3/4" 4" and above 15 ' o. c .
8" and over 7/8"
Provide floor stands, wall bracing, masonry piers, etc . for all
lines running near the floors or near walls and which can be
properly supported or suspended by the walls or floors. Pipe
lines near concrete or masonry walls may also be hung by hangers
carried from wall brackets at a higher level than pipe . Hanging
of any pipe from another is prohibited.
2 . Hangers: Clevis or band type . Grinnell 260, 269 or
similar Fee & Mason shall be provided.
w
W
W
Ir'.o
1£e
r
Page 10
Section 15050
15055 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
a. General : All tests shall be completed and all systems
approved before the insulation is applied to equipment or piping.
Apply all insulation in accordance with manufacturer ' s
recommendations and the Standard of Insulation Application, in a
neat and workmanlike manner . Insulation shall be applied over a
clean, dry surface. Insulation shall be manufactured by Johns-
Manville or Owens-Corning as specified. Insulation shall be
manufactured specifically for the service specified. See Item.
"Inserts & Sleeves" for requirements . All insulation, jackets
and adhesive shall be fire retardant with composite meeting U.L.
and NFP A 90A requirements.
b. Piping: J-7
1 . All piping insulation shall have the side and end
joints butted tightly, and the factory applied jacket pasted
smoothly at longitudinal circumferential joints . All exposed
ends shall be finished neatly with the jacket materials and
mastic .
2 . Vapor barrier of glass cloth covering shall be
continuous over insulated fittings . Unions shall be built up
1/2-inch beyond adjoining insulation for identification. All
insulation with an integral vapor barrier shall have the joints
and fittings covering sealed as recommended by the manufacturer .
All other piping insulation shall have the ends sealed with glass
cloth at the fittings. All piping insulation shall be the molded
type , manufactured specifically for that purpose . Minimum
density 3-pound. All jackets shall be factory attached. `
3 . Domestic Cold Water Piping Above Grade : 1/2-inch thick
glass fiber with vapor barrier.
4 . Domestic Hot Water Piping: 3/4-inch glass fiber with
glass cloth jacket .
5 . Storm Water Piping: All horizontal lines where exposed
and above grade and suspended ceilings shall be insulated with
1/2-inch thick glass fiber with vapor barrier .
C . Fittings : All fittings, unions and valve bodies insulated,
except unions not insulated in domestic hot water piping.
d. Ductwork: Internally lined where shown or specified.
`rr
Prr
t
Page 11
Section 15050
6W15056 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. General : All equipment and installed work shall be as
specified under section, "Electrical Work" .
b. Motors shall be of voltage and phase shown on electrical
drawings and furnished as integral part of driven equipment .
NEMA Standards for the service intended . The name of the
manufacturer shall be listed on the Shop Drawings. The motors
shall be guaranteed for the voltage specified , suitable for
operation within the range of 109 above to 109 below the
specified voltage.
C . Starters shall be furnished hereunder and shall be suitable
low for performing the control functions required.
d. All interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of
r. mechanical equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless
shown otherwise . This does not include the power wiring to
motors , starters, and controllers specified and included under
section, "Electrical Work" .
r,.
e . All control wiring for mechanical equipment shall be
furnished under section, Controls.
6W
15057 MISCELLANEOUS
a. Operating & Maintenance Instructions: Furnish three copies
of manufacturers instruction manuals and parts lists of all
equipment to the Owner. Literature shall be on 8-112 x 11
,. sheets or catalogs , indexed and bound in three-ring plastic
covered binders with a suitable tab index.
b. Inserts & Sleeves: Lay out work in advance of pouring of
slabs or construction of wall , and set inserts and sleeves
necessary to complete this work. The cost of cutting or patching
made necessary as a result of this operation shall be borne by
this Contractor .
C . Pipe Sleeves :
1 . Floor on grade sleeves shall be cast-iron with top f-
inch above floor, caulked and made watertight .
60
15-1 !
Page 12 r
Section 15050
d. Equipment Protection:
1 . Keep all pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps
to prevent the entrance of foreign matter . Protect all piping,
ductwork, equipment and apparatus against dirty water , chemical
or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any
such fixture , equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final
acceptance of the work shall be restored to its original
condition or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
2 . Protect all bright finished shafts, bearing housings,
and similar items, until in service ; no rust will be permitted.
3 . Equipment and materials stored on the job site shall be
covered or otherwise suitably protected at the direction of , and
to the satisfaction of the Architect . If coverings become torn
they shall be replaced until the equipment is connected and
operating.
e. Machinery Guards : Provide guards with shaft holes for easy
use of tachometers for all moving machinery such as pulleys,
belts and shafts. Guards shall be adequately framed to provide a
sturdy installation. Adequate clearance shall be maintained from
moving parts.
f . Cleaning:
1 . All mechanical and plumbing equipment , fixtures, piping
and ductwork shall be cleaned of stampings and markings, iron
cuttings and other refuse .
2 . Water systems shall be flushed clean.
3 . Air and Gas systems shall be blown clean.
4 . Painted surfaces which have been scratched or marred
shall be cleaned of rust or other foreign matter and painted with
matching color industrial enamel , except as noted otherwise.
15-i2
frr
Page 13
Section 15050
g. Painting:
i
1 . Specified under another Section, except as noted.
j „ 2 . All damage to structural steel finishes or the finishes
of any other trades damaged by cutting, welding or patching shall
be repaired to match original . Materials and work as specified
in Section "Painting" .
h. Tests :
1 . Test all piping systems as herein specified.
2 . Soil , Waste, and Vent : Close all openings in piping,
except the high test opening filling systems with water to the
point of overflow. Keep water in system at least forty-five (45 )
minutes before inspection starts . The system must be tight at
all joints.
tr
3 . Water : Hydrostatic test at 150 psig for a minimum of
six (6) hours without a drop in pressure .
4 . Gas : Test in accordance to the serving agency ' s
requirements.
5 . Air : Pneumatic test pressure of not less than 1-1/2
times the operating pressure but not less than 50 psi for a
minimum of two ( 2 ) hours without drop in pressure.
6 . Lubricant : Pneumatic test pressure of not less than
1-1/2 times the operating pressure, but not less than 50 psi for
a minimum of two ( 2 ) hours without drop in pressure .
i . Concrete :
1 . Furnish all concrete required hereunder , including
hold-down pads etc . , as shown on the Drawings .
iw. 2 . Concrete shall be ready mix type with 3/4-inch minus
aggregate and strength of 3000 psi minimum. Reinforcing steel
shall be ASTM A615-68 , Grade 40 , and as shown on the Drawings .
3 . Refer to Section 331-02 for concrete, aggregate, and
mixes and 331-03 for excavation.
iW 4 . Refer to Section 0140 , Quality Control .
iw
i5-i3
Page 14
SECTION 15200 - WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
15201 GENERAL
a. Provide all labor and material required to provide complete
domestic water systems hereafter specified and shown on the
drawings . Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this
Section.
15202 WATER SUPPPLY PIPING
a. General : The Owner will provide the water service from.
Owner furnished meter as shown on the drawings.
b. Chlorination: Upon completion of all tests and necessary
replacements, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected by
thoroughly flushing the system with water to remove sediment , the
system shall be filled with a solution containing 50 parts per
million of chlorine . After four (4 ) hours retention, the system
shall be drained, reflushed and returned to service.
15203 DOMESTIC SYSTEM
a. General : Provide water heaters, piping systems,
specialties, etc . as shown and specified.
b. Electric Water Heater : Provide National , A . 0 . Smith,
Republic or approved equal complete with glass lined storage
tank , controls and limit thermostats , magnesium anodes, code
approved temperature and pressure relief valve and tank insulated
with 2-inch thick glass fiber enclosed with steel jacket .
C. Gas Water Heater : Provide National , A. 0 . Smith, Republic
or approved equal AGA certified gas water heater with glass lined
tank for 100 psi working pressure, automatic gas shutoff device ,
100 percent safety shutoff , high temperature limit control ,
adjustable operating thermostat , baffled internal flue, magnesium
anode , and draft diverter. Set to maintain 140 degrees F.
d. Water Heater Installation: Each with relief valve , drip pan
and drain, as required by state code . If required, gas water
heaters with gas pressure reducing valve as specified
hereinbefore to reduce the pressure from 2 psi to the required
inlet pressure .
15-14
r.
Yr.
Page 15
SECTION 15300 - SOIL, WASTE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
6W
15301 GENERAL
a. Provide all labor and materials required to provide complete
drainage systems hereafter specified and shown on the drawings.
Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section.
15302 PIPING
a. Sanitary Sewer: Connect the sanitary sewer to the 8-inch
stub where shown, verifying the point of connection.
b. Storm Sewer : Connect to 12-inch stub at catch basin shown
on the drawing.
15303 TRAPS
Provide traps on all fixtures connected to the waste systems
except for fixtures having integral traps and arranged so that
the discharge from any fixture will not pass through more than
one trap . All traps shall have a seal of not less than 2-inches
nor more than 4-inches.
a. Exposed Traps: Exposed traps for fixtures shall be chromium
plated cast brass or 17 gage chromium plated brass tubing as
specified.
b. Cast Iron Traps : Traps installed in connection with cast
iron pipe shall be of the same quality and grade as the pipe .
C . Trap Primers: Floor drain traps shall be primed from the
nearest water closet or by E & S Valve or J.M. J. , mechanical
priming valve as required by Code .
15304 FLASHINGS
Provide flashings and counter-flashings on all vents through
roof constructed of four pound sheet lead with couplings or slip-
nuts on top of counter-flashings 2-1/2 inches and smaller . All
roof drains shall be furnished with a 2-foot square , four pound
lead flashing clamped to drain.
15-�5
Page 16
Section 15300
15305 CLEANOUTS
a. General : Provide Josam , Zurn , Wade or Jay R . Smith
cleanouts where shown on the drawings, and required by Code of
the same size as the main with a maximum size of four-inches.
Josam, numbers are used as a basis of selection unless otherwise
noted.
b. Types:
1 . Floor Cleanouts ( FCO) : Series 8330 round top floor
cleanout with nickle-bronze head.
2 . Wall Cleanout (WCO) : Series 8890 round stainless steel
access cover plate secured to plug by countersunk screw. Jnl
3 . Unfinished Areas (CO) : Series 8560 with cast iron body
and bronze plug.
J-11-
153206 FLOOR DRAINS (FD-1 ) 31
a. Provide Josam, Zurn, Wade or Jay R. Smith floor drains of
the sizes shown and types herein specified. Drains will be
inside caulked or threaded outlets as required. Josam numbers
are used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted .
Similar to Josam series 300 A with 8-inch polished nickel-bronze .
Note: Special grilled floor drain for six furnaces in mechanical
room.
15307 CATCH BASIN (CB)
24 x 24 inch , 1/8 inch welded steel , 36 inch deep basin with
heavy duty cast iron or steel bar grate and outlet . City of
Tigard Code. Flow line of outlet 12 inches below top with 6
inch water seal . Asphaltum coated inside and out . Outlet size
of connected piping. Installed top flush with grade .
15-Ito
Page 17
Section 15300
15308 MANHOLES (MH)
Manhole shall be 48-inches diameter I . D . reinforced precast
sectional type with tapered cone top complete with steel steps.
Joints of sections shall be sealed with 1 : 2 sand-cement mortar.
Units shall be of depth required. Provide a poured-in-place
concrete slab at bottom at least 8-inches thick of 2000 psi
concrete . Form channels for flow using half sections of the or
concrete pipe and forming of cement to give smooth flow. Pitch
slab sides into channels at one-inch per fast grade. Provide an
Industrial Iron "Suburban" style traffic pattern manhole ring
irr and cover with "SS" case in cover , or Olympic Foundry medium
traffic pattern.
IW.
15309 DOWNSPOUT CONNECTION (DS)
4-inch cast iron hub extended 6-inches above grade to 5 ft .
beyond building line .
it
w
Page-18
Section 15440 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
15441 GENERAL
Provide all equipment and appurtenances required to provide
3
complete systems for the equipment hereinafter specified and
shown on the drawings All equipment in this section to be
from one supplier so as to simplify installation and
warranty procedures.
15442 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS (BY OWNER)
15443 AIR COMPRESSOR
Provide a Saylor-Beall Model VT-PL735-80, pressure
lubricated, 5 H.P. , 208 volt 3 phase, two stage air
compressor . Unit to be factory mounted on a 80 gallon
vertical tank with, automatic tank drain ,totally enclosed
belt guard, and magnetic starter with thermal overload
protection.
Pump crankcase, cylinder body, cylinder head and inter
cooler to be constructed of heavy duty cast-iron for maximum
strength and service. Pump to have centrifugal unloader for
no-load starting, two oversized tapered roller bearings for
lower friction and extended crankshaft life, and replaceable
needle bearings for longer rod wear . The valves to be of
the disc-type and easily removed from the top of the
cylinder head.
Two stage pump to deliver 17.3 CFM at 175 lbs. with 23 CFM
displacement and at a maximum 845 R.P .M. The oil pressure
pump to be equipped with dial type pressure guage and to be
mounted next to sight type oil level indicator .
The complete unit to be American made and have a shipping
weight of approx 760 pounds.
15444 CAR-TRUCK HOIST
a. General: Provide a Western Model AC88E two post-
adjustable cylinder lift with a capacity of 19, 500 lbs .
9,750 on the front cylinder and 9,750 on the rear . Use two
8 5/8" pistons with a stroke of 67 . 5 inches on the front and
72.5 on the rear piston. Wheel base adjustment to be at
least 84 inches .
b. Accessories : Provide a Western PRM-95 Electric-Oil
Pumping unit mounted on a 95 gallon reservoir with 3 phase
208 volt 7 . 5HP electric motor .
Provide Double diaphragm pump to go into sump in movable
cylinder pit, Graco Model 220-618 with inlet strainer .
Fluid outlet hose 3/4" x 5' & ball valve plumbed to drain
and air inlet hose 1/4" x 5' and ball valve plumbed to air
supply for sump pump. Provide float type switch to turn on
air to sump pump.
15-�6
il
Page-19
C. Installation: Contractor to have five years experience
installing inground vehicle lifts . Install pumping unit and
fill with 50 gallons of oil .
Mount air pressure regulator and gauge for sump pump air
supply near lift pumping unit use Graco 202-156 3/8"
regulator and label its function.
+ Install controls for lift in floor and complete installation
according to manufactures instructions . Demonstrate
operation of lift and sump pump to owners satisfaction.
15445 VEHICLE SERVICE EQUIPMENT
a . General : Provide all service equipment as herein
specified with all necessary appurtenances to provide a
complete usable facility and demonstrate that the equipment
is functioning to the owners satisfaction. Equipment to be
few covered by factories standard 30 year warranty on pumps and
one year on reels . Equipment supplier to have proven its
service to the owner over the last five years, such as
1 6M Mascott Equipment Co. 282-2587 in Portland, Oregon.
b. Service Reels:
1. Provide three motor oil reels, Graco model 218-474 with
1/2"x50ft . 1800 psi . hose and Graco 203-444 meter/control
valve with inlet swivel . Install with 1/2"x 24" inlet hose
1800 psi .
2 . Provide one grease reel, Graco model 218-467 with
1/4"x50 ' of 5000 psi . grease hose and 218-539 with inlet
swivel and 1/8"x16" 8,000 psi whip hose and coupler
3 . Provide one water reel, Graco model 218-484 with
3/8"x60 ' of 250 psi water hose and Fowler-Pem 300
4 . Provide one air reel, Graco model 218-480 with 3/8"x60 '
of air hose( 250psi ) and Fowler-Pem 201-T.
5. Provide six Graco 218-551 and one Graco 218-552 and two
Graco 218-681 and one Graco 180-689 service label kit.
6W C. Air Power Pumps:
1. Oil Pumps : Provide three of each, Graco model 225-852,
r. 5-1 Fire-Ball wall mount pump with, 3/8"x18" air hose and
1/2"x18" fluid hose, 213-099 suction hose kits, 203-987 wall
mount brackets and 203-688 Low-Level Cutoff valves .
2. Grease Pump: Provide one Graco 225-973 Topper pump
system for 120 lb. drum, with elevator, base, inductor plate
41air hose and 41fluid hose .
d . Oil Drain: Provide Graco 225-272 portable waste oil
receiver and Graco 156-789 drain adapter to be mounted in 2"
oil drain pipe to be plumbed to inground waste oil tank .
15-19
Page-20a
3F.
e. Installation:
1. Install according to Manufactures recommended
practices . Provide and install 1/2" ball valves on air line
to each pump and one Graco 202-156 air regulator and gauge
for each pump.
Provide 1/2" full port 1000 psi ball valves on oil fluid
lines, and Graco 215-362 "Runaway valves" ( 4) to go in air
lines to shut off air supply in case of hose failure.
Provide and install in main air line after air compressor
one Graco 217-072 Filter, regulator, and lubricator .
Provide air quick couplers on air supply lines to pumps
2. Use 1/2" galvanized pipe for air supply lines and 5/8"
annealed steel tubing with .083 wall thickness on the oil
and grease fluid lines. For turns in the fluid lines use
smooth sweeping bends, no ninety degree elbows . Use high
pressure compression tube fitting on fluid lines .
On air supply lines to pumps and hose reel use a "T" and
take the air off of the top of the pipe so as to leave water
in the line and away from pumps and tools . Install a drip
leg in air line with ball valve near pumps and at location
where air tools are used so as to collect water and remove it "
from air line.
15445 Vehicle Exhaust System
a. General: Provide all equipment and install so as to
furnish a complete exhaust system for two bays of shop.
b. Provide two Harvey OF-PS-40 high temperature resistant
polyethylene floor fittings with 8 ' of 4" hose and tail pipe
adapter (HF-350) . Provide 8" schedule 80 P.V.C. pipe to
connect the two bays and "t" fitting to connect the piping
to the blower . Supply blower Model BD-9 , lj HP, 208/30, belt
driven blower, weights approximately 100 lbs . .
c. Install blower on shelf between the two garage doors
and mount unit as close to ceiling as practical . Use high
pressure metal duct from floor level to blower eight inch or
larger . (blower inlet 1211 ) and exhaust to outside of
building. Insure that the platform is of adequate strength
to support the weight of the blower safely.
d. All equipment to be installed in compliance with state
and local building codes and federal regulations .
15-20
Page 20
SECTION 15460 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
Y.
15461 GENERAL
Provide all labor and materials required to provide the fixtures
and trim hereinafter specified and shown on the drawings .
Sections 15010 and 15050 apply to the work under this Section.
15462 PLUMBING FIXTURES
w. a. Provide new plumbing fixtures of the type herein specified
and of the quantity shown.
rw 1 . Fixtures: Complete with fittings, supports, fastening
devices, faucets, valves, traps and appurtenances required.
2 . Exposed IPS Piping and Tubing: Red brass , chrome
plated.
3 . Escutcheons: Brass, Chrome plated.
4. Fixtures Set and Connected: To soil, waste, vent and
water supplies in neat, finished and uniform manner .
5. Connections : Equal heights, plumb and set at right
angles to floor , wall or both unless otherwise required or
specified.
b. Manufacturers:
1 . China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American-Standard, Crane,
or Kohler . American-Standard numbers used as a basis for
selection unless otherwise noted. (Owner to select color)
2 . Electric Water Coolers : Sunroc or Elkay.
3 . Fixture Trim : American-Standard, Crane , Chicago
Faucet , or Kohler . American-Standard numbers used as a basis for
selection unless otherwise noted.
4 . Single Handle Supply Fittings: Moen or Delta, Delta
used as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted.
5 . Shower : See Section 10810-02
15-21
Page 21
Section 15460
6 . Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal" . Sloan numbers used as
basis for selection unless otherwise noted.
7. Washer Valve Box (W) : Tap-N-Drain or Guy Gray Mfg.
Co. Tap-N-Drain Mfg. Co. used as a basis for selection unless
otherwise noted.
8 . Supplies and stops: Chromium plated angle stops and
flexible supply pipes.
9. Toilet Seats: Church or Bemis. Church numbers used
as a basis for selection unless otherwise noted.
c. Fixture Schedule: (Colors to be selected by owner) .
1. Water Closet (WC-1) : Kohler K-4250 ET floor mounted
vitreous china, elongated bowl with 110 - 3 flush valve and
5321.112 white open front seat. (10 total) .
%t
2. Water Closet (WC-2) : Kohler K-4268 ET floor mounted
vitreous china, elongated bowl with 110 - 3 flush valve and
5321. 112 white open fron seat. (2 total for handicapped) .
3. Urinal (U-1) : Stallbrook vitreous china stall urinal
with 186 flush valve. (5 total) .
4. Lavatory (L-1) : Kohler K-2894 self-rimming lavatory
with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap and Delta Model
500 supply fitting. (3 total) .
5. Lavatory (L-2) : Same as L-1 except supplies and trap
insulated for handicap service. (4 total) .
6. Lavatory (L-3) : Kohler K-2861 cast-iron wall hung
lavatory with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap and
Delta Model 500 supply fitting. (1 total) .
7 . Sink (S-1) : Kohler K-5943 self rimming, cast-iron
sink with supplies and stops, chromium plated trap, chromium
plated crumb cup strainer and Delta Model 2276 with oak
(2 total) .
8. Sink (S-2) : Bradley Washfountain: Bradley Corp. ,
54" semi-circular, 3 GPM, foot-operated, AFC White Marmorite,
precast, Terazzo bowl material, all standard equipment with trap
Type CFC (supplies and vent through wall or floor, 1" supply
line, 2" IPT waste) , powdered soap dispenser. (1 total) .
15-22
w.
imp Page 22
Section 15460
w
9. Utility Tub (UT-1) : Similar and equal to Williams
Utilatub No. 12 with steel legs, stopper, P-trap, supply pipe
and stops, and ledge mounted supply fitting. Delta mixing
valve with Delta Mode 3579 HDF, chrome. (2 total) .
10. Shower (SH-1) : 2-inch chromium plated drain and
Moen shower valve Model 3150, chrome, pressure-balanced.
H.A.F. (Head, Arm and Flange) Model 3925. (2 total) .
11. Electric Water Cooler (DF-1) : Sunroc NFR-8 or Elkay
EFRC-8 in bronzetone, refrigerated, fully recessed. (2 total) .
12. Electric Water Cooler (DF-2) : Sunroc HCWC-8 or Elkay
EHFS-8 in bronzetone, refrigerated, wall hung. (1 total) .
13 . Hot Water Dispenser (IH) : U.L. labeled, In-Sink-
Erator GN-B, 1/2 gallon tank to heat 60 cups per hour or water
from 100 degrees F. to 200 degrees F. and with 10-inch spout.
(2 total) .
�r
14. Washer Box (W) : Model 8253 . 015 with hose and angle
valves and 2-inch slip joint outlet. (1 total) .
15. Garbage Disposer: In-Sink-Erator stainless steel
Classic, automatic reversing shield, 1 HP capacitor start motor.
15463 HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS (2 total) .
1. Wall hydrant (WH) : Key operated brass non-freeze type
Yw with nickel bronze face plate and hose end. Valve removable
for repairs from outside. Length as required. Galvanized wall
sleeve and lock nuts. 3/4-inch hose end unless shown otherwise.
2. Mixing Valve (WDF) : Service sink faucet, American
Standard 8340. 234 . (1 total) . (Hose-off booth) .
3. Hose Bibb (HB-1) : 3/4-inch hose end with non-flanged
female inlet, loose-key handle and vacuum breaker. (As shown) .
4. Hose Bibb (HB-2) : Similar and equal to American Stan-
dard 8341. 075 faucet with integral stops and vacuum breaker.
(As shown) .
aw
Page 23
SECTION 15800 - AIR CONDITIONING
15801 GENERAL
a. Provide all labor and materials required to provide complete
heating , ventilating and air conditioning system hereafter
specified and shown on the drawings. Sections 15010 and 15050
apply to the work under this Section.
b. Erect all ductwork in a first class and workmanlike manner,
true to inside dimensions indicated, straight and smooth on
inside with neatly finished joints lapped in the direction of
air travel . Properly brace and reinforce all ducts with steel
angles or other members. Fabricate all changes in direction,
both horizontal and vertical , to permit easiest air flow, using
full radius bends, centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times width,
or fixed turning vanes in square elbows.
C . The slopes in the sides of transition pieces shall be
approximately 1 to 4 . No abrupt changes or offsets of any kind
in the duct system will be permitted. Rectangular ductwork is to
be free from "oilcanning" effect .
d. Duct Hangers and Supports : Hang ducts under 20-inches
diameter or maximum side dimension with galvanized strips of No.
16 U . S . S . gage steel 1-inch wide and all larger ducts with
steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hanger .
Support fiber glass ductwork as recommended by manufacturer . t
15802 DAMPERS
a. Volume Dampers: Volume dampers shall be provided in supply
and return ducts where shown or specified and constructed of
galvanized sheets not lighter than 18 gage, reinforced to prevent
vibration, equipped at both ends with brass bearing mounts, and
of sufficient length to provide a complete shut-off of the duct .
3tr
15-24
Page 24
Section 15800
15803 DUCTWORK
rr
a. Glass Fiber Ductwork : Nominal 1-inch thick rigid glass
fiber with U. L. label for Class I air ducts, an NRC of 0 . 75 for a
r No . 6 mounting, a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke
developed rating not over 50 . With integral smooth aluminum foil
vapor barrier exterior finish. The taping system shall meet U.L.
181 criteria and shall be rated as Class I materials. With a
maximum air friction correction factor of 1 . 3 at 1000 fmp .
Fittings may be fabricated of sound attenuated sheet metal .
b. Sound Attenuated Ducts : U.L. labeled 1-inch thick moisture
resistant , fire resistant , coated 1-1/2 pound density, glass or
mineral wool sound absorbing duct liner . With a flame spread
rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not over 50 .
Liner adhesives and mechanical fasteners to conform to latest
SMACNA duct liner manual . Installed in sheet metal duct
specified below. Dimensions of duct shown are net inside of the
liner .
C . Sheet Metal Ductwork : Of galvanized steel with gages,
1w transverse joints, spacing of joints and intermediate bracing as
shown for low pressure ducts in the latest ASHRAE Guide and Data
Book . Panels 12-inch and larger cross broken unless standing
W seams are used and are spaced less than 36 inches .
d. Application:
1 . Sound attenuated: Where shown or specified.
2 . Glass Fiber : All supply and return ductwork unles
W shown sound attenuated.
3 . Sheetmetal : All exhaust ductwork unless shown sound
attenuated.
e . Installation: Anchor all ducts securely to building in such
a manner to prevent transmission of vibration to the structure .
sw
15.25
;g
Page 25
Section 15800
r
15804 AIR DIFFUSERS , REGISTERS AND GRILLES
a. General : Provide registers , grilles and diffusers as
manufactured by Barber-Colman, Anemostat , Titus, Tuttle & Bailey
r used as a basis of selection
or approved equal . Kruege
Alternate manufacturers must be resized as necessary for NC 35
and 100 feet per minute terminal velocity. Use maximum shell
size .
b. Finish : Furnish all outlets with manufacturer ' s standard
baked white enamel finish.
C . Gasket : Install all sidewall grilles with a sponge rubber
gasket on frame perimeter, to prevent air leakage and smudging.
d. Types:
1 . Supply Grilles in T-Bar Ceiling: Type PBTD perforated
face of neck size shown with 24" x 24" nominal panel size for
lay-in installation on inverted tee-bar with deflectrols.
2 . Supply Grilles in Solid Ceilings: Type PBSD perforated
face with deflectrol .
3 . Return and Exhaust Air Grilles in T-Bar Ceiling: Type
PET perforated face with 24" x 24" nominal panel size for lay-in
installation on inverted tee-bar where indicated.
4 . Return and Exhaust Air Grilles in Solid Ceilings: Type
PES perforated face with deflectrol .
15805 FURNACES
a. Description: Lennox Series G-14 Up Flow pulse gas furnaces
with Series HS 14, 2-speed, condensing units and matching coil
sections.
1. Furnace: Up Flow 93 percent AFUE pulse combustion
with direct drive blower and filter, complete with factory
supplied mufflers and vent termination kits. Install per manu-
facturer' s instructions.
2. Condensing Unit and Coil Section: Matched air cooled
hermatic, 2-speed, condensing unit and A-frame cooling coil.--
Refrigerant piping field fabricated. Install per manufacturer' s
installation instructions.
�5-Z�
ri
lfiw
Page 26
Section 15800
b. Control:
1. Room thermostat: Honeywell T-7300 programmable system
to provide individual seven day programming of occupied and/or
r„ unoccupied periods, 3-hour override, automatic change over and
switching sub-base. Note: Parallel thermostats for F-3 & F-8
(conference room and general office) .
2. Operation: Fan to operate continuously in occupied
mode, cooling and heating to cycle as required.
rr
15806 UNIT HEATER
W a. Description: Lennox GSR14 Series, AGA approved gas fired,
horizontal type with heat exchanger, pulse combustion.
b. Control: 100 percent safety shutoff, high limit control,
and if required, gas regulator. Thermostat: Honeywell heating
only, night setback model with switching sub-base for each unit.
c. Manufacturer: Lennox.
15807 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM
a. General : Furnish and install Infrared Radiant Vacuum Gas
41rr Heating System, similar and equal to Co-Ray-Vac .
b. Burners (BU ) : Firing units consisting of an integral
burner-control device installed in a factory-furnished combustion
chamber , natural gas output rating of approximately 75 , 000
BTU/hr. Units shall be certified by the American Gas Association
under American National Standards for vented infrared heaters.
Err
C . Radiant Pipe (piping between burners and 201 - 0" downstream
of burners) : 4" O.D. x 0.065" wall C1010 cold rolled electric
w weld steel tubing.
d. Accessories and Installation: Strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer ' s instructions.
iW
15808 INFRARED HEATER
err
1000 BTUH, gas fired, vent and gas supply as required.
r. 15-2-7
a
Page 27
Section 15800
15809 CEILING EXHAUST FAN (CEF)
a. Description : Direct driven , double width, double inlet
centrifugal fan with forward curved blades and motor and fan
isolated from cabinet . Cabinet with removable bottom grille
inlet , side outlet , back draft damper and sound attenuation.
Maximum of 1100 rpm.
b. Control : To operate by room light switch.
C. Manufacturer : Pace DD, Penn, ILG, Broan.
15810 ROOF EXHAUST FANS
a. Description : Belt driven, centrifugal fan with aluminum
wheel , aluminum housing, motor outside of airstream, back draft
damper and aluminum screen.
b . Manufacturer : Jenn-Air BCR ; similar and equal Carnes,
Penn, Cook, Greenheck, PACE, Acme , Exitaire , Powerline.
C . Installation : Installed on pre-fabricated curb. Curbs
constructed with the top horizontal and compatible with the type
of roof where installed . Curb flashed and counterflashed to
roof . Fan base flashed to curb.
Note: Install all air exhaust vents on west roof of administra-
tion building and wouth roof of maintenance building.
(No exposure to Hall Boulevard or railroad tracks) .
}
P
(7•�S
Page 28
LENNOX EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
F-1 1 - G14Q4-60 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace 93/;
AFUE 120/1
1 - LB-52057CA Muffler Kit
1 - LB-49107 Vent Termination Kit
1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil
1 - C16-4141-00 Coil Cabinet
1 - LB-53031CB Expansion Valve
1 - T7300 Programmable Thermostat With
Q73001018 Switching Subbase
1 - HS14-513 4 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit
12.55 SEER 203/ 30, MCA 20. 6
Maximum 35 amp fuse or circuit breaker
`o F-2 1 - G14Q3-50 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace
93% p.FUE 120/1
1 - LB-52057CA Dluffler Kit
1 - LB-49107CD Vent Termination Kit
1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil
1 - 1116-41W-00 Coil Cabinet
1 - LB-53081CA Expansion Valve
1 - T300 Programmable Thermostat with
Q73001018 Switching Subbase
1 - HS14-413 3 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit
w 13.3 SEEP. 208/ 3,0, MCA 14 . 6
Maximum 25 amp fuse or circuit breaker
F-3 1 - G14Q5-80 Up-Flo Pulse Gas Furnace 93%
AFUE 120/1
1 - LB-52057CA Muffler Kit
1 - LB-49107CD Vent Termination Kit
1 - C14-65 Up-Flo Evaporator Coil
1 - C16-65-00 Coil Cabinet
1 - LB530FlCC Expansion Valve
rrr
1 - '77300 Progrnmmable Thermostat with
Q73301013 Switching Subbase
1 - HS14-553 5 Ton 2 Speed Condensing Unit
11 .75 SEER 203/3,0, MCA 23.2
Maximum 40 amp fuse or circuit breaker
F-4 1 - G14Q3-40 Up-Flo Pulse Furnace 97% AFUE
120/1
1 - LB-52057CA :'tufflor Kit
imp 1 - LB49107CD Vent Termination Kit
1 - C14-41FF Up-Flo Evaporator Coil
1 - C15-41W-00 Coil Cabinet
1 - LE-53031CA Expnnsion Vnlve
1 - T7300 Programmable Thermostat with
Q73001013' Switching Subbase
1 - HS14-413 3 ton 2 speed Condensing Unit
13.3 SEER 20S/30, MCA 14. 6
Maximum 25 amp fuse or circuit breaker
c_e n
Page 29
F-5
S:1 IE as F-1
F-5 SAIL: as F-3
F-7 SANE as F-1 w/prefab. 36" x 36" cladlite pad
U11-1 1 - GSR14Q3-E0 Horizontal Pulse Gas
Furnace 92.4% AFUE 120/1
1 - L3-52057CA Muffler Kit
( 5 Required) 1 - LB-49 Vent Termination Kit
1 - LB56495CA Horizontnl Support Frame Kit
(Does Not Include Suspending Rods)
1 - T30r5A "eight Setbac; Thermostat With
Fan Switching Subbase
15 amp.
k
=�x
IS-30
Yr
iw
%W
FIRE PROTECTION
15900
GeneAat
A. DescA-ipt.ion
1 . Funn-i-sh aU taboA and mateh.ia,Es and penbonm ,such otheA services
nece-ssaAy and Aeasonabty .inc.iden-tat to .the design and .in-stattat.ion
ob an automatic spA.inkteA .system boA att aAeas indicated on ,the
dnaw-ings and as Aequiked by the Tuatatin FiAe MaAshaLs Obb.ice.
B. Retated Documents
1. The Aequ.iAement.s ob att other Sections ob these Pehbonmance
Spec-ib-ications -shatt appty to the wank .spec.i6 ied .in thi.s section.
C. ContAactoA Quae.ib.icat.ion.s
AW
1 . ContAactoA bon the b.iAe pAotection <nstattation 6hatt be Aegutanty
engaged in the tnstattat�on ob automatic b.iAe spA.inkte t systems
and and emptoy woAkmen expeA-ienced and sk.itted .in this thade.
D. Design RequiAement-s
' 1. TheA.ink&A iAe :s
b � p piping shatt be sized .in accordance with N.F.P.A.
StandaAds Pamphtet No. 13 oA be hydrauticatty designed in accordance
with ChapteA 7 ob AebeAenced .standand.
?. Design, tayout and -instatt a ct4y pipe system ut.i&z-ing code approved
automatic devices designed paht.icutahty boA u,se to this type ob
sy-stem, -inctud�ng an automatic aiA pAes-sone maintenance device.
A. A-iA ,suppty by Tigand platen D�stA ict
E. F.iAe SpA-inkteA CoveAage
1 . As Aequ-iAed by the Tuata.tin F.iAe Man,shat and Jinctud-ing bine
pAotection ob aet aheas expec. atty the bottow.ing:
A. Obb.ice OpeAat.ions Bu.itd.ing _
B. F.ietd Openat.ions Bu,itd-ing
bw
*r.
15-31
Fine Pno-teetion 15900 2
F. Manutiactunens
1 . Att spn-inkten spec iatty maten�at; Gn.innett, Gem, Stan, Viking
on equal, with UL appnovae bon u-se .in automatic -spAinkteA sy-stems.
G. Subm-ittats
1 . Pnepane ti.ine pnoteet.ion -sy-stem wonk.ing dnawing-s showing tocation.s
and types, heads on outtets, dry vaeve and dev-iee-s, pipe size-s �.
and cutting tengths, test tees and vatves, drain vatves, and other
netated .items.
?. Pnov.ide 3 segs ob dnaw.ings showing spn.Enkten head toeat.ions and
Layout coond.inated with anchitectunat ceit.ing deta.its to the
T.igand water D-istn.iet tion tev.iem pn.ion to submitting detaits to
to the Tuatatin Fine Manshats Obti.iee bon appnovaP.
3. Spn.inkten eontnacton to -submit no tess than three sets ob ptan-s
to Tuatatin Fixe Mah,shat bon appnovat pn.ion to spAinkteA <n.staffation.
4. One set oti approved ptans bean.ing the stamp ob the T-igand Buitding
Department and the Tua eatin Fine Man shat s 06bice must be maintained
on the pro j'ect site throughout a t phases ob eonstnuet.ion and
must be made ava.itabte to bu.itding and bine .inspectots bon nebehence
duA ing nequ,ined eonstnuet.ion ,i"peet.io".
H. Penm.it.s
1 . Spn-inketn contnacton is nesponzibte bon any permits bon the
-instaetat.ion on construction ob any oti the work inctuded .in this
section, which ane tequ.ined tion appnovat and .in stattat-ion ob the
bane pnoteett on -sy-stem.
1. Authon.it.ie-s and Agencies
1 . Att work under the section -shatt be .instatted .in accordance with
tocat, state and other appticabte ond.inances and satiety ondens.
?. The tiottowing authon,it.ie-s -shatt have 1un-i-sd�ct.ion:
A. Tuaeat-in Fine Manshats Otib-iee
B. T-igand Bu.itd�ng Department
C. T.igand waters Distn-iet
�5-31
r.
Yew
Pine Pnotect-ion 15900
3
Products
rw
A. Mate, -iats and Equipment
1 . Att mqXA.iats, equipment, vaive.s, and devices -insta ted and/on
6unn.i shed under this section -shah be ti sted and/on approved
bon use in a rine pnoteet�on ,in,stattat.ion.
++ ?. Spn-inkteh Heads: Approved heads bon dry pipe systems with
tempenatuhe nat-ing.s bon ,seAv-ice tequ-iAed.
A. Un6 iwished Areas: Rough brass upn-ight heads
B. Finished Axeas: Chrome ptated semi-Aecessed head with ehAome
C 60 escutcheon
3. Pnov-ide metal box containing .spoAe -spt inkteA head's and mount neOA
the main vaeve; box to contain a minimum of -s-ix spo-Ae heads with
+W not .des-s than two o6 each type used.
4. Escutcheon-s: Pnov-ide potiished ehhome escutcheons on pipe extending
thhough watts and ee�ting-5.
5. Valve Mon.iton-ing Switches: Pnov.ide and .imsta t etectn.ic tamper
iaw switches and pne.s-supe sw.itche.s on
eontnot vatves and dry pipe vaeve
Located .in the mechan.icae xoom o6 the
066 ice Openat-ion s 8witd.ing. wining
by etectx.icat contnacton.
6. Above-gxound water Piping: Use standard weight btaek steet pipe
and cast -iron sc4ewed on meehan�cat
6.itt.ings expeeta ty adapted bon spn-ink&A
woAk and su.itabte bon 175 pounds wonk-ing
pnessune. Use neduc ng 6.itt� ng-s where
changes in pipe size oceux. Bushings
and .stip-on 6 itt.ings ane pnoh.ib-ited.
At contnactons option, thin-watt -steel
pipe ASTM A53-76, and meehan.icat 6-itt-ing.s
speciJ.icatty appAoved Jon zpn-inkten wank,
su.itabte bon minimum 175 pounds wonk-ing
pAe,ssme may be substituted Jon the btaek
steet pipe 6pecibied above.
p.
15-3Z
4
Fixe Pnatection 15900
Products
A. Matehiats and Equipment. Cont �
7. Undeh-ground Piping: Connect to water -supply ,source as shown on
drawings. SpAinkter contractor to start at
5'-0" out 6rom buitding and in.statt ducttte
anon pipe, Cta ss 52, to 1 '-0" above btoon imside
mechanical room. x
8. Fane Depahtment Connection: Powhatan 21-201 "Y" type, Stngte clapper
�siame�se. Branded: Auto-Spke UL, FM
approved, po&,shed brass. Powhatan
YY
24-209 hound escutcheon plate, 9j" diameteh
Branded: Auto-Spkh, pott-shed bna,s.s.
Powhatan 17-217 mage plug-s, 2P pin
tug, poti-shed bra-s-s.
9. Baekbtow Preventon: Febeo 806 DCDA double check deteeton ".sembty
with O.S.B Y. R(0 . Gate vaeve-s approved by
UL and FM bon bane protection systems - ,specs� ed
by Tigcvcd (voter D�t,st�cict
tUo.ak o Uther Trades
6
1. Fteetrieat wiAing bon tamper and blowsw.itches on spAinkter system.
2. Etect scat wiAing bon atahm system. „
� Provide one 120v circuit".
3. Nee".wy atarm 6y,6tem by aParm company.
4: Smoke Detectors: (low voltage) . Install in accordance
Tests with NFPA Standard 72A and 72E and supervised by an
approved central station.
A. All i"peettons, examinations, and tests requiAed by the authonitie!s and/
on agencies as -speciied, shat be arranged and paid bon by the bine
protection contractor.
B. Flushing 06 Under-Ground Mains: All under-ground main-s -supptying
automatic spAinkteAs -shaet be blushed in accordance with N.F.P.A. 13
Section 1-11 and 1-11 .2.
C. Hydrostatic rests: Automatic zpAinkter piping tnsta ted on the down-
ztream zide ob baekitow pneventor or pre-s=suAi;fed by bare department
connection 4hatt be teeted at not tens than 200 pounds bor not te�ss than
Para. 3: 2 hours.
Add:
"Provide alarm panel in telephone/mechanical room;
connect to smoke detectors".
15-33
ik.
*•r S
C. Hydnosat.ie Tests Cont
A xephesentat-ive o6 ,the Tua.bat<n Fine Man.shats 066iee shaft witness
the above nequined test. Twenty-�ou,a houh notis.ication shatt be
given pn-ion to anticipated test times. Contact Inspector Bob Ray
at .the bine maAshats 066.iee.
w. D. Te-st Centt6-ieates : Contxactms MateA�ae and Test Ce.7t-i6 icate.s bon
att automatic .spA inkteA ,sy.stem5, -inetuding undeh-
gnound, shat be completed by ,the -instattat.ion
6W contAaeton, ,signed by pnopeAty owneh ox Us
aepnesentat-ive and a copy o6 .said cent-i6 icate
6onwanded to the Tuatat-in Fine MaA,shaLs o66 ice
bon permanent neeoAd.
CVLt-i6.tate o6 Completion
A. Obtain and de&ven to T. gand Wateh D-istn.iet a cehti6ieate, .in duptieate,
stating that system, as .instatted, has been .inspected and accepted
by authox.ities and/on agencies having juAisd.ict.ion, and that aft
negutations a6jeet.ing work have been -sat.i.s5ded. Th.i.s ceAti6 ieate
-i-s considered pant o6 .in.sta tat.ion and must be accepted by the T-igaAd
wateA D,istxtet begone 6 inat payment is authon.ized.
i
Note:
1. Horizontal backflow devices will be installed for this
installation.
2 . Any device installed after September 1, 1986 must have
epoxy coated, resilient seated gate valves or fully ported ball
valves. These valves are to be an integral part of the device
assembly as sold by the local distributor.
3. All device assemblies larger than 2" shall have a 12-
inch clearance on the backside, a 24-inch clearance on the test-
cock side, and 12 inches below the device assemblies. Adequate
clearance (3 inches minimum) must be maintained above O.S . & Y.
gate-valve stem.
4 . Inlet and outlet O.S. & Y. valves on all lines.
5. Oregon State approved pproved double detector check valve on main
line.
15-34
MOTOR CONTROLS SECTION 15920
15920-01 GENERAL
A. Provide all motor starters for motorized equipment unless specifi-
cally shown otherwise. Starter separately installed or grounded as
indicated.
B. Verify equipment for horsepower, voltage, phase and type of each
starter required.
15920-02 PRODUCTS
A. MOTOR STARTERS: ;
1. Enclosures: At interior locations NEMA 1, exterior locations
NEMA 3 other locations proper for conditions encountered or of
type noted.
2. Operating coils for magnetic starter to be of proper voltage
for operation with controls.
3. Integral control voltage transformers with 120 volt secondary
coils to be provided for magnetic starters as indicated.
Capacity of control transformers to be sufficient to supply
control circuit components without overheating.
4. Auxiliary contacts: Provide additional auxiliary contacts on
magnetic starters as specified. Contacts arranged to be
normally open or closed as required.
5. Labeling:
a. Surface mounted starters to be provided with black phenolic
engraved nameplates with 1/8" white letter indicating use.
Nameplates permanently attached to front cover of starter.
b. Flush mounted starters with stainless steel finish plates are
to have finish plates engraved with 1/8" black letters indi-
cating use.
6. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler Hammer,
Westinghouse, I.T.E. , G.E. or approved.
7 . All starters for project to be same manufacturer.
15920-03 EXECUTION
Verify operating characteristics of each motor installed and adjust
overloads as directed by Mechanical Contractor after equipment is in
operation and system is balanced. It is this contractor's responsi-
bility to coordinate starters to motors furnished under other divisions
of the work.
15-35
Irr
DIVISON 16-- ELECTRICAL
INDEX
16010 General Provisions SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION
16020 Codes, Certificates, Tests 16411 Underground Service
` & Guarantees 16420 Entrance Equipment
16030 General Work 16450 Grounding
fwr BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 16480 Feeder Circuits
16101 General Methods & Materials 16481 Branch Circuits
16110 Raceways & Fittings 16482 Equipment Connections
16111 Underfloor Electrical System
16112 Cord Reels LIGHTING
16120 Conductors 16510 Interior Lighting Fixtures
16130 Wiring Devices 16530 Exterior Lighting Fixtures
16134 Panelboards
16135 Relays, Contactors, Time SPECIAL SYSTEMS
Switches & Photoelectric 16601 Dimmer System
Switches
16190 Electrical Supporting Devices COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
16740 Clock System
POWER GENERATION 16750 Telephone
16210 Standby Electrical System 16770 Cable System
16780 Radio System
lMrr
HEATING
16880 Electric Heating
i.
lr
6
i.
0
GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010
16010-01 GENERAL
A. The work to be performed under the contract documents includes
furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to construct and install the complete electrical system as shown
on the Electrical Contractors approved shop drawings and specified
herein. Code requirements shall be considered a minimum guide for
f , work. Where specifications require wiring or materials in excess
of Code minimum, install work as called for in contract documents.
B. The drawings indicate outlet and equipment locations only. All
locations are to be verified with actual field conditions, and
architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and ventilating plans
to avert installation conflicts. Raceway connections between out-
lets, outlets and panels and equipment panels, with raceways sized
according to governing codes unless otherwise noted. No homeruns
or branch circuits are to be combined.
C. Electrical service to buildings to be 16010-02 EXAMINATION
sized 25% over required capacity. OF SITE AND CONTRACT
iW DOCUMENTS
See General Conditions, Article 1.2.2 and 4.2.
VhW
16010-03 SUBSTITU-
TIONS
too See Instructions to Bidders, Article 5.
16010-04 SHOP
iw. DRAWINGS & MATERIAL
LISTS
In addition to the requirements of General Conditions, Article 4 . 13,
w Shop Drawings and Samples, and Part 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal
Procedures, submit shop drawings and material lsits covering all
electrical materials as follows:
" A. Assemble shop drawings and submittal data in hard cover loosele
af
ring binder. Provide cover with permanently attached typewritten
or printed label with name of project, and heading reading
o" "ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL DATA".
B. Group information contained in submittals in sets containing one
copy of data for each item. Organize data in sets in basic
categories listed in index for Division 16.
C. Provide submittal data with typewritten index having same sequence,
numbering and wording as index for Division 16. In addition
vide divider sheets between each section with identifying tabspro-
having same designations as index. Organize material in each
iW section in same order and indentify with same number and wording
as paragraphs of specification section.
60
60 Jb-1
16010-04
D. Submit neat, clean copies of data, 8 1/2" x 11" size. Accordian
fold required drawings to 8 1/2" x 11" size and include in submit-
tal binder.
E. Include only information on exact equipment installed; not complete
"line" of manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as
well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber
stamp arrow or similar concise method.
F. Diagrams for systems to be complete drawings for specific system
installed. "Typical" line diagrams not acceptable unless properly
marked to indicate exact system for this project.
G. Submit all items for complete project at one time.
H. Data not in conformity with above requirements will be returned for
resubmittal.
J. In lieu of requirements for the number of copies of shop drawings
required in General Conditions Article 4 . 13, Shop Drawings and
Samples, and Part 01340-01, Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures,
submit 3 sets of shop drawings and submittal data for review and
approval. One set of data will be returned stamped and marked
approved, or with modifications, additions, or resubmittal. Where
modifications, additions or resubmittals are required, submit 3
copies of revised data. One copy of corrected and approved data
will be returned. Remaining copies of original submittal and
revised data will be kept by Owner for his use. Make any addi-
tional copies of approved, stamped and marked data required for
execution of contract beyond the one returned marked copy. Note
requirements of Article 4 . 13, Shop Drawings and Samples, require
Electrical Contractor Subcontractor to mark his approval on shop
drawings prior to submittal. r
16010-05 ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT MAINTEN-
ANCE MANUAL
A. Provide hard cover looseleaf bound maintenance manuals for
servicing of all equipment installed.
B. Group information contained in manuals into sets containing one
copy of data for each item. Organize data in sets into basic
categories listed in index for this Division.
C. Provide data with typewritten index having same sequence, numbering
and wording as index for this Division. In addition, provide
divider sheets between each section with indentifying tabs having
same designation as index.
D. Incorporate in manuals neat, clean data copies, 8 1/2" x 11" size.
Accordian fold drawings to 8 1/2" x 11" size and include in binder.
ry;
Ifo•Z
16010-05
E. Information included must be exact equipment installed, not
complete "line" of manufacturer. Where sheets show equipment in-
stalled as well as other equipment, identify installed equipment
with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.
F. Diagrams for each system to be complete drawings for specific
system installed. "Typical" line diagrams not acceptable unless
properly marked to indicate exact system for this project.
G. Assemble completed manuals in hard cover looseleaf ring binders.
Provide front covers with permanently attached typewritten or
printed label indicating name of job, owner, architect, electrical
engineer, electrical contractor, and year of completion. Label
back edge with job, owner and year of completion.
H. See 01725, Operating & Maintenance Data, for further requirements.
16010-06 RECORD
DRAWINGS
A. REPRODUCIBLE RECORD DRAWINGS: See Section 01700, Project Closeout.
B. RECORD DRAWINGS: See Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
CODES, CERTIFICATES, TESTS & GUARANTEES
SECTION 16020
16020-01 CODES
iW A. See General Conditions Article 10.2.2.
B. Install work to conform with the National Electrical Code, National
i1w Electrical Safety Code, and all rules and regulations of the local
serving utility, National Board of Fire Underwriters and Uniform
Building Code. All codes, rule and regulations to be the current
or latest addition at the time of bidding.
16020-02 CERTIFI-
CATES
See Section 01700, Project Closeout.
ww
16020-03 TESTS
In addition to the requirements of General Conditions Article 7.8, test
W all circuits, devices and equipment for shorts, continuity, safety,
defects and proper operation. Provide all test instruments required.
16020-04 GUARANTEES
In addition to the requirements of Section 01700, submit the following
guarantee: Lamps to be guaranteed from date of acceptance thus:
6W Incandescent lamps 30 days; fluorescent, mercury, reflector and
projector lamps, and 90 days; other lamps verify requirements.
to.
Ib-3
GENERAL WORK SECTION 16030
16030-01 EXCAVATION
All work work to be performed per Section 02220, Excavating &
Backfilling.
16030-02 BACKFILL
Do all for own work but not before test and approval of lines t be
buried. All work performed as specified under Section 02220.
16030-03 WATER
CONTROL
Do all work per Section 01563 , Water Control.
16030-04 CUTTING
Do or arrange andpay for all required cutting of concrete, masonry,
wood, structural framing, etc. Limitations: No cutting or channeling
or underpinning or structural members permitted without prior
permission of General 1Contractor and/or Architect. No serious weak-
ening of structural parts permitted and any work impaired will be
corrected by others and cost charges to this Contractor.
16030-05 PATCHING
Where trenching is done through existing paving, walks, curbs, etc. ,
responsibility for patching and repair to original condition rests with
this Contractor. Patch all openings in and through concrete and
masonry wit drypack as per Section 03370, Drypack and Grout. In new
work, patch and refinish all finish surfaces damaged by this Contractor
to match adjacent work. Where patch is major in judgement of
Architect, refinish entire surface where damage occurs "border to
border" .
16030-06 FRAMING AND
BLOCKING
Rough and/or structural framing will be by General LContractor except
that changes in work already installed caused by inadequate or inac-
curate information furnished by electrical subcontractor will be
responsibility of this subcontractor. Miscellaneous and minor blocking
required for sole use of electrical work such as fastening and support
of outlet boxes, fixtures, panels, conduit, etc. , will be by this
subcontractor.
16030-07 PROTECTION
Cap or plug all pipe openings during construction. Protect all
completed work against dirt, water or chemical damage, mechanical
accident or injury. Responsibility is entirely this subcontractor's.
Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be re-
jected as defective.
�(0-4
16030-08 SLEEVES
Where conduit passes through masonry or concrete, install sleeves
during construction of same. Where conduit must be necessity pass
through beams or columns, install sleeves and locate as directed. See
16030-04 above.
16030-09 CLEANING UP
Cleaning up and custodial service necessitated by work under Division
16 to be per Section 01710, Cleaning Up and Custodial Services.
GENERAL METHODS AND MATERIALS SECTION 16101
16101-01 GENERAL
Yrr
A. Install wiring complete to every outlet with all devices shown
and/or required. All wiring to be in raceways and concealed
throughout finished areas unless specifically noted otherwise.
For the purpose of the electrical specifications, all areas with
the exception of Electrical Room and Equipment Room are to be
considered as finished areas.
wir
B. LOCATIONS: Verify all locations with actual field conditions,
architectural, structural, plumbing, heating and ventilating plans
to avert possible installation conflicts. Architect reserves the
right to make minor changes prior to installation without cost to
Owner. Coordinate work with that of other trades to assure
symmetrical placing of fixtures in respect to ceiling tile,
grilles, etc. Where electrical outlets occur in face, decks or
base of cabinets or in wall above counters, carefully coordinate
with details and arrangements of same. Any work which in incor-
rectly installed without prior verification with General
Contractor, Architect and/or architectural drawings will be ordered
removed and relocated and any damage to other work will be charged
to this Contractor. In general, locate outlets thus:
1. Flush mounted panels in general 7'-0" to top.
2 . Surface mounted panels in general 6'-6" to top.
3. Light switches: 4'-0"
4. Receptacle outlets - typical: 1'-011 .
5. Receptacle outlets at counter and toe spaces mounted horizon-
tally: Verify height.
6. Telephone outlets: 1'-011.
7. All other outlets: Verify.
NOTE: All mounting heights listed above and shown on drawings are from
finish floor to centerline unless otherwise shown. Verify mounting
heights at non-typical locations. Outlets located in masonry walls or
the walls are to be adjusted in height to coordinate with modular
joints of the materials. Verify requirements with Architect prior to
installation.
16101-01
C. LABELING:
1. General: The complete electrical system is to be clearly and
properly labeled to indicate the loads served and the function
of each item equipment provided under this work.
2 . Install black phenolic or plastic engraved nameplates with white
letters minimum of 1/8" high for all items as listed below.
Nameplates to designate use or function of each item and are to
located on the inside of panel and cabinet doors and to the out-
side covers of such items as disconnect switches, pull boxes, k
starters and time switches. Nameplates to be securely attached
to each item with epoxy glue. Where outlets with stainless
steel or plastic finish plate require labeling, provide engraved
finish plates. Embossed tapes, metal tags, and the like, are
not permitted. Items requiring labeling:
a. Junction boxes: Larger than 4-11/16 all system.
b. Pull boxes: All systems.
c. Terminal cabinets: All systems.
d. Time switches: All systems.
e. Disconnect switches: When remote from equipment controlled,
or where use is not obvious.
f. Starters, contactors and relays: All systems.
g. Dry transformers.
h. Main distribution, subdistribution and branch panels.
D. FUTURE PROVISIONS: Provide pull line in each empty conduit
provided for future installation of wiring by others. Pull line `
"Polefin" as manufactured by "Jet Line" or approved.
E. NOISE CONTROL: r
1. To minimize noise transmission between occupied spaces, outlet
boxes at opposite sides of partitions are not to be placed back
and straight through boxes are not permitted to be installed.
2. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing
devices are not to be placed on walls which are common to
occupied spaces unless no other location is available. Where
equipment is mounted on wall common to occupied spaces, provide J4
shock mounting or noise isolators to effectively prevent trans-
mission to occupied spaces.
F. QUALITY: Unless otherwise specified, all material to be new of
recent manufacture, carrying fully factory warranty, Underwriters
Laboratory approved or approved by local inspection authority. {
G. CONSISTENCY: All like materials of same manufacture throughout
project.
y.
RACEWAYS & FITTINGS SECTION 16110
16110-01 GENERAL
A. Provide all raceways and fitting as required for the complete
project.
B. See Section 16140 for Electrical Supporting Devices.
16110-02 PRODUCTS
A. RIGID GAVLANIZED CONDUIT: Rigid steel zinc coated complying with
ASA specification and Fed. Spec. WWC, latest revisions.
B. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Complying with Fed. Spec. WC latest
revision.
C. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) : Steel zinc coated complying with
ASA specification and Fed. Spec. WWC, latest revisions.
r.
D. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Steel zinc coated.
E. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Zinc coated steel core with
smooth, gray, abrasion resistant, liquidtight, Polyvinyl Chloride
cover.
F. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT:
1. Plastic conduit (Polyvinyl Chloride) :
a. type 40-Heavy wall rigid: Underwriters Laboratory listed for
underground and exposed applictions per code.
G. WIREWAYS: All steel with screw covers. Parts coated with rust
inhibitor and finished in color to match adjacent distribution
equipment. Where installed separate from distribution and control
equipment finish gray enamel. See drawings for size and length of
gutters.
H. FITTINGS:
1. Rigid steel and rigid aluminum conduit: Iron and Steel only,
in sizes up to 1 1/2" plastic insulating type, sizes above
1 1/2" insulated metallic bushings.
2. E.M.T. : Sized up to and including 2" steel factory prein-
sulated, indent, sock or tap-on, or compression type.
3. Flexible metal conduit: Factory preinsulated.
4 . Conduit plugs: Ideal "Conduloc" sizes 1/2" thru 1" and Thomas &
Betts, Push-Penny Plugs Series 1470 for 1 1/4" and larger or
equal for sealing conduits during construction. Steel City
PL-200 series screwdriver slot threaded meter plugs for per-
manent plugs.
5. Floor and wall entrance fittings: Install entrance seal at all
points where conduits enter or exit from walls, floors or
basements, tunnels or trenches below finish grade.
irr
i..
;
I�-7
16110-02
6. Expansion fittings: At all locations where conduits cross
structural expansion joints or wherever conduit is firmly
attached to two independent structures, install expansion u
couplings with bonding jumpers of type to provide up to 4"
movement.
7. Conduit seals: Vertical or horizontal type for hazardous or
other locations.
I. Boxes: Steel City, National, or approved, steel boxes as best
suited for the purpose intended and as follows:
1. Lighting outlets: 4" octagon.
2 . Switch, receptacle and signal outlets: 4" x 4" square with
proper device covers.
3 . Gang boxes: One piece pressed steel minimum 1 1/2" deep x
4" high x length required with proper device covers.
4 . Masonry outlets: Standard boxes as specified above with square
cornered tile wall covers with raise of depth required for
specific condition encountered. JA
5. Junction boxes: Minimum 4" square x 1 1/2" deep accessible
after completion of building. In finished areas boxes provided
with 2 gang device cover and blank matching finish plate.
6. Floor boxes: See Section 16111 for floor box requirements.
7. Pull boxes: Interior locations galvanized steel, code required
size and gage with removeable screw covers. Exterior locations.
8. Special outlet boxes: See other sections of specifications for
for special outlet box requirements.
9. Device covers for outlet boxes: Raised pattern, with rise equal f
to total wall material thickness. Surface boxes with 1/2" raise
and rounded edges.
10. Extension rings: 1 1/2" deep with no more than one added to any
box. Maximum depth of box and extension ring not to exceed 311 .
J. JOINT COMPOUND FOR ALUMINUM CONDUIT: T&B joint compound, or
approved, specifically manufactured for use on aluminum. 34
K. Explosion proof junction boxes at fuel island, flush mounted with
conduit openings drilled and tapped with sealed hubs of size and
number required. Jl
16110-03 EXECUTION
A. Install all conductors in raceways sized per National Electrical
Code.
B. Raceways to be complete with boxes and fittings required. In
general, conduit runs of more than 1001 , or with more than 3 right
angle bends are to be provided with pull box located at an inter-
mediate location. Pull boxes or junction boxes are not to be
located in finished areas.
C. EXPOSED RACEWAYS:
1. In unfinished areas to be run parallel with or at right angles
to building structural lines and closely follow surfaces wired
I(o-8
iYrr
16110-03
over. Conduits offset at panels, outlets, junction boxes, etc.
Conduit 1 1/2" and larger suspended at locations as required.
2. In accessible void and furred spaces, conduit may be run in a
direct line between outlets with long sweep bends and offsets
closely following surfaces wired over. Suspend conduit 1 1/2"
and larger to be run to allow maximum access to space and
located as required.
3 . Wiring above accessible ceilings to be run against the underside
of the roof or against the bottom of the lower cord of the
trusses except for vertical extensions of wiring to ceiling
outlets and fixtures. At areas where the underside of the roof
or bottom cord of the truss is more than five feet above the
ceiling, run conduits to allow maximum access to the ceiling
cavity. Coordinate work with other trades.
D. CONCEALED RACEWAYS: May be run in a direct line with long sweep
bends and offsets. In cavity walls run conduit in hollow space and
do not chase interior and exterior masonry.
E. UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS: Run in a direct line with long sweep bends.
Raceways inside of building to be run below slab in gravel fill.
Raceways run outside of building buried minimum of 24" below finish
grade, unless otherwise noted. Primary conduits buried minimum of
42" below finish grade or as required by serving utility.
F. RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT: Employed for runs embedded in
concrete, underground in wet or damp locations, where subject to
$rr mechanical injury and where exposed within 8' of floor. Runs
underground, in moist locations or exposed to weather made water-
tight with threads painted with bituminous sealer (solvent type
cut back) before assembly.
G. RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT allowed only where EMT is permitted and is
not to be used for mechanical protection of bare copper conductors,
or to be mixed with other types of conduit in same system. Apply
joint compound to all fittings to prevent adhesion of threads. Use
nylon cord for pulling conductors in aluminum conduit.
0
H. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING: May be used in dry locations, in con-
cealed work and where exposed more than 8' above floor.
H
I. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUITS permitted only where flexibility is
required in length not over 1811, minimum size required 1/211 , unless
specifically noted otherwise.
err
J. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT: Used only at locations as called for under
other sections of specifications. All conduit offsets and bends
made with factory fittings. All 90 degree ells and conduit en-
trances into buildings to be with rigid galvanized conduit.
K. OUTLET BOXES finished flush with finish surfaces and to be level
and plumb.
I6-9
16110-03
L. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: For connection to equipment.
M. CONDUIT SEALS: Provide at exits and entrance from hazardous
locations. Not that cells of masonry walls in The Service Building
which contain electrical raceways are to be filled with concrete by
the General Contractor to a height of 18" above the finish floor
eliminating the need for conduit seals in hazardous areas as race-
way will be embedded in 2" of concrete and therefore considered
outside of the hazardous area. In addition, concrete bases will be
provided by the General Contractor at surface mounted panels for
the same reason.
N. Hazardous areas in this project occur at the following locations.
Electrical Work in these areas to conform to requirements of the
National Electrical Code and Administrative Rules of the Bureau of
Labor, State of Oregon.
1. Maintenance Building, Rooms 213, 214, 215.
w
8
I1o ��
60
k
UNDERFLOOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION 16111
16111-01 GENERAL
A. SCOPE:
1. Provide flush floor boxes for power as indicated on the draw-
ings.
16111-02 PRODUCTS
A. FLOOR BOXES: gangable, flush mounted, fully adjustable, con-
crete light formed steel, with rectangular forged brass cover and
flange. Shallow type 3" depth with conduit entrances for 1/2" or
3/4" conduit, Hubbell, or approved. Provide each floor box with
pedestal type service fitting with blank end plate and single
receptacle plate. Finish satin chrome with stainless steel plates.
16111-03 EXECUTION
A. FLUSH FLOOR BOXES: Boxes set plumb and true and adjusted after
installation to be flush with finish floor. Verify location of all
outlets prior to installation.
a
60
CORD REELS (By Owner) SECTION 16112
16112-01 GENERAL
Provide cord reels with receptacles in Service at locations on the
drawings. (Column between Service Bays 1 & 2) .
60
16112-02 PRODUCTS
A. CORD REEL: Automatic rewind cable reel, three conductor No. 12,
with guide roller. Cable length required to limit outlet to point
18" above floor directly below reel. Terminate drop cord with
double duplex receptacle. (Furnished and installed by Owner) .
imw 16-11
CONDUCTORS SECTION 16120
16120-01 GENERAL
A. Provide conductors, connectors, lugs, cable ties and terminiations
for all systems.
B. Primary cables and terminations at primary equipment to be by the
Serving Utility.
16120-02 PRODUCTS
�x
A. SECONDARY SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUCTORS: Copper 600 volt Type "THW"
stranded.
B. FEEDER CONDUCTORS:
1. Copper, 600 volt, Type "THW" .
2 . Color identifications: See "Execution" part of this section.
C. BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS:
1. Copper, minimum size No. 12, 600 volt, sizes 12 and 10 Type "TW"
or "THW" ; size No. 8 and larger, stranded Type "THW" . Special
conductor types where required.
2 . Factory color coded to comply with National Electrical Code.
D. CLOCK SYSTEM CONDUCTORS:
1. Copper, minimum size No. 12 , 600 volt, with code grade insula-
tion for conditions encountered.
E. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUCTORS:
1. Speaker conductors: Two conductor No. 22, solid copper, poly-
ethylene insulation, with tape shield and overall vinyl jacket.
2 . Microphone: Two conductor, No. 22 stranded, tinned copper
cable, low impedance, polyethylene insulation, tinned copper
braid shield, vinyl jacket. a
F. CORD DROPS AND PORTABLE CORDS: Copper Type "S" , heavy duty, rubber
insulated, flexible unless otherwise noted.
G. SPLICES, CONNECTIONS, TERMINATIONS AND CABLE TIES:
1. Conductors #6 or larger, spliced, taped, or termination with
solderless pressure type connectors unless otherwise required.
2 . Connectors: Conductors smaller than #6 made with approved,
spring connectors.
3 . Lugs: Conductors No. 6 and larger except on molded case circuit
breakers pressure tool set Thomas & Betts, Burndy "Hydent" ,
Anderson Electric or approved.
4 . Terminal strips: Molded base screw terminals "Buchanan" Medium
Duty Cat. 525 with tubular clamp flat base for direct mounting s
and center designation strip or equal. Label center designation
strip with W. H. Brady wire markers.
5. Cable ties: Thomas & Betts "Ty-Raps" of size and length re-
quired.
7
Ib-12
16120-01
6. Color identification for feeder conductors Brady B-500, vinyl
cloth piping banding tapes, Scotch Vinyl Plastic Electrical Tape
No. 35 or equal.
7. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballast channel tap connectors:
"Scotchlock" self stripping, size as required.
16120-03 EXECUTION
A. No conductors or cables to be pulled in raceways until raceway
system is complete and has been cleaned of all foreign matter.
Blow out or vacuum smaller conduits andpull mandrel through larger
ger
conduits prior to installing conductors.
B. Identify feeder conductors by stripping with plastic tape as
follows: Where more than one stripe is required, space approxi-
mately 1 1/2" o.c.
1. 120/208 volt system: Phase "A" one 3/4" yellow stripe; Phase
"B" two 3/4" blue stripes; Phase "C", three 3/4" orange stripes;
and neutral with 3" white stripe.
2. 277/480 volt system: Phase "A", one 3/4" red stripe; Phase "B" ,
two 3/4" brown stripes, Phase "C", three 3/4" violet stripes and
neutral with 3" white stripe.
C. Leave 6" single were pigtails for connection of fixture leads and
devices to branch circuits.
D. Splices and taps only where specifically shown or approved to be
made in approved splice boxes.
E. At all locations in panel gutters, wire gutter, motor control
centers, dimmers, etc. , where multiple conductors are run in
accessible wireways, the conductors are to be neatly bundles and
tied with cable ties. Spacing as required to neatly group and
support conductors.
6t
F. Feeder and service conductors at switchboards and panels to be
neatly cabled together as a group and not combined in same cabling
j as other feeds. Cabled conductors to be supported from devices
built into switchgear and/or supported by lugs.
G. No conductors to be installed in raceways containing non-electrical
utilities such as air, water and oil.
H. In general, control conductor to be installed in separate raceways,
lam unless specifically required otherwise.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16130
16130-01 GENERAL
A. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless
specifically noted otherwise.
B. EXTRA STOCK: Provided 10 extra keys for key operated switches.
16130-02 PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL: Where devices are specified by Federal Specification
numbers, the acceptable manufacturers will be considered as any
company who manufactures devices stamped with specified Federal
Specification number.
B. SWITCHES: Minimum rating 120/277 volt, 20 amp unless otherwise
noted.
1. Toggle switches.
2 . Key operated switches: Same manufacture and quality as toggle
switches specified above.
3 . Pilot light switches: Illuminated red handle lit when switch
is "ON", 120 volt, 20 amp.
4. Momentary contract switch: 3 position, 2 circuit with center
"off" , 15 amp, 120/277 volt.
C. RECEPTACLES: Conform to Fed. Spec.
1. Duplex, double parallel slot 20 amp, 125 volt grounded.
2 . Special purpose receptacles: Comply with (1) above as to make
and quality. New NEMA configurations where applicable. See
drawings or other portions of specifications for additional
requirements.
D. FINISH PLATES:
1. At surface wiring, raised galvanized industrial type.
2 . At all typical locations Sierra, or approved, stainless steel
type, satin finish.
3 . At damp or wet locations Sierra stainless steel type (18%
chromium and 8% nickel) , or approved.
4 . Marked plates: Where switches control remote lighting or power
outlets, or where switches in same gang (two or more) serve
different purpose (such as light, power, intercom, etc. ) or
different areas (such as corridor and outside) furnish engraved JAII
plates with 1/8" black letters indicating function of each
switch or outlet.
5. Damp location receptacle finish plates: Stainless steel, N
horizontal plate with short double covers, Sierra, or approved.
6. Wet location receptacle cover: Bell 1900 grey.
7. Telephone finish plates: Stainless steel, split cover, with
split grommett of size as required for telephone cable. Sierra
or approved.
8. Special plates: See drawings and other portions of specifica-
tions for requirements.
9. Install GFI receptacles in toilets where outlets are shown.
10. Install IG outlets for computer circuit.
Ib-t4
16130-03 EXECUTION
A. All devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building
lines.
B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting
is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices not
accepted.
it C. Switches shall not be grouped or ganged in outlet boxes unless they
can be so arranged that the voltage between adjacent switch does
not exceed 300, or unless installed in boxes equipped with perman-
ently installed barriers between adjacent switches.
r
!r
i`.
1(c'IS
PANELBOARDS SECTION 16134
16134-01 GENERAL
A. Provide branch circuit panelboards as required.
16134-02 PRODUCTS
A. BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELS: "
1. Type: Circuit breaker type with molded case bolted breakers and
copper bussing or tinned aluminum. Breakers type "NLAB" for
120/208 volt systems. Multipole breakers to be common trip.
Located single pole breakers at top of panel numbered consecu-
tively down left side and continue down right side. Multipole
breakers installed below single pole breakers with numbering
continued down left side and then down right side. Spares and
blanks to be at lowest positions.
2. Combination circuit breaker and ground fault interrupter;
10, 000 amp I.C. rating, single pole, 20 amp, bolted;
Westinghouse Quicklag "Type B", Square D "Qwik-Gard" or equal.
3 . Construction: Flush or surface mounted as indicated with
following components.
a. Door with lock all keyed alike. National, flush panel type J11
lock, left or right as required. Provide one key for each
panel.
b. Flush mounted panels: Concealed mounting hardware for
exterior trim and door. No exposed fastenings or holes per-
mitted. Flush mounted panels located side by side are to be
of same length.
c. Surface mounted panels: Completely metal enclosed, V-611
high, floor mounted with removable front panels. Exposed
trim fastenings and hardward permitted.
d. Gutters minimum of 5" with 6" required at feeder end of
panel or where feeder runs inside of gutters. Separate
feeder lugs and terminals for each feeder connection with
lugs as specified herein. Split door split bus panels to
have 2" separation of sections.
4. Labeling: Provide phenolic laminated engraved plastic name-
plate (black with white core and 1/4" letters) permanently
attached to top center of interior trim. Nameplate to indicate
panel, voltage and phase characteristics such as "Panel AA,
120/208 volt, 3 phase" . Panel labeling to correspondence to
distribtuiton labeling. Multi-section panels to have indivi-
dual nameplates for each section. No labels of any sort on
panel exterior faces.
5. Panel schedules: Single column, 4" wide x 3/8" high per line,
covered with minimum of . 018" thick clear rigid plastic instal-
led in metal frame holder located on inside face of door.
Panel typewritten circuit schedules to use assigned room names
and numbers, not plan designations with every panel position
schedules including spares. Circuit numbering to conform to
plan circuit designations. Multi-section panels to have
individual circuit schedules for each section.
Ib'I(o
�Yr
f
�r
16134-02
6. Provide breaker handle guards to prevent accidental shut off
of equipment for circuit breakers supplying obviously constant
circuits for clocks, time switches, computer, telephone
systems, cable system, sound systems, and other like systems
as directed.
7. Panel finish:
a. At all finished areas Rodda Baking Enamel or equal.
b. In unfinished or utility areas standard Industrial Gray.
C. Paint sides, top and front of surface mounted panels.
8. Branch circuit panels must have 25% spare power load and
circuits.
B. TRIMS separately packed and
p y p protected.
C. LUGS: Per Section 16120, Conductors. Provide double or feed thru
lugs at panel where feeders are extended to additional panels.
D. Manufacture of branch panels and subdistribution panels same as
specified for Main Distribution Panel.
16134-03 EXECUTIOn
A. Marred, scratched or splattered panel trims and faces not accepted
unless satisfactorily refinished.
B. Panel interiors to be protected from dirt, plaster and moisture by
covering with Visqueen or similar material and to be entirely free
of foreign matter before acceptance.
r.
C. No low voltage wiring (less than 120 volt) to be installed in panel
tubs or bottom wireway areas of floor mounted panels. No addi-
tional barriers permitted to allow for low voltage wiring compart-
ments unless otherwise noted.
14,47
RELAYS, CONTACTORS, TIME SWITCHES & PHOTO
ELECTRIC SWITCHES SECTION 16135
16135-01 GENERAL
Provide relays, contactors and time switches for control of power,
lighting and equipment as indicated on drawings.
16135-02 PRODUCTS
A. RELAYS:
1. General: Number of poles, throws, coil voltage, type of enclo-
sure, locations and special requirements as specifically
indicated on drawings or as required to accomplish control
indicated.
2 . Magnetically heldrelays: 25 amps to 600 volts for all classes
of loads.
B. CONTACTORS:
1. General: Number of poles, coil voltage, type of enclosure, rR
locations and special requirements as specifically indicated on
the drawings or as required to accomplish control indicated.
2. Magnetically held contractor: Normally open, rated for all
classes of loads to 600 volts A.C. capacities 30 to 300 amps,
1, 2 and 3 pole. Automatic Switch .
3 . Mechanically held contactors: Normally open rated for all
classes of loads to 600 volts A.C. capacities 30 to 200 amperes, ={
2 and 3 pole.
C. TIME SWITCHES: Verify locations with Owner.
1. Seven day with power carryover, 120 volt, 40 amp. per pole,
4 pole single throw, normally open. Provided engraved plastic
nameplate on outside of cover indicating use.
2 . Wind-UP By Pass Timers: Wall box mounting, 6 & 12 hour, "Off"
type without hold feature with engraved stainless steel finish
plate. Plate engraved to indicate hours. Mark-Time 90, 0024 -
6 hr. , 20 amap, 120 volt; 90, 001-12 hr. 20 amp, 120 volt or
equal.
D. Photoelectric Switch: Weatherproof, plastic housing, delayed
circuit response, hermetically sealed cadmium cell, 1800 VA,
(105-285) volt, 100 amp inrush current. Twist lock receptacle and
universal mounting bracket. Ripley No. 6190 or American Electric
Company No. 8090-1
16135-03 EXECUTION
A. Install relays with due regard to noise transmission. Where
located adjacent to quiet areas, provide sound isolation. See
Section 16101-01 for noise control.
B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates permanently attached to inside
cover or door of time switches to indicate use.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16190
16190-01 GENERAL
A. Provide adequate supports for all electrical wiring and equipment.
B. The required strength of supporting equipment and size and type of
anchors to be designed for a minimum of four times the weight of
equipemtn or wiring supported including conduit hangers and
conductors.
C. Fiber anchors and lag shields not approved.
D. All electrical equipment, conduit, boxes, etc. , to be supported
from building structure independent of supporting systems provided
by others unless specificaaly specified otherwise.
E. The use of perforated tape or wire for fastening is not permitted
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
rr
16190-02 PRODUCTS
A. FASTENERS: Concrete inserts, screws, bolts, flush anchors; hammer
driven, trigger-fired, and powder actuated anchors. Powder driven
anchors "Hilti", Omark, or approved.
B. OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS: At wood stud walls support boxes with ad-
justable bar hangers having channel cross section equal to Steel
City 6010 series, or mounted on solid blocking. 4" square boxes
&W located adjacent to wood studs may be side nailed and back braced
with Steel City No. 50 box brace. At masonry walls where boxes are
not cast in place, support with flush anchors. At ceilings support
boxes with Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers.
C. SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT RUNS: One hole malleable straps, Steel
City, Appleton, T&B, Diamond, or approved. Conduit staples for
1/2" or 3/4" diameter raceways, regular steel annular threaded
electroplated finish "Stronghold Line" or approved. Beam clamps,
or other approved devices with suitable bolts. 11Kon Clips" as
manufactured by Caddy Fastener Division of Erico Product, Inc. , or
approved. Supports for multiple conduit made up of Steel City,
Unitrust, Globe Strut, or Harvey "Alstrut" channels with conduit
clamps.
D. SUSPENDED CONDUIT RUNS: Adjustable hangers for suspension of
separately located 1 1/2" or larger conduits, Steel City C-149 with
E-170 adjustable swinging hanger flange and threaded steel rod of
adequate size, or approved.
w
E. ADJUSTABLE TRAPEZE HANGERS to support groups of parallel conduits.
Typical trapeze to consist of following: Steel City B-905 steel
channel, H-119 square washer, C-105 strap, 3/8" rod and required
ism ceiling flange. Trapezes of components manufactured by Unitrust,
Globe Strut, Harvey Alstrut, or approved, may be used.
16190-03 EXECUTION
A. Hammer driven, trigger fired and powder actuated anchors may not be
used in the following locations at concrete construction: In slabs
or walls less that 4" thick; in joist or beams which are less than
8" wide; and within 3" of any edge or opening.
B. At concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast-in-place,
support with flush anchors, or power driven anchors where per-
mitted.
C. Conduit staples may be used for mounting conduit on frame construc-
tion in furred spaces, concealed spaces or at other locations on
frame construction.
D. Support all conduit within 18" of each box, coupling, elbow and
panel and at spacings of not more the 6' along runs.
re
u
{
i's)
SECTION 16210
STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 16210-01 GENERAL
(Diesel generator will be installed at a later
date by owner but contractor will install automatic load transfer con-
J;gol (See PRODUCTS. B) .
A. Provide for standby diesel fueled electric generating set at Room
210 (Maintenance Building) . The unit to be installed at a future
6r date (nic) and will have automatic starting equipment, batteries,
charging equipment, control unit, muffler, engine starting aid,
fuel connections, unit mounted output circuit breaker, transfer
w switch and power and control wiring.
B. Electric Generating Set Submittals: Provide for electric generat-
ing set indication location of roughing-in for fuel and electrical
connections and mounting for steel base, on shop drawing.
16210-02 PRODUCTS
A. Diesel Fueled-Electric Generating Set: (future installation)
1. General: Engine and generator to be the product of one company
and be the sole responsibility of that company and it authorized
dealer. The diesel fired generating set is to be factory
assembled and tested as manufactured. Unit designed and
provided with control and accessories for operation in an
ambient temperature of 110 degree F. maximum and -10 degrees F.
minimum. Electric Generating set to be rated for continuous
service of 30 kw, and 37.5 KVA at 0.8 powerfactor, 120/203 volt,
three phase, 4 wire wye.
2. Diesel fueled engine: 4 cycle; overhead valve; water cooled
with radiator fan and water pump. Engine four cylinder, with
piston displacement not less than 254 cu. in. , with minimum
rating of 63 bhp at 1800 rpm.
3. Engine Equipment:
a. Fuel System: Twenty gallon diesel "Day Tank" with flow
switch and 12 volt, motor driven, diaphram type fuel transfer
pump mounted in housing.
b. Starting: Equip engine with a 12 volt electric starting
system of sufficient capacity to crank the engine at a speed
which will allow full starting of the engine. Furnish
factory mounted 2-6 volt, 135 ampere hour lead-acid heavy
duty battery with electrolite. Provide a suitable battery
charging generator with sufficient capacity to recharge the
battery back to normal starting requirements quickly and an
automatic battery trickle charger (2 amp capacity) to main-
tain the battery at full capacity. Battery charger install-
ed in transfer panel.
c. Starting Aid: Provide an engineer mounted, thermostatically
it controlled immersion type engine coolant heater to insure a
minimum coolant temperature of 120 degrees F. in a minimum
ambient of 10 degrees F. Heater 1.5 kw, 120 volts, single
phase A.C.
d. Engine Instruments: Provide engine with engine mounted
instrument panel containing the following gauges for engine
surveillance and maintenance:
(1) Oil pressure gauge.
(2) Coolant temperature gauge.
Ifo21
16210-02
(3) Battery charge rate ammeter.
(4) Alarm lights as specified in safety controls below.
e. Engine Controls: Provide complete engine start-stop control
to start engine from power failure. Provide a cranking
limiter to pen the starting circuit in approximately 45 to 90
seconds if the engine is not started within that time.
Engine control to also include a 3 position selector switch
with the Run-Stop-Remote positions, high engine temperature,
low oil pressure, and overspeed shutdown with signal light
and alarm terminals. See Safety Controls below.
f. Air Cleaners: Provide engine with one or more dry type (or
oil bath) air cleaners.
g. Governor: Gear driven, mechanical flyweight, adjustable with
5% maximum speed regulation and overspeed shutdown.
h. Ignition System: 12 volt battery with radio suppression.
i. Lubrication System: Positive displacement lube oil pump,
full pressure lubrication to all bearings; full flow oil
filter properly located for easy servicing; pressure relief
valve, oil pressure gauge, oil level indicator , low oil
pressure shutdown.
j . Bearing: Replaceable main and connecting rod bearings.
k. Valves: Overhead design with valve rotators, and replace-
able valve seat inserts.
1. Safety Controls: Equip engine with automatic safety controls
to shut down the engine in event of low lubricating oil
pressure, high jacket water temperature, engine overspeed, or
overcrank and make electrical contacts for alarm lights on
the control panel.
m. Lubrication oil and antifreeze: Antifreeze ethylene-glycol
fo -10 degrees protection. Lubrication oil as required.
4 . Alternator:
a. Construction: Four pole, revolving field design with tempera-
ture compensated solid state voltage regulator and brushless
rotating rectifier exciter system. Stator directly connected
to the engine flywheel housing with rotor driver through a
semi-flexible driving flange to insure permanent alignment.
Insulation system Class F as defined by NEMA MGA-1. 65.
Alternator output 120/208 volt three phase, four wire wye,
wound 12 lead reconnectible.
b. Performance: Frequency regulation not to exceed 3- hertz
from no load to rated load. Voltage regulation within plus 3
or minus 2% of rated voltage from no load to full rated load.
Instantaneous voltage dip to be less 13% of rated voltage
when full, three phase load at rated power factor is applied
to the alternator. Recovery to stable operation to occur
within 2 seconds. Stable or steady state operation defined
as operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within
plus or minus one percent of rated voltage. Provide a
rheostat to provide minimum of plus or minus 5% voltage
adjustment from rated value. Temperature rise to be within
NEMA MG1-22.40 definition.
i{
1(0-22
16210-02
r.. c. Instrument Panel: Shock mounted on the generating set by the
manufacturer and containing panel lighting, manual reset
circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage
adjusting rheostate, A.C. ammeter (dual range, indicating
current each phase) , meter switch, voltmeter-ammeter phase
selector with an off position.
5. Generator Set Mounting: Welded steel base equipped with vibra-
tion isolators, battery mounting compartment, and provisions
for bolting to concrete base.
6. Exhaust system: Furnish critical application engine muffler.
Muffler arranged for mounting above housing and painted with
heat resistant paint.
7. Provide 60 amp, 4 pole, SN main line with breaker.
installed by
B. Automatic Load Transfer Control: (Furnished by Owner and/ this contract.
1. General: Transfer switch Underwriter Laboratories listed
(Standard 1008) for all classes of load. 60 ampere, 3 pole,
6w 600 volt rated for continuous duty enclosures in a nonventilated
NEMA 1 enclosure. Components listed below:
2. Rating and Performance: Transfer switch portion of the control
designed, built and tested to close on an inrush current up to
and including twenty (20) time the continuous rating of the
switch without welding or excessive burning of the contacts.
The transfer switch capable of switching load up to and
including fifteen (15) times the continuous rating to the switch
and capable of enduring six thousand (6000) cycles of operating,
at rated current, at a rate of six (6) cycles per minute, with-
out failure. One cycle shall consist of one complete opening
and closure of both sets of contacts on an inrush current of
ten (10) times the continuous rating of the switch.
3 . Construction: The complete automatic load transfer control
enclosed in a NEMA 1 enclosure with a swing-out service panel
and a key-operated door lock. Transfer swich mechanically and
electrically interlocked to positively prevent the load from
being simultaneously energized by normal power and emergency
power. Each set of contacts of the double break design for fast
arc suppression. The contacts to consist of solid silver
cadmium. Individual heat resistant contact chambers provided to
completely enclose the contacts.
4 . Undervoltage Protection: Solid state voltage sensitive devices
to monitor the normal power source and signal emergency power
to start and assume load on a partial loss of power on any
phase or where feedback voltages exist. Devices with calibrated
dial adjustments and temperature compensated for a maximum
deviation of +/-2 volts, from -25F to -175F.
5. Time delay to start emergency power: Provide time delay relay,
adjustable from 1.5 seconds to 15 seconds to prevent the
emergency power from needless starting and stopping during
periods of momentary voltage fluctuations of the normal power
source.
Ito'23
}
. 16210-02
6. Time delay to retransfer load. Provide a time delay relay,
adjustable from 2 minutes to 60 minutes to delay retransferring
the load to normal power after normal power has been returned to
service. Relay provided for (1) overriding the initial voltage
fluctuations of the returning normal power and (2) providing a
predetermined minimum period of operating time for emergency
power. If the emergency set should fail during the delay
period, the time delay to be bypassed and the load instantly
retransferred to normal power.
7 . Automatic exerciser: Provide means to automatically start and
run the standby generating set for a set period of time for the
purpose of testing or exercising the complete engine, alternator
and load transfer control. After completetion of the set period
of time for testing and exercising the standby generating set is
to be automatically shut down. Periods for testing or
exercising adjustable in multiples of 15 minutes per period with
the period repeated on any combination of days over a cycle of
14 days before recycling. During the period of testing or
exercising, emergency power shall assume the load.
8. Meters: Provide voltmeter and selector switch to measure volt-
age of each phase, and ammeter with selector switch to measure
current in phase conductor.
9. Neutral Bar: Provide full size copper neutral bar in transfer
switch.
16210-03 EXECUTION
A. Provide roughing-in information for location of engine generator
set. Provide roughing-in information for location of diesel
supply lines.
B. Verify exact location of generator set and electrical rough-in with
Owner. J3
wt
4
ItoZ
5
a
UNDERGROUND SERVICE SECTION 16411
y 16411 GENERAL
A. Provide for an underground service from PGE pole #349 at --the
railroad tracks to the building service equipment as indicated on
the drawings and specified herein. Work distribution for under-
ground service to be as follows:
0 B. PRIMARY (above 600 volts) :
1. Items provided and installed by Portland General Electric.
a. Primary cables and terminations.
b. Pad mounted transformer.
2. Work by General Contractor: Concrete transformer pad complete
with gravel fill below pad.
3 . Work by Electrical Subcontractor:
AW a. Trenching and backfilling for primary cables per Portland
General Electric Co. requirements.
b. 4" non-metallic conduit under all paved areas with rigid
,,, galvanized conduit elled up into primary section of pad
mounted transformer. Provide Pull-Line in all empty
conduits.
C. SECONDARY SERVICE:
1. Work by Portland General Electric Co. :
a. Furnishing and installing meter at Main Distribution Panel.
b. Connection of secondary service conductors at the pad mounted
transformer.
2. Items furnished by Portland General Electric Company for in-
stallation by electrical subcontractor.
a. Current transformers for installation in the current trans-
former and metering sections of the Main Distribution Panel.
3. Items provided by electrical subcontractor:
a. Meter base. Transformer pad grounding as required by PGE.
b. Underground secondary service conduits between transformer
pad and current transformer and metering compartment of the
Main Distribution Panel.
16411-02 PRODUCTS
A. RACEWAYS: Rigid galvanized with non-metallic raceways used only at
locations where allowed. See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings.
B. CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120 and drawings.
C. PULL LINE: See Section 16101-F, Future Provisions.
16411-03 EXECUTION
A. Provide trench of depth as required to allow serving utility to
install primary burial cables 42" below finish grade. Provide 6"
of sand fill below primary conductors and 18" above.
w
�w 1G-Z5
Fr
ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT SECTION 16420
16420-01 GENERAL
A. Provide a Main Distribution Panel as shown on drawings containing
all components as indicated.
B. Submit complete shop drawings for approval prior to construction.
16420-02 PRODUCTS
A. MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL: Floor mounted, free standing, indoor
type, without doors, dead front, switchboard construction. Size
and configuration of panel to conform to space available.
1. Breakers: Molded case unless otherwise noted, with bolted
connections and having interrupting capacities and trip size as
required by PGE.
2. Internal connections: Made with bus bars adequately supported
horizontally and vertically to withstand short circuit currents
of 50,000 amps without distortion. All bussing copper based on
1000 amps per square inch or aluminum at 568 amps per square
inch. Lugs: See Section 16120, Conductors.
3 . Sized to allow proper entrance of feeder and service conductors.
4. Finish: Standard factory industrial gray applied over 2 coats
of rust resisting primer.
5. Labeling: Provide laminated engraved black plastic nameplates
with white letter permanently attached to panel exterior. Size
of nameplates and lettering as directed. Label all distribution
breakers, main breakers, sub-breakers and panel sections to pro-
perly identify all components. In addition provide a master
nameplate indicating project name and date and the name of the
Architects, Electrical Engineer and Electrical Contractor.
B. Main distribution panel must have 25% spare panel load and circuits. fl
C. MANUFACTURE: ITE Imperial, Square D, General Electric, Zinsco,
Westinghouse, or approved.
D. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH to be supplied by owner and installed
and connected by contractor. (The reason for this is because
the generator must be compatible with this transfer switch) .
16420-03 EXECUTION
A. Maintain openings into and through the building as required for
installation of equipment and coordinate installation with other
pirme contractors.
B. Protect panel from dirt, plaster and moisture by covering with
Visqueen or similar material during construction and leave panel
entirely free of foreign matter at time of final acceptance.
C. Marred, scratched or splattered trims or faces will not be accept-
ed. Repain and refinish surfaces to leave panel in new condition
at time of acceptance.
I� 26
GROUNDING SECTION 16450
16450-01 GENERAL
A. Provide grounding of all electrical equipment, raceways, enclosures
and cabinets for clock, telephone, fire alarm, etc. , in accord with
code rules and establish safety practices.
B. Provide grounding for system neutrals.
C. Receptacle grounding terminal to be bonded to raceway system per
code.
r D. Provide grounding conductor in all multi-outlet raceways and in
underfloor ducts.
16450-02 PRODUCTS
A. Grounding conductors (other than neutrals) copper with green
insulation or identified with permanent green banding wherever
exposed at terminals, pull boxes, panels, etc. Grounding conduc-
tors when run beyond equipment or enclosures to be enclosed in
raceway.
B. Grounding connections to be case solderless type.
C. Ground rods: Copperweld or approved, length and diameter as
per code.
16450-03 EXECUTION
A. System ground to be made from the neutral bus at the Main Distibu-
tion Panel to the nearest 1" or larger cold water pipe. See
plumbing drawings for cold water pipe stub provided for grounding
connection.
r. B. Grounding conductor in multi-outlet raceways and underfloor ducts
to be bonded to branch circuit or feeder conduits unless otherwise
noted, and connected to grounding terminals of receptacles.
�r
C. Provide grounding conductor for Panel between neutral bus in panel
and neutral bus at the Main Distribution Panel.
D. Coordinate grounding at pad mounted transformer with serving
utility.
rrr E. Grounding in Accounting Room as directed by equipment supplier.
F. Provide grounding conductor for computer outlet (s) to the main
distribution panel ground bus.
i4p-z7
x
FEEDER CIRCUITS SECTION 16480
16480-01 GENERAL
Provide all feeders as shown on drawings.
16480-02 PRODUCTS
A. FEEDER CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120, Conductors.
B. FEEDER BUSWAY: See Section 16125, Busways.
C. FEEDER RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings
16480-03 EXECUTION
A. Feeders to be concealed in all finished areas and run overhead or
underground at Contractor's option unless otherwise noted. Feeders
in Maintenance Building and between Office and Maintenance
Building to be underground.
B. All feeder conductors to be continous from origin to panel or h
equipment without running splice in intermediate pull or splice
box. Unless otherwise noted, each feeder raceway is to contain
only those conductors constituting a single feeder.
C. Feeder raceways to enter directly opposite to terminal lugs where
possible.
lb-28
rr
BRANCH CIRCUITS SECTION 16481
rr, 16481-01 GENERAL.
Provide branch circuits to all outlets, devices, motors, appliances and
electrical equipment unless otherwise noted.
16481-02 PRODUCTS
rwr A. All branch circuit conductors copper, No. 12 minimum unless other-
wise noted. See Section 16120, Conductors.
B. RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings. Raceways cast
in concrete or encased in concrete to be rigid galvanized.
16481-03 EXECUTION
o
A. Install branch circuit wiring in raceways throughout project unless
otherwise noted.
it
B. See equipment schedules, architectural, mechanical and plumbing
drawings for equipment locations. Verify all roughing-in require-
ments prior to installation of branch circuits.
C. See Section 16101, General Methods & Materials, for general wiring
requirements.
D. Numbering of branch circuits in panelboards to conform to plan
designations.
E. Branch circuit raceways in hazardous areas are to be cast in
concrete or run in cavities of masonry except as required at the
service island to feed overhead outlets and equipment. Coordinate
installation with masonry subcontractor.
it
kw
6W
16.29
f(
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS SECTION 16482
16482-01 GENERAL
f
A. Provide all electrical work for plumbing, heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and other trades unless otherwise noted.
B. Verify extent, quantity, capacity, etc. and test all circuits for
fusing, continuity and control.
C. Determine voltage and phase of each item before connecting, and
if characteristics are not proper for energy available immediately
notify Owner.
D. Connect to all equipment as noted and scheduled on drawings.
E. Provide all cords, cord caps, circuit protection, disconnect
switches and necessary devices required for proper connection of
equipment.
F. Control wiring between starter, electrically operated control
components, etc. furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor,
unless specifically noted otherwise. Verify location of all
control devices with mechanical drawings and temperature control
contractor and make connections as required. All control devices
furnished by Mechanical Contractor are to be set in place by him
unless otherwise noted. Mechanical Contractor to furnish complete
set of drawings indicating all terminal designations and connec-
tions to be made by Electrical Contractor. Coordinate installation
with Mechanical Contractor prior to roughing-in.
16482-02 PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL: Provide all cords, cord caps, circuit protection, dis-
connect switches and necessary devices required for proper
connection of equipment. See other sections of specifications for
requirements of these items.
B. DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Heavy duty unfused unless otherwise noted.
Disconnect switches for fractional horsepower, 120 volt motors may
be single pole, motor rated toggle switches. Enclosures for
disconnect switches as shown or required for conditions
encountered.
C. RECEPTACLES: See drawings and Section 16130, Wiring Devices.
D. CORD CAPS: See drawing requirements. Provide cord caps to match
receptacles provided.
E. CONDUCTORS: See Section 16120, Conductors, and drawings.
G. RACEWAYS: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings.
16482-03 EXECUTION
A. Verify exact location and method of connection to each piece of
equipment prior to roughing-in. Where roughing-in is different
from that shown onthe drawings, verify requirements with Owner
before proceeding.
B. Motor rotations to be checked and connected for proper direction.
16-30
W
INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16510
16510-01 GENERAL
A. Provide lighting fixtures of type and wattage indicated on drawings
by letter and number shown adjacent to lighting outlet symbol. A
fixture typical for location is to be installed at every lighting
outlet whether specifically shown or not.
B. Fixtures to be provided complete with lamps, ballasts, reflectors,
diffusers, lenses, shielding, hangers, accessories and fittings.
C. Submit a list of fixtures, complete with catalog numbers,
manufacture and drawings or photographs for approval.
D. See Section 16010-03 "Approval of materials equal to those provided
W in the specifications", for requirements of substitute materials.
16510-02 PRODUCTS
A. All fixtures to be of a recognized, standard manufacture bearing
Underwriter approval label.
1W B. LAMPS: See Light Fixture Schedule for lamp specifications.
C. BALLASTS:
1. Rapid start 430 ma: Premium "Class P", CBM approved, designed
and tested so they do not exceed 90 degree C operating in a
65 degree C heat box. Temperature test conducted at a minimum
of 25 degree C over CBM and UL testing procedures. Ballasts
guaranteed not to overheat the capacitor insulting oil beyond
the capacitor manufacturer's warranty limits. General Electric
Super Premium, Advance Kool Koil Mark III , or approved.
2. Metal Halide: High power factor, constant wattage general
electric, advance or approved.
3. Voltage: Provide ballast of proper voltage for operation of
fixtures with circuiting shown on drawings. Verify.
D. FIXTURE LENGTHS: Furnish units of lengths shown on drawings. For
continuous runs furnish end plates, connectors and all required
fittings.
E. CEILING MOUNTED FIXTURES: Verify mounting conditions. Where
fixtures are to be mounted on low density cellulose fiber ceilings,
fixtures to be Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct
mounting. If direct mounting fixtures are not available, provide
1 1/2" spacers.
F. HANGERS:
aw 1. Stem mounted fixtures suspended from aligner canopies with stems
of lengths as shown on drawings or as specified. At mechanical
and equipment rooms fixture stems to be adjusted as required to
coordinate installation of light fixtures with mechanical
16510-02
equipment, piping and duct work. Verify stem length with
Architect prior to installtion. Where stem lengths specified
are obviously in error, adjust to suit room conditions
encountered.
2. Surface ceiling mounted fixtures, flanged type fluorsescent
troffer fixtures, and recessed incandescent fixtures may be
supported from structural members of hung ceilings. Provide all
channels, supporting devices and hangers as required for
connection to hung ceiling.
G. Fixture wire to be of type and size approved for maximum heat
conditions encountered.
H. Recessed incandescent and metal halide fixtures with integral
outlet boxes to be UL approved for feed thru wiring per the
National Electrical Code. Where approved fixtures with integral
outlet boxes are not available, provide fixtures with flex
connection to separate branch circuit outlet boxes.
I. FIXTURE TYPES:
(See Schedule on Sheet A-17)
16510-03 EXECUTION
A. Fixtures thoroughly cleaned, assembled, lamped and installed in
place. {5
B. Coordinate installation of fixtures with other prime contractors,
and verify all roughing-in requirements prior to installation.
C. All fixtures to be illuminated at time of acceptance. See lamp
guarantee requirements quirements of Section 16020-04.
D. All recessed fixtures to be flex connected to branch circuit
outlet box. Connections to conform to National Electrical Code.
E. Fixtures located in mechanical and store rooms to be coordinated
with mechanical ductwork, piping and equipment.
16-32
rr
EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16530
w 16530-01 GENERAL
A. Provide lighting fixtures of type and wattage indicated on drawings
by letter and number shown adjacent to lighting outlet symbol. A
fixture typical for location is to be installed at every lighting
outlet whether specifically shown or not.
B. Fixtures to be complete with lamps, ballast, reflectors, diffusers,
lenses, shielding, hangers, poles and accessories and fittings.
C. Submit a list of fixtures, complete with catalog numbers, manufac-
ture and drawings or photographs for approval. See Section
16010-03 "Approval of Materials Equal to Those Provided in
Specification" for requirements of substitute materials.
D. Concerete bases for post top light fixtures to be provided by
General Contractor.
16530-02 PRODUCTS
A. All fixtures to be of a recognized standard manufacturer bearing
Underwriteres approval label for damp or wet locations as required
by Code.
B. LAMPS: See Light Fixture Schedule.
It , C. BALLASTS:
1. Flourescent: Low temperature of requirements of Section
16510-02-C.
2 . Metal -Halide: Low temperature, high power factor, constant
wattage General Electric, Advance, or approved.
3. Voltage: Provide ballast of proper voltage for operation of
fixtures. Verify.
D. FIXTURE TYPES:
r (See Schedule on Sheet A-17) .
16530-03 EXECUTION
i.
A. Deliver bolt rings for post top light fixtures to General
Contractor for casting into concrete bases or masonry columns.
Poles to be set straight and plumb and bases grouted as required.
B. See architectural drawings for exact location of all outside
lighting fixtures.
C. All recessed fixtures to be flex connected to branch circuit
outlet box. Connect to conform to National Electrical Code, or
fixtures U.L. approved for direct and feed thru wiring.
Ic�-33
DIMMER SYSTEM SECTION 16601
16601-01 GENERAL
Provide a remotely controlled, manually adjustable, solid state, semi-
conductor type Metal Halide dimming system for Multi-Use Room 102.
System consisting of power unit, intensity control, separate "On-Off"
switch and associated wiring. Metal Halide fixtures with dimming
ballast specified under Section 16530, Interior Lighting Fixtures.
16601-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS:
1. Power unit: Surface mounted, 120 volt solid state, semi-
conductor type, UL listed .
2. Intensity control: Flush wall mounting with engraved s.s.
finish plate.
3. "On-Off" switch: See Section 16130, Wiring Devices. r;
4. Raceways: See Section 16110, Raceways & Fittings.
5. Conductors: See Section 16120, Conductors.
16601-03 EXECUTION
Complete system to be installed per manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
Verify.
h
CLOCK SYSTEM SECTION 16740
16740-01 GENERAL
Clock system to consist of 120 volt clock hangers, 120 volt plug-in
synchronous clocks and associated wiring. Clocks are non-system and
require manual resetting of each clock after power interruption or for
change to "Daylight Savings Time".
16740-02 PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS: (Contractor to provide outlets)(Owner provides clocks) (3 )
1. Clocks: 120 volt, non-system, synchronous, plug-in, 12"
diameter, semi-recessed with matte black case, black hands and
numberals, white face. Simplex 78-45-120V.
2. Clock hanger outlet: 2-9/16" deep, 8-1/8" octagon, with 120
volt receptacle. . Simplex 5928.
16740-03 EXECUTION
Owner will install clocks. Contractor will install electrical
outlets (3) . Clocks will be located in multi-purpose room,
general office, and crew room.
��0•34
fYw
TELEPHONE SECTION 16750
16750-01 GENERAL
A. Provide a system of empty conduit, boxes, terminal cabinets, etc. ,
as indicated on drawings for installation of telephone wiring and
equipment by Owner.
B. Coordinate the installation with Serving Utility prior to roughing-
in.
C. Telephone service to be underground from property line to telephone
terminal located in Telephone Equipment Room. Provide 3" conduit
with pullwire.
iw
16750-02 PRODUCTS
A. Raceways for service cable from designated point outside building
to terminal location to be non-metallic with long sweep rigid
galvanized ells.
�r
B. Raceways within building minimum 3/411. See Section 16110, Raceways
& Fittings for requirements.
" C. PULL LINES: See Section 16101-01-F, Future Provisions.
D. WALL OUTLETS:
1. At concrete or masonry walls minimum of 4" square with single
gang device cover and split telephone finish plate per Section
16130.
2. At frame partitions or where outlets are located in blank panels
of cabinets or casework, provide 4" square with single gang
device cover and split telephone finish plate per Section
16130.
E. UNDERFLOOR DUCTS AND SERVICE FITTINGS: See Section 16111.
ow.
16750-03 EXECUTION
A. Verify location of all telephone outlets with architectural
drawings prior to roughing-in. Where outlets occur at built-in
counters or desks, coordinate with other trades.
r
' B. Verify installation requirements with Serving Utility. Stub conduit
up nominally 6" above floor or below ceiling at terminal facilities
provided by telephone company and lock into metal template with
locknuts and insulating bushings. Template formed metal pan with
no sharp corners.
,, C. Conduit bends to be large radius field bends or factory ells.
16750-03
D. At wall outlets at frame construction the telephone connector to be
placedinside wall cavity and not in surface mounted box located
over telephone outlet. Thru wall box and conduits at these
locations to be properly supported.
E. Provide pull line in all empty raceways to facilitate future
installation of conductors by Onwer. No pull lines required in
underfloor duct system.
J. Location and type of- ceiling speakers by onwer f-
telephe system t-.- be ver+fiee1. Pr-! -e-r to installat
-Entire reging system inshallabim coordinated wibit trades.
CABLE TV SYSTEM SECTION 16770
16770-01 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete cable TV system.
B. Cable service to be underground from property line to cable
terminal location in telephone equipment room.
C. Provide 2" conduit with pullwire.
D. Provide raceway with cable #RG-6 Quad. shielded plus #RG-6
one piece connectors for each cable outlet. (Willamette
Cable Co. ) .
RADIO SYSTEM SECTION 16780
16780-01 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete radio raceway and wiring system. `r
B. Install a 3/4" conduit with a Belden #8729 cable from each
outlet to the radio terminal in the telephone equipment room.
Leave 8 feet of wire at each end. (Connections by others) . F
ELECTRIC HEATING SECTION 16880
16880-01 GENERAL
A. Provide electric heating units as required, including a 2-KW
baseboard heater in the mechanic ' s room and radiant heaters
in the shop area. r,
r
i